Service Manual Rev. 01: Staple Finisher-D1 / Booklet Finisher-D1

Staple Finisher-D1 / Booklet Finisher-D1
Service Manual Rev. 01
Product Outline
Technology
Periodic Servicing
Parts Replacing and Cleaning
Adjustment
Troubleshooting
Installation
Appendix
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are
installation, maintenance, and repair of products. This manual covers all localities where the inconsistent with local law.
products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this manual that does not
apply to your locality. Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks
Corrections of the individual companies.
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements
or changes in products. When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this Copyright
manual, Canon will release technical information as the need arises. In the event of major This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may
changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new not be copied, reproduced or translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the
edition of this manual. consent of Canon Inc.
© CANON INC. 2012
Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential
information.
Explanation of Symbols The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:
The following symbols are used throughout this Service Manual.
Symbols Explanation Symbols Explanation 1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the
relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of
operation.
Check. Remove the claw.
In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal
name accompanies the symbol, the arrow indicates the direction of the
electric signal.
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the
Check visually. Insert the claw.
front door, and closing the delivery unit door, which results in supplying the machine with
power.
Check the noise. Use the bundled part. 2. In the digital circuits, '1' is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is
"High", while '0' is used to indicate "Low". (The voltage value, however, differs from
circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD
signal goes on when '0'.
Disconnect the connector. Push the part.
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked
in the field. Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors used in the machines
are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of the DC
controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the loads.
Connect the connector. Plug the power cable.
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product
improvement or other purposes, and major changes will be communicated in the form of
Remove the cable/wire
Service Information bulletins.
from the cable guide or wire Turn on the power.
saddle. All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service
Manual and all relevant Service Information bulletins and be able to identify and isolate faults
in the machine.
Set the cable/wire to the
cable guide or wire saddle.
Remove the screw.
Tighten the screw.

Contents
0 Safety Precautions Assist Roller Engage Operation------------------------------------------------2-16
Intermediate Process Tray Assembly----------------------------------- 2-18
Notes Before Servicing-------------------------------------------------------0-2
Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-18
Points to Note at Cleaning---------------------------------------------------0-2
Basic Sequence of Operations-------------------------------------------------2-19
1 Product Outline Stacking Operation----------------------------------------------------------------2-20
Shift Operation----------------------------------------------------------------------2-23
Product Specifications--------------------------------------------------------1-2 Stapling Operation-----------------------------------------------------------------2-24
Specifications ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-2
Delivery Operation-----------------------------------------------------------------2-25
Staple Position------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-3
Neat Alignment Operation------------------------------------------------------2-27
Names of Parts-----------------------------------------------------------------1-5 Upper Neat Alignment Plate Operation-----------------------------------------------2-27
External View------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-5 Upper Return Roller Operation---------------------------------------------------------2-27
Cross Section------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-6 Lower Neat Alignment Plate Operation-----------------------------------------------2-28
Lower Return Roller Operation---------------------------------------------------------2-28
2 Technology Saddle Stitcher Unit--------------------------------------------------------- 2-29
Basic Construction-------------------------------------------------------------2-2 Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-29
Overview------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-2 Basic Sequence of Operations-------------------------------------------------2-30
Electrical Control Unit---------------------------------------------------------2-3 Paper Feed Operation------------------------------------------------------------2-31
Overview------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-3 Alignment Operation--------------------------------------------------------------2-33
Finisher Controller PCB----------------------------------------------------------- 2-3 Staple Operation-------------------------------------------------------------------2-34
Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB------------------------------------------------- 2-4 Paper Folding/Delivery Operations -------------------------------------------2-35
Stacking Unit--------------------------------------------------------------------2-5 Detecting Jams--------------------------------------------------------------- 2-38
Overview------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-5 Jam inspection in Finisher-------------------------------------------------------2-38
Tray Ascent/Descent Control---------------------------------------------------- 2-6 Stitcher area jam detection------------------------------------------------------2-40
Auxiliary Tray Lift Control--------------------------------------------------------- 2-7
Tray Paper Surface Detection--------------------------------------------------- 2-8 3 Periodic Servicing
Feeding Unit---------------------------------------------------------------------2-9 User Maintenance-------------------------------------------------------------3-2
Overview------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-9 User Maintenance------------------------------------------------------------------ 3-2
Basic Sequence of Operations------------------------------------------------- 2-11 User Maintenance Items (finisher)------------------------------------------------------ 3-2
Horizontal Registration Detection----------------------------------------------2-12 User Maintenance Item (saddle)--------------------------------------------------------- 3-2
Side Registration Correction Operation Shift Operation-----------------2-13 Maintenance and Inspection------------------------------------------------3-3
Buffer Operation--------------------------------------------------------------------2-15 Periodically Replaced Parts------------------------------------------------------ 3-3
Switching Over the Paper Path-------------------------------------------------2-16 Periodically Replaced Parts (Finisher)------------------------------------------------- 3-3
Periodically Replaced Parts (Saddle)-------------------------------------------------- 3-3 External/Internal Covers---------------------------------------------------- 4-20
Durables------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-3 Removing the Rear Cover-------------------------------------------------------4-20
Durables (Finisher)-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-3 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-20
Durables (Saddle)--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-3 Removing the Rear Upper Cover (Right)------------------------------------4-21
Periodical Servicing---------------------------------------------------------------- 3-4 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-21
Periodical Servicing (Finisher)----------------------------------------------------------- 3-4 Removing the Rear Upper Cover (Left)--------------------------------------4-21
Periodical Servicing (Saddle)------------------------------------------------------------- 3-4 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-21
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-21
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning Removing the Inner Cover (Upper)--------------------------------------------4-22
List of Parts----------------------------------------------------------------------4-2 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-22
List of External/Internal Covers-------------------------------------------------- 4-2 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-22
List of Main Unit--------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-3 Removing the Inner Cover (Lower)--------------------------------------------4-23
Stacking Assembly-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-3 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-23
Feed Assembly------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-4 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-23
Intermediate Process Tray Assembly--------------------------------------------------- 4-5 Electric Control Assembly-------------------------------------------------- 4-24
Saddle Stitcher Assembly----------------------------------------------------------------- 4-6 Removing the Finisher Controller PCB---------------------------------------4-24
List of consumable parts locations--------------------------------------------- 4-7 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-24
Finisher Assembly--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-7 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-24
Saddle Stitcher Assembly----------------------------------------------------------------- 4-7 Removing the Neat Stack Driver PCB----------------------------------------4-24
Sensors-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-8 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-24
Saddle Unit------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-8 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-24
Finisher Unit----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-9 Removing the Feed Motor Driver PCB---------------------------------------4-25
Motors--------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-10 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-25
Saddle Unit-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-10 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-25
Finisher Unit---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-11 Removing the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB-----------------------------4-25
Solenoids----------------------------------------------------------------------------4-12 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-25
Saddle Unit-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-12 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-25
Finisher Unit----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-13 Stacking Assembly----------------------------------------------------------- 4-27
PCBs----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-14 Points to Note on handling the Stack Wall Rail----------------------------4-27
Saddle Unit-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-14 Removing the Stack Wall (Upper)---------------------------------------------4-27
Finisher Unit----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-15 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-27
Switchs-------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-16 Removing the Stack Wall (Lower)---------------------------------------------4-29
Fans-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-17 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-29
Removing from the connection equipment---------------------------- 4-18 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-29
Removing from the Host Machine---------------------------------------------4-18 Points to Note on Tray A/B Cable----------------------------------------------4-31
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-18 Position of Tray B at power-on-------------------------------------------------4-31
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-18 Removing the Tray A Unit--------------------------------------------------------4-32
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-32 Removing the Side Registration Shift Motor--------------------------------4-53
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-32 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-53
Removing the Tray B Unit-------------------------------------------------------4-35 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-53
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-35 Removing the Shift Motor--------------------------------------------------------4-54
Adjusting Position of Tray A, B-------------------------------------------------4-37 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-54
Removing the Tray A/B Lifting Motor------------------------------------------4-37 Intermediate Process Tray Assembly----------------------------------- 4-55
Feed Assembly--------------------------------------------------------------- 4-39 Removing the Stack Delivery Roller Upper Static Eliminator-----------4-55
Removing the Delivery Static Eliminator-------------------------------------4-39 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-55
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-39 Removing the Neat Paddle (Upper)-------------------------------------------4-55
Removing the Upper Feed Unit------------------------------------------------4-40 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-55
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-40 Removing the Neat Paddle (Lower)-------------------------------------------4-56
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-40 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-56
Removing the Inlet Feed Motor------------------------------------------------4-42 Removing the Neat Stack Unit (Upper)--------------------------------------4-57
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-42 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-57
Removing the Paper Trailing Edge Drop Motor----------------------------4-43 Removing the Neat Stack Unit (Lower)--------------------------------------4-59
Removing the Buffer Front Feed Motor--------------------------------------4-43 Removing the Stapler-------------------------------------------------------------4-60
Removing the Buffer Motor------------------------------------------------------4-44 Adjusting Position of Stapler----------------------------------------------------4-61
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-44 Removing the Process Tray Unit-----------------------------------------------4-62
Removing the Puncher Unit-----------------------------------------------------4-46 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-62
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-46 Removing the Paddle Unit-------------------------------------------------------4-65
Removing the Side Registration Sensor Unit-------------------------------4-47 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-65
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-47 Removing the paddle-------------------------------------------------------------4-65
Removing the Side Registration Sensor PCB------------------------------4-48 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-65
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-48 Removing the Stack Delivery Upper Roller---------------------------------4-66
Removing the Side Registration Shift Unit----------------------------------4-49 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-66
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-49 Removing the Process Tray (Front)-------------------------------------------4-68
Removing the Process Tray (Rear)-------------------------------------------4-69 Removing the Saddle Intermediate Static Eliminator---------------------4-91
Removing the Feed Belt---------------------------------------------------------4-70 Removing the Saddle Stapler---------------------------------------------------4-91
Removing the Stack Delivery Motor-------------------------------------------4-72 Removing the Feed Guide Lower Static Eliminator-----------------------4-92
Removing the Process Tray Plate Unit---------------------------------------4-72 Removing the Disengagement Roller-----------------------------------------4-93
Removing the Front Alignment Motor-----------------------------------------4-73 Removing the Thrust Unit--------------------------------------------------------4-95
Removing the Rear Alignment Motor-----------------------------------------4-75 Removing the Push-on Plate---------------------------------------------------4-97
Right Angle Adjustment of Alignment Plate---------------------------------4-77 Removing the Positioning Plate Unit------------------------------------------4-98
Removing the Process Upper Guide Unit-----------------------------------4-78 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-98
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-78 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-98
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-78 Pulling out the Saddle Unit (service position)-------------------------------4-99
Removing the Belt Controller Unit---------------------------------------------4-81 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-99
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-81 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-99
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-81 Removing the Saddle Inlet Static Eliminator------------------------------ 4-100
Removing the Belt Roller--------------------------------------------------------4-85 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-100
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-85 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-100
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-85 Removing the Saddle Unit----------------------------------------------------- 4-101
Saddle Stitcher Assembly-------------------------------------------------- 4-89 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-101
Removing the Saddle Inner Cover (Upper)---------------------------------4-89 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-101
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-89 Removing the Press Unit------------------------------------------------------ 4-102
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-89 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-102
Removing the Saddle Inner Cover (Lower)---------------------------------4-89 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-102
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-89 Removing the Press Roller Unit---------------------------------------------- 4-105
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-89 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-105
Removing the Saddle Inlet Roller Static Eliminator-----------------------4-90 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-105
Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-90 Removing the Fold Roller------------------------------------------------------ 4-108
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-108 Adjusting the Height of Corrugation Roller for Stack Delivery----------5-22
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-108 Preparations---------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-22
Removing the Alignment Roller Unit---------------------------------------- 4-112 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-22
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-112 Right Angle Adjustment of Alignment Plate---------------------------------5-26
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-112 Adjusting Alignment Plate Position--------------------------------------------5-27
Removing the Alignment Roller---------------------------------------------- 4-113 Preparations---------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-27
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-113 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-27
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-113 Adjusting Position of Stapler----------------------------------------------------5-29
Removing the Saddle Alignment Motor------------------------------------ 4-113 Adjusting Staple Position (1-stapling at the rear)--------------------------5-30
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-113 Preparations---------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-30
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-113 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-30
Adjusting Staple Position (1-stapling at the front)-------------------------5-33
5 Adjustment Preparations---------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-33
Basic Adjustment---------------------------------------------------------------5-2 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-33
Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-2 Adjusting Staple Position (2-stapling positions)----------------------------5-36
Height Adjustment------------------------------------------------------------------ 5-3 Preparations---------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-36
Checking the height------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-3 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-36
Height adjustment--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-3 Adjusting Delivery of Staple Stack (lower delivery)-----------------------5-38
Side Registration/Skew Adjustment-------------------------------------------- 5-6 Preparations---------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-38
Checking adjustment value--------------------------------------------------------------- 5-6 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-38
Side registration adjustment-------------------------------------------------------------- 5-7 Adjusting Delivery of Staple Stack (saddle delivery)----------------------5-41
Skew adjustment----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-8 Preparations---------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-41
Adjusting Sensor Light Intensity------------------------------------------------5-10 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-41
Preparations---------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-10 Saddle Stitch/Fold Placement Adjustment----------------------------------5-44
Procedure------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-11 Fold placement adjustment--------------------------------------------------------------5-44
Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement---------------------------- 5-12 Saddle stitch adjustment------------------------------------------------------------------5-45
Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-12 Adjusting Saddle Stitching Position-------------------------------------------5-48
Adjusting Sensor Light Intensity------------------------------------------------5-14 Preparations---------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-48
Preparations---------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-14 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-48
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-15 Adjusting Saddle Folding Position---------------------------------------------5-50
Adjusting Position of Tray A, B-------------------------------------------------5-16 Preparations---------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-50
Adjusting the Alignment Position of the Upper Neat Alignment Plate-5-17 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-50
Preparations---------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-17 Adjusting Position of Saddle Lead Edge Stopper-------------------------5-51
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-17 Adjustment After Replacing Finisher Controller PCB---------------------5-53
Adjusting the Alignment Position of the Lower Neat Alignment Plate-5-19 Bufferless Mode--------------------------------------------------------------------5-54
Preparations---------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-19 Preparations---------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-54
Adjustment in the Case of Failure in Stacking Performance of Tray Saddle Stitch/Fold Placement Adjustment----------------------------------5-85
(upper curl)--------------------------------------------------------------------------5-55 Fold placement adjustment--------------------------------------------------------------5-85
Preparations---------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-55 Saddle stitch adjustment------------------------------------------------------------------5-86
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-55 Adjusting Saddle Stitching Position-------------------------------------------5-89
Adjustment in the Case of Failure in Stacking Performance of Tray (lower Preparations---------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-89
curl)------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-57 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-89
Preparations---------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-57 Adjusting Saddle Folding Position---------------------------------------------5-91
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-57 Preparations---------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-91
Adjustment in the Case of Failure in Stacking Performance of Tray (run- Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-91
on of paper when using thin paper)-------------------------------------------5-59 Adjusting Position of Saddle Lead Edge Stopper-------------------------5-92
Preparations---------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-59 Adjusting Position for Saddle Alignment Width-----------------------------5-95
Adjustment in the Case of Canceling Limit for Tray Stack--------------5-61 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-95
Preparations---------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-61 Bufferless Mode--------------------------------------------------------------------5-97
Adjusting Alignment for Saddle Stapling-------------------------------------5-63 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-97
Auxiliary Adjustment--------------------------------------------------------- 5-66 Adjusting Assist Stopper Position----------------------------------------------5-98
Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-66 Preparations---------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-98
Adjusting Position of Tray A, B-------------------------------------------------5-68 Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-98
Adjusting Position of Feed Belt-------------------------------------------------5-69 Adjusting Height of Staple Inlet Guide----------------------------------------5-99
Preparations---------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-69 Preparations---------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-99
Adjusting Staple Position (1-stapling at the rear)--------------------------5-71 Adjusting Paddle Height-------------------------------------------------------- 5-101
Preparations---------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-71 Preparations------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-101
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-71 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-101
Adjusting Staple Position (1-stapling at the front)-------------------------5-74 Adjustment in the Case of Failure in Stacking Performance of Tray
Preparations---------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-74 (upper curl)------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5-103
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-74 Preparations------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-103
Adjusting Staple Position (2-stapling positions)----------------------------5-77 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-103
Preparations---------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-77 Adjustment in the Case of Failure in Stacking Performance of Tray (lower
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-77 curl)---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-105
Adjusting Delivery of Staple Stack (lower delivery)-----------------------5-79 Preparations------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-105
Preparations---------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-79 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-105
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-79 Adjustment in the Case of Failure in Stacking Performance of Tray (run-
Adjusting Delivery of Staple Stack (saddle delivery)----------------------5-82 on of paper when using thin paper)----------------------------------------- 5-107
Preparations---------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-82 Preparations------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-107
Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-82 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-107
Adjustment in the Case of Canceling Limit for Tray Stack------------ 5-109 size paper-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-135
Preparations------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-109 Preparations------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-135
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-109 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-135
Adjusting Alignment for Saddle Stapling------------------------------------5-111 Side registration position fine adjustment mode (shift amount change)---
Adjusting Engagement/Disengagement Position of Saddle 5-136
Disengagement Roller---------------------------------------------------------- 5-114 Preparations------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-136
Preparations------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-114 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-137
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-114
Adjusting Feeding Distance of Saddle Disengagement Roller------- 5-116 6 Troubleshooting
Preparations------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-116 Upgrading------------------------------------------------------------------------6-2
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-116 Upgrading----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-2
Adjusting Side Registration of Saddle-------------------------------------- 5-118 Drive/Sensor check------------------------------------------------------------6-3
Preparations------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-118 Motor,Solenoid----------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-3
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-118
Sensor--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-6
Setting of Pressless Mode----------------------------------------------------- 5-121
Preparations------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-121 7 Installation
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-121
Adjusting Delivery Angle------------------------------------------------------- 5-122 How to check this Installation Procedure--------------------------------7-2
Preparations------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-122 When Using the Parts included in the package----------------------------- 7-2
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-123 Symbols in the Illustration-------------------------------------------------------- 7-2
Setting of Tray Speed----------------------------------------------------------- 5-124 Product Name-------------------------------------------------------------------7-2
Preparations------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-124 Checking Before Installation------------------------------------------------7-3
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-124 Checking the Unpacking Space------------------------------------------------- 7-3
Changing Lower Delivery Mode---------------------------------------------- 5-126 Checking the Contents-------------------------------------------------------7-4
Preparations------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-126 Unpacking Procedure---------------------------------------------------------7-5
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-126 Turning OFF the Power Switch---------------------------------------------7-7
Setting of Stop-less Stacking------------------------------------------------- 5-128 Installation Procedure---------------------------------------------------------7-8
Preparations------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-128 Before Installing the Finisher----------------------------------------------------- 7-8
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-128 Connecting with the Host Machine--------------------------------------------7-10
Adjusting Hole Positions in Feeding Direction---------------------------- 5-129 Connecting with the Professional Puncher Integration Unit-------------7-15
Upper/Lower Neat Paddle position adjustment-------------------------- 5-130 Connecting with the Paper Folding Unit--------------------------------------7-18
Preparations------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-130 Connecting with the Document Insertion Unit------------------------------7-21
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-130
Connecting Cable------------------------------------------------------------------7-24
Punch skew tolerance adjustment mode---------------------------------- 5-133 Checking Connection-------------------------------------------------------------7-27
Preparations------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-133
Making Adjustments--------------------------------------------------------- 7-28
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-133
Height Adjustment-----------------------------------------------------------------7-28
Process Tray alignment operation adjustment mode with A4R/LTRR
Checking the height------------------------------------------------------------------------7-28
Height Adjustment--------------------------------------------------------------------------7-29
Attaching the Labels etc---------------------------------------------------- 7-32
Affixing the Labels-----------------------------------------------------------------7-32
Relocationg the Machine--------------------------------------------------- 7-34
A NOTE on moving the machine-----------------------------------------------7-34
Appendix
Service Tools--------------------------------------------------------------------8-2
Solvents and Oils--------------------------------------------------------------8-3
List of Signals-------------------------------------------------------------------8-4
List of Signals (finisher)----------------------------------------------------------- 8-4
List Of Signals (saddle)------------------------------------------------------------ 8-6
General Circuit Diagram------------------------------------------------------8-7
Safety Precautions
■
■Notes Before Servicing
■
■Points to Note at Cleaning
0 Safety Precautions > Points to Note at Cleaning
0-2
Notes Before Servicing
Caution:
At servicing, be sure to turn off the power source according to the specified steps and
disconnect the power plug.
Caution:
Do not turn off the power switch when downloading is under way.
Turning off the main power switch while downloading is under way can disable the
machine.
Points to Note at Cleaning
Caution:
When performing cleaning using organic solvent such as alcohol, be sure to check that
the component of solvent is vaporized completely before assembling.
0-2
0
Safety Precautions > Points to Note at Cleaning
1 Product Outline
■
■Product
■
■Names
Specifications
of Parts
1
Product Outline
1 Product Outline > Product Specifications > Specifications
1-2
Product Specifications Item Specifications
Stacking for collate

Specifications
Item Specifications Tray A
A4, B5, A5R, LTR, EXE, STMTR, 13 x 19, 12 x 18, SRA3, A3, B4, A4R, B5R,
Size: LDR, LGL, LTRR, EXER,Postcard:
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R,A5R, 13” x 19” (330.2 x 482.6 mm), 12” x 18” (304.8 x 1000 sheets (or 147 mm in height)
457.2 mm), 11” x 17”, LGL, LTR, LTRR, EXEC, 12 5/8” x 17 11/16”, Postcard,4 on Tray B
1 Postcard, Custom size (100 x 182 mm to 330.2 x 487.7 mm) When large volume stack mode is “OFF”:
Paper size/
Thickness: A4, B5, LTR, EXE, STMTR (feed length: 216 mm or less):
usable paper
52 to 300 g/m2 2000 sheets (or 285 mm in length)
Paper types: 13 x 19, 12 x 18, SRA3, A3, B4, A4R, B5R, LDR, LGL, LTRR, EXER (feed
Thin paper, Plain paper, Heavy paper, Recycled paper, Color paper, Pre-punched length: 216.1 to 483 mm or less):
paper, Bond paper, Transparency, Tab paper, Label paper 1000 sheets (or 147 mm in height)
When large volume stack mode is “ON”:
A4, B5, LTR, EXE, STMTR (feed length: 216 mm or less):
4000 sheets (or 490 mm in height)
13 x 19, 12 x 18, SRA3, A3, B4, A4R, B5R, LDR, LGL, LTRR, EXER (feed
length: 216.1 to 483 mm or less):
Tray capacity 1500 sheets (or 285 mm in height)
(Stacking
capacity for 80 Stacking for stapling
g/m2 paper)
A4, B5, LTR, EXE, STMTR (feed length: 216 mm or less):
3000 sheets (or 423 mm in height) or 200 copies
1500 sheets (or 285 mm in height) or 200 copies(50 copies:more than 120 g/m2
)
Stapling of mixed paper
A4, B5, A5R, LTR, EXE, STMTR (feed length: 216 mm or less):
Z-fold (only when the Paper Folding Unit-F1 is installed)
Tray A: up to 30 sheets of Z-fold paper per job

Tray B: up to 10 sheets of Z-fold paper per copy, and up to 30 sheets of Z-fold
paper per job
2-fold (only when the Paper Folding Unit-F1 is installed)
Tray A: up to 50 sheets of Z-fold paper per job(LTRR,A4R)
1-2
1
Product Outline > Product Specifications > Specifications
1 Product Outline > Product Specifications > Specifications > Staple Position
1-3
Item Specifications ■■Staple Position
When a standard Stamp Cartridge is installed ●● finisher
(The number of sheets that can be stapled may decrease depending on the type
and thickness of the paper.)
A4, B5, A5R, LTR, EXE, STMTR

52 to 80 ｇ /m2 or less: 100 sheets
Over 80 to 81.4 ｇ /m2 or less: 80 sheets
Over 81.4 to 105 ｇ /m2 or less: 60 sheets
Over 105 to 200 ｇ /m2 or less: 20 sheets
Over 200 to 300 ｇ /m2 or less: Cover and back cover only
13 x 19, 12 x 18, SRA3, A3, B4, A4R, B5R, LDR, LGL, LTRR, EXER
Stapling 52 to 80 ｇ /m2 or less: 50 sheets
Over 80 to 81.4 ｇ /m2 or less: 50 sheets
Over 81.4 to 105 ｇ /m2 or less: 30 sheets
Over 105 to 200 ｇ /m2 or less: 10 sheets
Over 200 to 300 ｇ /m2 or less: Cover and back cover only
Corner stapling:
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5/LDR, LGL, LTR, LTRR, EXEC
Double stapling:
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5/LDR, LGL, LTR, LTRR, EXEC,B5R
Power Supply 220-240V AC, 50/60Hz, 8A

Maximum
power
500W or less
consumption F-1-1
size L1 L2 L3
800 mm (1060 mm*) (width) x 792 mm (depth) x 1239 mm (height) A3,A4 81.75±4.0 201.75±4.0 6.0±2.0
Dimensions
* When the Binding Auxiliary Tray is fully opened B4,B5 61.75±4.0 181.75±4.0 6.0±2.0
Staple Finisher-Q1: 129 kg LDR,LTR 72.75±4.0 192.75±4.0 6.0±2.0

Weight
Booklet Finisher-Q1: 181 kg A4R 38.25±4.0 158.25±4.0 6.0±2.0
LTR-R,LGL 41.25±4.0 161.25±4.0 6.0±2.0
T-1-1
EXEC 66.25±4.0 186.25±4.0 6.0±2.0
T-1-2
1-3
1
Product Outline > Product Specifications > Specifications > Staple Position
1 Product Outline > Product Specifications > Specifications > Staple Position
1-4
●● saddle stitcher
Paper Size L1 L2 L3
A3 88.5 208.5 210
B4 68.5 188.5 182
Stample position
A4R 45 165 148.5
11"x17" 79.7 199.7 216
Folding position
LGL 48 168 177.8
L3±1.0mm
LTRR 48 168 139.7
L1±2.0mm
L2±2.0mm
Stack front edge

F-1-2
1-4
1
Product Outline > Product Specifications > Specifications > Staple Position
1 Product Outline > Names of Parts > External View
1-5
Names of Parts [1] Tray B [5] Saddle delivery belt

[2] Tray A [6] Upper cover
[3] Top delivery outlet [7] Inlet transport unit
External View [4] Bottom delivery outlet [8] Front cover
[2] [3]
[1]
[4]
[6]
[5]
[8]
[7]
F-1-3
1-5
1
Product Outline > Names of Parts > External View
1 Product Outline > Names of Parts > Cross Section
1-6
Cross Section
[7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [1] Feed belt [17] Assist roller 1
[2] Sheaf eject roller [18] Inlet delivery roller
[3] Swing guide [19] Saddle inlet delivery roller
[14] [4] Paddle [20] Stapler
[5] Tray B [21] Stitcher
[15] [6] Process feed roller [22] Pull-out roller
[7] Tray A [23] Paper guide plate
[16] [8] Eject roller [24] Fold delivery roller
[6]
[9] Buffer roller 2 [25] Adjust roller (upper)
[5] [10] Assist roller 3 [26] Adjust roller (lower)
[17] [11] Buffer roller 3 [27] Sheaf delivery roller
[12] Delivery roller [28] Pre-press roller
[18] [13] Buffer roller 1 [29] Press unit
[4] [14] Assist roller 2 [30] Saddle delivery belt
[15] Shift roller 2 [31] Waste staple case
[3] [16] Shift roller 1
[2] [19]
[1]
[20]
[21]
[31] [22]
[23]
[24]
[30] [29] [28] [27] [26] [25]
F-1-4
1-6
1
Product Outline > Names of Parts > Cross Section
2 Technology
■
■Basic
■
Construction
■Electrical Control Unit
■
■Stacking Unit
■
■Feeding Unit
■
■Intermediate Process Tray Assembly
■
■Saddle Stitcher Unit
■
■Detecting Jams
2
Technology
2 Technology > Basic Construction > Overview
2-2
Basic Construction
Overview
The machine consists of the following 5 blocks: electrical control block, stacking block,
transport block, intermediary tray, and saddle stitcher block.
Electrical control block

Transport
Stacking block block
To host machine
Intermediary
tray block
Saddle stitcher block
F-2-1
NOTE:
The descriptions on the saddle stitcher block apply to the Booklet Finisher-Q1 PRO.
2-2
2
Technology > Basic Construction > Overview
2 Technology > Electrical Control Unit > Finisher Controller PCB
2-3
Electrical Control Unit Finisher Controller PCB

The finisher controller PCB drives the various loads (motors, solenoids) of the machine in
Overview response to the commands from the host machine (copier), and indicates the states of the
sensors and switches to the host machine.
The electrical control block governs all the control mechanisms of the machine, i.e., stacking
It also serves to control the punch unit and the saddle finisher controller PCB.
block, transport block, intermediary tray block, and saddle stitcher block.
The electrical control block consists of 2 entities: finisher controller PCB and saddle stitcher
controller PCB. Finisher
controller PCB
Saddle stitcher
Electrical controller PCB CPU
control block Stacking block
Finisher
controller PCB Transport block Punch unit ASIC1
To host machine (accessory)
Intermediary
Saddle stitcher ASIC2
tray block
controller PCB
Saddle stitcher Motor,

block ROM Solenoid
F-2-2
EEPROM Switch,
NOTE: To host machine Sensor
The descriptions on the saddle stitcher controller PCB apply to the Booklet Finisher-F1
PRO.
F-2-3
The machine uses the following ICs, each possessing specific functions:
IC Description
CPU Controls the communications with the host machine; controls ASIC1/
ASIC2.
ASIC1 Controls the communications with accessories; controls the drive to
various loads.
ASIC2 Controls the drive to various loads.
ROM Stores the firmware used to operate the machine.
EEPROM Stores counter readings and adjustment values.
T-2-1
2-3
2
Technology > Electrical Control Unit > Finisher Controller PCB
2 Technology > Electrical Control Unit > Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
2-4
Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
The saddle stitcher controller PCB drives the machine's various loads (motors, solenoids) in
response to the commands from the finisher controller, and indicates the states of sensors
and switches to the host machine.
Saddle stitcher
controller PCB
Motor
Finisher ASIC1 Solenoid

Controller PCB
Sensor
F-2-4
The machine uses the following major ICs possessing specific functions:
IC Description
ASIC1 Controls the communications with the finisher controller; controls the drive
to various loads.
T-2-2
2-4
2
Technology > Electrical Control Unit > Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
2 Technology > Stacking Unit > Overview
2-5
Stacking Unit
Overview
The stacking block moves up and down the 2 delivery trays according to the instructions from
the finisher controller PCB.
[1] Tray B paper detection signal [7] Tray A lift motor drive single
Finisher controller PCB [2] Tray B paper surface detection light- [8] Tray A lift motor rotation detection
emitting signal signal
[3] Tray B paper surface detection light- [10] Tray B lift motor drive signal
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11]
receiving signal [11] Tray B lift motor rotation detection
signal
[4] Tray A paper detection signal
UN15
Tray A UN16 [5] Tray A paper surface detection light-
emitting signal
PS32
[6] Tray A paper surface detection light-
receiving signal
M22 M22 : Tray A lift motor UN15 : Tray A paper side sensor board
(emitter)
M23 : Tray B lift motor UN16 : Train A paper side sensor board
UN17 PS34
UN18 (receiver)
Tray B
PS32 : Tray A paper sensor UN17 : Tray B paper side sensor board
PS33
(emitter)
PS33 : Tray A paper sensor UN18 : Train B paper side sensor board
SL9 (receiver)
M23 PS34 : Tray A lift motor rotation sensor
PS35 : Tray B lift motor rotation sensor
PS35
F-2-5
2-5
2
Technology > Stacking Unit > Overview
2 Technology > Stacking Unit > Tray Ascent/Descent Control
2-6
Tray Ascent/Descent Control
Finisher controller PCB
The tray A/B is moved up or down by controlling 2 motors (M22, M23) in response to the
instructions from the finisher controller. [1] [2] [3] [4]
The machine uses 2 sensors (PS34, PS35) to check for faults in these motors.
The sensor monitors the rotation of the motors; when any of the following occurs, the finisher
controller PCB will stop the drive to the motor and, at the same time, will communicate the
fact to the host machine: Tray A
Related Error Code

• E540 (fault in tray A)
While the tray A motor (M22) is rotating, the tray A lift motor rotation detection signal is M22
absent for 250 msec or more.
• E542 (fault in tray A)
While the tray B motor (M23) is rotating, the tray B lift motor rotation detection signal is PS34
absent for 250 msec or more. Tray B
M23
PS35
F-2-6
[1] Tray A lift motor drive signal [3] Tray B lift motor drive signal
[2] Tray A lift motor rotation detection [4] Tray B lift motor rotation detection
signal signal
M22 : Tray A lift motor PS34 : Tray A lift motor rotation sensor
M23 : Tray B lift motor PS35 : Tray B lift motor rotation sensor
2-6
2
Technology > Stacking Unit > Tray Ascent/Descent Control
2 Technology > Stacking Unit > Auxiliary Tray Lift Control
2-7
Auxiliary Tray Lift Control
In response to an increase in the number of folded sheets in the tray, the auxiliary tray is
moved up to prevent a delivery jam associated with the tray B (memo) by making sure that
the lead and trail edges of the stacks deposited in the tray will be even.
The auxiliary tray is moved by operating the solenoid (SL9) according to the instructions from
[1]
Tray A
Auxiliary tray
Tray B
SL9
M23
F-2-7
[1] Auxiliary tray solenoid drive signal SL9 : Auxiliary tray solenoid
M23 : Tray lift motor
NOTE:
A stack with a folded sheet tends to be higher along its lead edge than its trail edge,
blocking the discharge slot when it contains multiple folded sheets. (A subsequent
sheet will likely hit the preceding sheet, causing a jam.)
2-7
2
Technology > Stacking Unit > Auxiliary Tray Lift Control
2 Technology > Stacking Unit > Tray Paper Surface Detection
2-8
Tray Paper Surface Detection UN15
The machine is equipped with a mechanism to detect the position of the top of the stack [4]
deposited in its 2 trays. [6]
The trays are each fitted with a sensor PCB that consists of a light-emitting segment (UN15,
[1]
UN17) and a light-receiving segment (UN16, UN18). UN16
UN16 3
The light-emitting segment is arranged at the rear of the machine, and is a LED. The light- [1] 2
receiving segment, on the other hand, is found at the front of the machine, and it consists of 3 [2] 1
[2]
photosensors.
When the power is turned on or a jam has been removed, the finisher controller PCB checks
the 3 photosensors (light-receiving segment) as soon as the LED (lightemitting segment) UN17
[5]
goes on. UN16
3
As more and more sheets are deposited in the tray, the light reaching the light-receiving 2
1
segments will be blocked, causing the finisher controller PCB to move down the tray to keep [1]
the top of the stack at a specific level. [2]

[1]
When the tray becomes full of paper (i.e., light blocked, not reaching any of the 3 UN18
photosensors), the finisher controller PCB switches over to a different tray for subsequent
[3]
delivery. If the newly selected tray is full, it will stop the operation of the machine, and will
indicate the fact to the host machine.
F-2-8
[1] Paper [4] Non-sort delivery roller

[2] Tray A [5] Stack delivery roller
[3] Tray B [6] Tray descent movement (sample)
UN15 : Tray A paper surface sensor UN17 : Tray B paper surface sensor
(light-emitting) (light-emitting)
UN16 : Tray A paper surface sensor UN18 : Tray B paper surface sensor
(light-receiving) (light-receiving)
2-8
2
Technology > Stacking Unit > Tray Paper Surface Detection
2 Technology > Feeding Unit > Overview
2-9
Feeding Unit
[1] Process feed motor driver signal [9] Buffer front transport motor drive signal
[2] Saddle path switch solenoid drive [10] Assist Motor Disengagement Solenoid
Overview signal 1 drive signal
[3] Delivery motor drive signal [11] Horizontal registration motor drive
The machine's transport block serves to move paper to the stacking block or the saddle signal
stitcher block according to the instructions from the finisher controller PCB. [4] Upper path switch solenoid drive [12] Shift transport motor drive signal
It also is used in conjunction with horizontal registration adjustment and alignment operation. signal
[5] Buffer motor drive signal [13] Horizontal registration detection unit
The machine uses 6 sensors to check for jams in the paper path. shift motor drive signal
[6] Assist Motor Disengagement [14] Inlet transport motor drive signal
Solenoid 2 drive signal
Finisher Controller PCB [7] Buffer path switch solenoid [15] Inlet roller disengage motor drive signal
[8] Transport roller shift motor drive
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] signal
M1 : Inlet transport motor M27 : Inlet motor separation motor

M26 SL3 M5 SL2 M4 SL11 SL1 M8 M3 SL10 M7 M2 M6 M1 M27 M2 : Shift transport motor SL1 : Buffer path switch solenoid
From M3 : Buffer front transport motor SL2 : Upper path switch solenoid
inserter M4 : Buffer motor SL3 : Saddle path switch solenoid
M5 : Delivery motor SL10 Assist Motor Disengagement Solenoid
1
M6 : Horizontal registration detection unit SL11 Assist Motor Disengagement Solenoid
shift motor 2
To tray A M7 : Horizontal registration shift motor
M8 : Transport roller shift motor
M26 : Operation feed motor
Shift Unit
Horizontal
Registration
Detection Unit
To tray B From host machine
To saddle stitcher block
F-2-9
2-9
2
Technology > Feeding Unit > Overview
2 Technology > Feeding Unit > Overview
2-10
[1] [2] [3] [4] From inserter [5] [6] [7]
PS5
To tray A
UN13
UN14
PS4
UN22
PS3
To tray B
PS6
From host machine
To saddle stitcher unit
F-2-10
[1] Lower delivery sensor signal [5] Buffer path 1 sensor signal
[2] Lower path sensor signal [6] Shift unit trailing edge sensor
[3] Upper delivery sensor signal detection signal
[4] Buffer path 2 sensor signal [7] Inlet sensor signal
PS3 : Inlet sensor UN13 : Buffer path 1 sensor PCB

PS4 : Shift unit trailing edge sensor UN14 : Buffer path 2 sensor PCB
PS5 : Upper delivery sensor UN22 : Lower path sensor PCB
PS6 : Lower delivery sensor
2-10
2
Technology > Feeding Unit > Overview
2 Technology > Feeding Unit > Basic Sequence of Operations
2-11
Basic Sequence of Operations The particulars of individual operations are as follows:
The transport block uses a sequence of operations that consists of the following 5: [4]
1. Horizontal Registration Detection [1] From inserter
Detects the position of the paper.

2. Horizontal Registration Correction [2] To stacking block
Corrects the position of the paper with reference to the result of horizontal registration
detection.
3. Alignment [3]
Switches the position of the stack with reference to the result of horizontal registration
detection. (only in shift mode) [2] [3]
4. Buffer Operation [4]
Keeps the sheet stationary inside the transport block; thereafter, joins it with the subsequent
sheet for forward movement.
[1]
5. Movement Switch-Over [5]
[5]
Moves the paper to the stacking block or the saddle stitcher block.
6.
From host machine

To stacking block
To saddle stitcher block
F-2-11
2-11
2
Technology > Feeding Unit > Basic Sequence of Operations
2 Technology > Feeding Unit > Horizontal Registration Detection
2-12
Horizontal Registration Detection 2) The finisher controller PCB causes M6 to rotate clockwise so that UN12 moves to
horizontal registration detection position (11 mm toward the inside from standby position),
1) About 150 msec after the lead edge of paper has moved past the inlet sensor (PS3), the during which UN12 detects the edge of paper to be moved. The finisher controller PCB
finisher controller PCB causes the horizontal registration detection unit shift motor (M6) uses the results of the detection to compute the horizontal registration value.
to rotate clockwise so that the horizontal registration sensor (UN12) moves to its standby
position (paper edge) from home position.
[4] [5]
[1]
[4] [5]
[1]
[2]
M6
[2] M6 [3]
M6
M6 [3] UN12
PS3
UN12
PS3
PS3
F-2-13
PS3
[1] Shift roller unit [4] Horizontal registration detection
F-2-12 [2] Horizontal detection unit position
[1] Shift roller unit [4] Standby position [3] Paper [5] Standby position
[2] Horizontal registration detection unit [5] Home position
[3] Pape
3) The finisher controller PCB causes M6 to rotate counterclockwise to move PS5 to standby
position.
2-12
2
Technology > Feeding Unit > Horizontal Registration Detection
2 Technology > Feeding Unit > Side Registration Correction Operation Shift Operation
2-13
Side Registration Correction Operation Shift Operation Finisher controller PCB
1) After the finisher controller board has detected the trailing edge of the paper at the inlet
sensor (PS3), the paper is fed on for 210mm and then the inlet roller disengage motor (M27)
drives and disengages the disengage roller friction roller. (Grounding performed when the
paper has been fed 38.2mm after the inlet sensor (PS3) goes OFF.)
M7 M7
[1]
M2 M2
[2]
[3]
M7 [1]
M2 M2 PS3
PS3
[2]
F-2-15
[3] [1] Shift roller unit [3] Paper

[2] Side registration detection unit
M27
PS3
Before Correction [1] After Correction [1]
PS3
M27
F-2-14 [2]
2) When the finisher controller board has detected the trailing edge of the paper at the inlet
sensor (PS3), the feed motor (M2) begins to rotate forwards after a prescribed period. This [3]
causes the roller inside the shift roller unit to begin to rotate.
3) The finisher controller board computes the side registration correction value from the side
registration detection results.
Then, once the trailing edge of the paper clears the inlet feed roller (*1), and based on
the computed side registration correction value, the side registration shift motor (M7) will
rotate either forwards or in reverse. In this way, the shift roller unit will move either forwards
or backwards, and the paper, nipped by the shift roller will be shunted either backwards
or forwards, as it is being fed through. As a result, the paper's side registration value is F-2-16
corrected to the prescribed value. [1] Correct position [3] Shift roller unit
*1 [2] Paper
: When the paper is 297mm or less in the feed direction. For paper of 297mm or longer,
this timing is when the trailing edge of the paper enters the finisher inlet.
2-13
2
Technology > Feeding Unit > Side Registration Correction Operation Shift Operation
2 Technology > Feeding Unit > Side Registration Correction Operation Shift Operation
2-14
4) Upon job offset selection, the shift roller unit is moved either forwards or in reverse, the
same as for side registration shift. (Ref.)
This causes the stacking position for each sheaf to change when the paper is output to the
delivery tray.
[1] [1]
[2] [2]
F-2-17
NOTE:
At this time, the degree of shift is decided after taking the side registration correction
value into account.
2-14
2
Technology > Feeding Unit > Side Registration Correction Operation Shift Operation
2 Technology > Feeding Unit > Buffer Operation
2-15
Buffer Operation The buffer operation takes place as follows when 3 sheets of paper are moved:
The finisher controller PCB keeps a sheet of paper in the paper path and forwards it together
with the subsequent sheet of paper using the buffer motor (M4) and the buffer path switching [1] UN13
UN14 UN13 UN14
solenoid (SL1) with the help of the buffer path 1 sensor PCB and the buffer path 2 sensor
PCB (UN13, UN14).
Finisher controller PCB [1]

[2]
UN13 UN13
[3]
UN14 UN14
M4 SL1 [1] [2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
UN13 UN13
UN14 UN14
UN13
[1] [1] [2]
UN14
Buffer path [2]
[1]
UN13
UN14
F-2-18
M4 : Buffer motor UN13 : Buffer path 1 sensor PCB

SL1 : Buffer path switching solenoid UN14 : Buffer path 2 sensor PCB
T-2-3
F-2-19
2-15
2
Technology > Feeding Unit > Buffer Operation
2 Technology > Feeding Unit > Assist Roller Engage Operation
2-16
Switching Over the Paper Path Assist Roller Engage Operation
1) The finisher controller PCB turns off or on the2 flappers (upper delivery flapper, lower When feeding paper whose feed length is 148 mm or smaller (A4R_Half Fold, LTRR_Half
delivery flapper) to switch over the destination of paper. Fold, LTRR_Z-Fold), feedability is improved by turning ON the Assist Motor Disengagement
Solenoids 1 and 2 and 3 and making the Assist Rollers 1 and 2 and 3 engaged.
[2]
[3] [1]
M4 Buffer Motor
Assist Roller3
[4]
Buffer Front
Assist Motor M3 Transport Motor
Assist Motor
Disengagement Disengagement
Solenoid 2 Solenoid 1
[5]
Assist Roller2
M1
Assist Roller1 Inlet
Feed Motor
[6] [7]
F-2-20 F-2-21
[1] From the host machine [5] Lower delivery flapper

[2] Paper [6] To tray B
[3] To tray A [7] To saddle delivery belt
[4] Upper delivery flapper M27
T-2-4 Inlet Roller
Disengage Motor
2-16
2
Technology > Feeding Unit > Assist Roller Engage Operation
2 Technology > Feeding Unit > Assist Roller Engage Operation
2-17
2-17
2
Technology > Feeding Unit > Assist Roller Engage Operation
2 Technology > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Overview
2-18
Intermediate Process Tray Assembly

[1] Front alignment motor drive signal/ [8] Paper trail edge retaining motor drive
rear alignment motor signal signal
Overview [2] Stack delivery auxiliary motor drive [9] Operation feed motor drive signal
signal [10] Transport belt motor drive signal
The intermediary tray block serves to shift or staple a stack of sheets in response to the [3] Stack delivery motor drive signal [11] Assist motor drive signal
instructions from the finisher controller PCB, and then sends the result to [4] Delivery angle adjustment motor [12] Staple motor drive signal
drive signal [13] Staple motor shift drive signal
the stacking block. The paper path is fitted with 2 sensors for detection of a jam.
[5] Swing guide motor drive signal [14] Process tray shift motor signal
[6] Paddle rotation motor drive signal [15] Upper guide motor
[7] Paddle lift motor drive signal
M5 : Delivery motor M16 : Paper trail edge retaining motor
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16]
M9 : Front alignment motor M17 : Transport belt shift motor
M9
M10 : Rear delivery auxiliary motor M18 : Swing guide motor
M16 M13 M19 M27 M18 M15 M14 M16 M20 M26 M17 M12 M11 M25 M21
M11 : Process tray shift motor M19 : Stack delivery motor
M10
M12 : Assist motor M20 : Upper guide motor

M13 : Stack delivery auxiliary motor M21 : Staple shift motor
M14 : Paddle rotation motor M25 : Staple motor
M15 : Paddle lift motor M27 : Delivery angle adjustment motor
F-2-22
2-18
2
Technology > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Overview
2 Technology > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Basic Sequence of Operations
2-19
Basic Sequence of Operations
The intermediary tray block uses the following 4 sequences of operations:
1. Stacking Operation [1]
[1] [2]
Deposits sheets coming front the transport block in the intermediary tray.
2. Aligning Operation [2]
Switches over the point of depositing stacks between the front and the rear of the tray. (in
shift mode)
3. Stapling Operation [3]
Staples a stack of sheets at a specific point. (in staple mode)
4. Delivery Operation [4]
Discharges the sheets deposited in the intermediary tray to the tray A or the tray B.
5.Neat Alignment Operation
This is an alignment mechanism that aligns the front and rear edges as well as the feed
direction of paper by using the Alignment Plate and the Return Roller when ejecting paper
to the tray.
The following are the particulars of the individual operations:
PS6 [4]
[1]
[2]
PS17
[3]
F-2-23
[1] Lower delivery sensor signal PS6 : Lower delivery sensor

F-2-24
[2] Handling tray sensor signal PS17 : Process tray paper
2-19
2
Technology > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Basic Sequence of Operations
2 Technology > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Stacking Operation
2-20
Stacking Operation 2) The transport belt feeds the paper to the stack delivery roller and the stack delivery roller
discharges the paper to the outside of the machine. At the same time, the machine's stack
1) When the sheet coming from the transport block reaches the front of the lower path sensor delivery auxiliary mechanism causes the stack delivery tray to move outside the machine to
PCB (UN22) (after the specified time elapses from the leading edge of paper is detected by support the paper.
the buffer path sensor 2), the paper trailing edge drop motor (M16) starts driving and it lifts When the trailing edge of paper goes through the feed belt, the trailing edge drop plate hits
the trailing edge drop plate. the trailing edge of the paper to drop the paper to the process tray.
[1] Also when a staple function is selected, operation rib tray solenoid (SL9) is turned ON and
[2]
operation tray rib is shifted. (To hold the paper to improve the alignment performance)
UN22
[1] [3] [5]
F-2-25
[2]
[6]
[4]
F-2-26
[1] Paper [4] Sort delivery roller

[2] Stack delivery auxiliary tray [5] Trailing edge drop plate
[3] Stack delivery roller [6] Operation rib tray
2-20
2
Technology > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Stacking Operation
2-21
3) Stack delivery roller rotates in the direction of the arrow and the paper is pushed to the
CAUTION: Stack Delivery Auxiliary Function
operation stopper. At this time, belt change lever shifts in the direction of the arrow to avoid
This machine is equipped with the stack delivery auxiliary mechanism as a means of the contact with the paper.
preventing misalignment of extra-length paper. Also the position of the operation stopper is adjusted to front/rear depending on the paper
Misalignment occurs when the trail edge of paper hangs down on its own weight size.
at the stack delivery operation. The paper is then pulled back in the direction of the
arrow, causing its lead edge to move away from the stopper. The tray auxiliary plate is
[1]
pushed outside the machine before delivery occurs to hold the lead edge of paper. This
prevents misalignment. The tray auxiliary plate is pulled inside the machine at the end
of the delivery operation.
Stacks Subject to Misalignment
[5]
[1]
[2]
[3] [4]
[4] F-2-28
Tray
[2] [3]
Stacks Free of Misalignment
[1]
[5]
Tray
[2]
[3]
F-2-27
[1] Stack [4] Variation present among lead edges of sheets
[2] Tray auxiliary plate [5] Variation absent among trail edges of sheets
[3] Processing stopper
2-21
2
2-22
At the second stack operation or later (some paper is already loaded on the operation 4) When the trailing edge of the paper reaches the operation stopper, the stack delivery
tray), the swing guide is already lifted and the paddle and feed belt pushes the paper to the roller(*1) and the paddle(*2) stop rotating and the swing guide(*1) is lifted.
operation stopper. *1; At the first stack operation only
At this time, the height of the paddle, feed belt and upper guide is adjusted depending on *2; At the second stack operation or later
the stack amount of the paper on the operation tray. [5]
[1]
[3]
[3]
[1]
[6] [7]
[5]
[2]
[4]
F-2-30
[2]
[4] [1] Paper [4] Operation stopper
[2] Stack delivery roller [5] Swing guide
F-2-29
[3] Sort delivery roller
[1] Paper [5] Upper guide
[2] Stack delivery roller [6] Paddle
[3] Swing guide [7] Feed belt 5) Front/rear alignment motor (M9/M10) drive and they move the alignment plate to the
[4] Operation stopper front/rear to align the paper. This operation is executed every time the paper is fed to the
operation tray.
[2]
NOTE:
Upper guide is to hold the paper and avoid the paper from bending when the paper is
pushed to the operation tray.
[1]
F-2-31
[1] Paper [3] Alignment plate

[2] Operation tray
2-22
2
2 Technology > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Shift Operation
2-23
Shift Operation CAUTION: Shift Function
1) When the stack operation is complete, the alignment plate operates as a shift function. This The machine's alignment mechanism operates either of its 2 aligning plates to switch
moves the paper stack to the front or rear. This function is for the operation of tray B only. over (offset) the point of depositing individual stacks of sheets.
Tray A executes the alignment operation inside the feed assembly.
Shifting to the Front Shifting to the Rear
[2] [3]
[4] [4]
[5] [5]
[3] [3]
[1]
[1] [2] [1] [2]

F-2-33
F-2-32
[1] Tray [4] Rear aligning plate
[1] Alignment plate [3] Swing guide [2] Front aligning plate [5] Existing stacks
[2] Paper stack [3] Paper
2-23
2
Technology > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Shift Operation
2 Technology > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Stapling Operation
2-24
Stapling Operation CAUTION:
1) At the end of alignment operation, the machine moves down the swing guide and performs The machine's stapling sequence consists of the following operations: driving a staple,
stapling. cutting the staple tips, clinching the staple.
At this time, if the process stopper position is overlapping that staple position, the process
stopper is moved away.
[1] [1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[2]
[6]
[4]
[4]
[3]
[5]
F-2-34
[1] Swing guide [4] Stapler

F-2-35
[2] Stapled stack of sheets [5] Aligning plate
[3] Stack delivery roller [6] Process stopper [1] Stack of sheets [4] Cutting the staple tips
[2] Staple [5] Clinching the staple
[3] Driving a staple
2-24
2
Technology > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Stapling Operation
2 Technology > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Delivery Operation
2-25
2) As needed, the staple unit is moved to empty itself of the waste staples in the waste staple
Delivery Operation
case.
1) The machine starts delivery of the stack at the end of alignment or stapling by rotating the
CAUTION: delivery roller in the direction of the arrow.(At non-staple mode delivery, the control of stack
delivery roller angle switching is performed.)
The waste staple in the waste staple case is detected by the sensor. When the waste
2) In the event of stapling on one side*, the assist stopper synchronises with the sheaf
staple in the case reaches the specified amount (after approx. 5000 times),
delivery roller and moves in the direction of the arrow. This starts the paper eject action.
the case moves down. The flag on the case blocks the sensor due to this movement
and it leads to the waste staple full alarm. [1]
The machine determines the waste staple full 1000 times stapling after the alarm and [2]
the operation stops. At the same time, the message 'Check the waste staple case.'
is displayed on the control panel. When the waste staple in the case is emptied out, the
host machine clears the waste staple full and the status is changed to ready.
[3]
[4]
F-2-36
[1] Swing guide [3] Stack delivery roller

[2] Stapled stack of sheets [4] Assist stopper
2-25
2
Technology > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Delivery Operation
2 Technology > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Delivery Operation
2-26
Stack delivery roller angle control When the delivery angle adjustment motor (M28) starts driving, the cam on the shaft rotates
To enhance the productivity, the paper is delivered to the delivery tray without passing the and the swing guide is pushed, and then the stack delivery upper roller moves to the
process tray in case of lower delivery in non-staple mode. downstream together with the swing guide.
In this case, since the angle when the paper is coming to the stack delivery roller is too steep Its home position is the position of the process tray lower delivery and is detected by the
compared to the delivery from the process tray, the paper feed operation is not stable. Thus, delivery angle HP sensor (PS45).
the stack feed upper roller moves to the downstream to enlarge the angle when the paper is
coming to the stack delivery roller to provide the stable paper feed. Swing guide
Delivery angle Cam contact block
adjustment motor
Swing guide Cam contact block Sensor flag
Stack delivery upper roller
Angle switch cam
Stack delivery Delivery angle
upper roller Stack delivery lower roller HP sensor
Angle switch cam
Process tray unit
Stack delivery
lower roller
Process tray unit
Angle switch cam

Cam contact block
F-2-37
F-2-38
2-26
2
Technology > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Delivery Operation
2 Technology > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Neat Alignment Operation > Upper Return Roller Operation
2-27
Neat Alignment Operation ■■ Upper Return Roller Operation
This is an alignment mechanism that aligns the front and rear edges as well as the feed This is a mechanism that aligns the feed direction of paper on the Tray A.
direction of paper by using the Alignment Plate and the Return Roller when ejecting paper to The Return Roller is lifted and lowered by the drive of the Upper Neat Return Roller Lifting
the tray. Motor.
The drive of the Delivery Motor (M5) rotates the Return Roller, and the paddle of the the
■■Upper Neat Alignment Plate Operation
Return Roller pulls back paper in the direction opposite of the feed direction.
This is a mechanism that aligns the front and rear edges of paper on the Tray A.
Upper Neat Stack Unit
Upper Neat Stack Unit Return Roller Lifting Motor
Alignment Plate HP Sensor
Upper Neat Stack Unit Upper Neat Stack Unit
Alignment Plate Lifting Motor Return Roller HP Sensor
Alignment Plate
flag
flag paddle
Delivery
motor drive signal
Alignment Plate
M5
The Alignment Plate (arm) is lifted and lowered by the drive of the Upper Neat Alignment
F-2-39 F-2-41
Plate Lifting Motor.

flag
Upper Neat Stack Unit Front Alignment HP Sensor
Rear Alignment HP Sensor
flag
Alignment Plate

Front Alignment Moter
Rear Alignment Moter
Alignment Plate　　　
F-2-40
2-27
2
Technology > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Neat Alignment Operation > Upper Return Roller Operation
2 Technology > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Neat Alignment Operation > Lower Return Roller Operation
2-28
■■Lower Neat Alignment Plate Operation ■■ Lower Return Roller Operation
This is a mechanism that aligns the front and rear edges of paper on the Tray B. This is a mechanism that aligns the feed direction of paper on the Tray B.
The Return Roller is lifted and lowered by the drive of the Upper Neat Return Roller Lifting
The Alignment Plate (arm) is lifted and lowered by the drive of the Lower Neat Alignment Motor.
Plate Lifting Motor. The drive of the Stack Delivery Motor (M19) rotates the Return Roller, and the paddle of the
Lower Neat Stack Unit the Return Roller pulls back paper in the direction opposite of the feed direction.
Alignment Plate Lifting Motor Lower Neat Stack Unit
Return Roller Lifting Motor
Lower Neat Stack Unit

Return Roller HP Sensor
Alignment Plate
Alignment Plate HP Sensor
flag
paddle
flag
Alignment Plate
M19
F-2-42
Stack delivery motor
The Front and Rear Alignment Plates (arms) are moved by the drive of the Front and Rear
F-2-44
Alignment Motors, respectively.
Upper Neat Stack Unit Front Alignment Moter
Front Alignment HP Sensor
Rear Alignment Moter
flag
Rear Alignment HP Sensor
flag
Alignment Plate
Alignment Plate
F-2-43
2-28
2
Technology > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Neat Alignment Operation > Lower Return Roller Operation
2 Technology > Saddle Stitcher Unit > Overview
2-29
Saddle Stitcher Unit
Overview
The saddle stitcher block serves to staple a stack of sheets according to the instructions from
the saddle stitcher controller PCB, and moves the stack to the saddle delivery belt.
The paper path is fitted with 8 sensors to check for a jam.
Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB

[1] Saddle alignment roller drive signal [11] Saddle alignment motor drive signal
[2] Delivery belt motor drive signal [12] Saddle lead edge stopper motor drive signal
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [3] Saddle guide motor drive signal
[4] Saddle pressing motor drive signal [13] Saddle trailing edge stay motor drive signal
M108 M104 SL104 M112 SL103 M109 M107 M110 M102 M113 M101 M111 M110 M106 M103 SL105 M105 [5] Paper folding/transport motor drive [14] Saddle trailing edge shift motor drive signal
signal [15] Alignment roller disengage solenoid (upper)
[6] Stitcher motor drive signal drive signal
[7] Saddle tapping motor drive signal [16] Alignment roller disengage solenoid (lower)
[8] Saddle pull-in shift motor drive signal drive signal
[9] Saddle transport motor drive signal [17] Leading edge gripper solenoid drive signal
[10] Saddle paper butting plate signal
M101 : Saddle transport motor M110 : Saddle trailing edge holding motor
M102 : Saddle alignment guide motor M111 : Saddle trailing edge moving motor
M103 : Saddle lead edge stopper motor M112 : Saddle alignment roller motor
M104 : Saddle guide motor M113 : Saddle tapping motor
M105 : Saddle paper push-on plate motor M114 : Saddle lead-in roller disengage motor
M106 : Saddle folder/feeder motor SL103 : Alignment roller disengage solenoid (upper)
M107 : Saddle delivery belt motor SL104 : Alignment roller disengage solenoid (lower)
M108 : Saddle press motor SL105 : Lead edge gripper solenoid
M109 : Stitcher motor
F-2-45
2-29
2
Technology > Saddle Stitcher Unit > Overview
2 Technology > Saddle Stitcher Unit > Basic Sequence of Operations
2-30
Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB Basic Sequence of Operations

The saddle stitcher block uses the following sequence of operations:
[1] [2] [3]
1. Transport [1]
Moves the paper from the transport block to the vertical path assembly.
2. Alignment [2]
Aligns the edges of sheets of paper coming to the transport block.
3. Stitching [3]
Uses the stitcher to staple the middle of the stack.
4. Folding/Delivery [4]
Folds the sheet in half, and sends the result to the saddle delivery tray.
The particulars of the individual operations are as follows:
PS101
PS102
PS109
[1]
[3]
[4]
F-2-46
[1] Saddle front sensor signal PS101 : Saddle inlet sensor

[2] Saddle vertical path sensor signal PS102 : Saddle vertical path sensor [2]
[3] Saddle inlet sensor signal PS109 : Saddle press front sensor
F-2-47
2-30
2
Technology > Saddle Stitcher Unit > Basic Sequence of Operations
2 Technology > Saddle Stitcher Unit > Paper Feed Operation
2-31
Paper Feed Operation 2) The paper is transported to the stitcher unit by the saddle feed roller.
3) Once the saddle inlet sensor (PS101) detects the paper, the saddle alignment roller rotates
1) The saddle leading edge stopper and saddle trailing edge stay move into position based and drives the saddle pull roller disengage motor and the saddle alignment roller disengage
on the paper size. Also, the saddle roller guide rises. (In case of thin paper (under 64g/m2), solenoid so that the paper is transported by the pull roller and alignment roller till it reaches
roller guide movement control is performed.) the process stopper.
PS101
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[3]
[4]
[2] [5]
F-2-48 F-2-49
[1] Saddle trailing edge stay [3] Saddle roller guide [1] Paper PS101 : Saddle inlet roller
[2] Saddle leading edge stopper [2] Saddle inlet roller
[3] Pull roller
[4] Alignment roller
[5] Process stopper
2-31
2
Technology > Saddle Stitcher Unit > Paper Feed Operation
2 Technology > Saddle Stitcher Unit > Paper Feed Operation
2-32
Roller guide clearance control Clearance [A] between the roller guide and the saddle process tray changes in accordance
In case of thin paper (under 62 g/m2) if the clearance between the roller guide and the saddle with the position of shutter shift block (hereinafter called as shift block).
process tray is too loose, the paper stack gets loose and the alignment operation does not The roller guide motor (M104) lifts the shift block. Since the shift block contacts the shutter
function properly. Thus, in case of thin paper mode, the machine makes the clearance [A] shift mount at the first time, it moves with the constant clearance [A].
between the roller guide and the saddle process tray tighter compared with the modes other When it continues lifting, it reaches the edge of the shutter shift mount and the clearance [A]
than thin paper. Also, the machine makes the clearance [A] larger when several sheets of is reduced as it moves. In thin paper mode, the machine lifts the shift block until the clearance
paper are transferred to the saddle process tray. The machine enlarges the clearance [A] by [A] becomes the specified degree, and then it lowers the shift block per 5 sheets to enlarge
the specified degree per 5 sheets of paper. the clearance [A].
A A
Roller guide
motor (M104)
Gear
Slide rack
Slide rack
Saddle roller
guide HP sensor Shutter
(PS107) shift block
Shutter
Shutter sift block
Shutter
shift block
Shutter shift mount
shift mount Shutter shift mount
Saddle process tray
Roller guide
Slide rack
Roller guide Saddle process tray
F-2-51
F-2-50
2-32
2
Technology > Saddle Stitcher Unit > Paper Feed Operation
2 Technology > Saddle Stitcher Unit > Alignment Operation
2-33
Alignment Operation 2) The machine engages the alignment roller again and the paper is pushed to the leading
edge stopper, and then the knocking plate taps the trailing edge of paper.
1) The machine opens the trailing edge retainer and disengages the alignment roller and lead-
in roller. It then narrower the alignment guide in accordance with the paper size to align the
paper stack. [5]
[5]
[5]
[5]
[1]
[6]
[1]
[7]
[1] [3]
[6]
[1] [3]
[3]
[7]
[3]
[3]
[3] [2] [2]
[4]
[2] [2]
[4]
F-2-53
[1] Pull roller [5] Tapping plate

[2] Alignment roller [6] Trailing edge stay
F-2-52 [3] Alignment guide [7] Paper
[4] Leading edge stopper
[3] Alignment guide [7] Paper
2-33
2
Technology > Saddle Stitcher Unit > Alignment Operation
2 Technology > Saddle Stitcher Unit > Staple Operation
2-34
3) The machine disengages the alignment roller and the trailing edge retainer holds the
Staple Operation
trailing edge of paper.
1) There is one sticker unit at the front and the rear of the machine respectively. When the
alignment operation is complete and the trailing edge retainer is released, the stitcher unit
[5] starts the stitching operation on the paper.
[5]
[1]
[6] [4]
[1]
[7]
[3]
[1]
[3] [2]
[3]
[2] [2]
[4]
[3]
F-2-54

[3] Alignment guide [7] Paper
4) There is one sticker unit at the front and the rear of the machine respectively. When the
alignment operation is complete and the trailing edge retainer is released, the stitcher unit
starts the stitching operation on the paper.
F-2-55
[1] Stitcher unit [3] Staples

[2] Paper [4] Trailing edge stay
2-34
2
Technology > Saddle Stitcher Unit > Staple Operation
2 Technology > Saddle Stitcher Unit > Paper Folding/Delivery Operations
2-35
Paper Folding/Delivery Operations 2) With the sheaf [2] held in place by the gripper [1] the paper positioning plate [3] lowers,
moving the sheaf in the direction of the arrow. Thus, the stitching position [4] and the
1) The saddle roller guide [1] is lowered and then the leading edge gripper solenoid (Sl105) folding position [5] are aligned.
comes ON and the paper [3] is gripped by the gripper [2].
[2]
[4]
[5]
[1]
[3]
[3]
[1]
F-2-57
[2] [1] Gripper [4] Stitching position

[2] Paper sheaf [5] Folding position
F-2-56
[1] Saddle roller guide [3] Paper
[2] Gripper
2-35
2
Technology > Saddle Stitcher Unit > Paper Folding/Delivery Operations
2-36
3) After the paper folding roller begins to rotate in the direction of the arrow, the paper guide 4) The sheaf transport roller and pre-press roller begin to rotate forwards, transporting the
plate moves in the direction of the arrow. This starts the paper folding operation. sheaf to the press unit.
Then, the paper stay plate is returned to its original position and stops.
[3]
[2]
[1]
[3] [4]
[1]
F-2-59
[1] Paper sheaf [3] Pre-press roller

[2] Sheaf transport roller [4] Press unit
[2]
F-2-58
[1] Paper sheaf [3] Paper fold roller

[2] Paper guide plate
2-36
2
2-37
5) When the sheaf reaches the press unit, the sheaf transport roller and pre-press roller stop 6) After the press unit has moved in the direction of the arrow, the pre-press roller begins to
rotating. Then, the press unit moves in the direction of the arrow. At this time, the press rotate once more. This action delivers the sheaf to the saddle delivery belt.
pressure roller within the press unit begins to rotate and applies pressure onto the sheaf.
This action makes sure that the sheaf is properly folded.
[1]
[2]
[3] [2]
[3]
[4]
[3] [2]
[3] [1]
[1]
F-2-61
[4] [2] [1] Paper sheaf [3] Press unit
F-2-60
[2] Pre-press roller
[1] Sheaf transport roller [3] Pre-press roller
[2] Paper sheaf [4] Press unit
2-37
2
2 Technology > Detecting Jams > Jam inspection in Finisher
2-38
Detecting Jams Whether jam is occurred or not, determined by whether there is paper or not in the sensor
area by the time of timing check that memorized in advance by Finisher Controller PCB.
When Finisher Controller PCB detected jam, it will break feeding/delivery movement through
Jam inspection in Finisher Stitcher Controller PCB. And at the same time inform the connection machines about the jam
occurrence.
To detect whether there is paper or not, or whether the paper can properly be fed or not, the
followings are the detection sensor for paper. Jam type Sensor Jam description Code
• Inlet Sensor (PS3). Inlet sensor delay PS3 The Inlet Sensor (PS3) doesn't detect the paper 1002
within the specified time (distance) after the
• Shift Unit Sensor (PS4). delivery signal reception sent from connection
• Upper Delivery Sensor (PS5). machine.
• Lower Delivery Sensor (PS6). Inlet sensor stationary PS3 The paper doesn't come out from Inlet Sensor 1103
(PS3) within the specified time (distance) after
• Buffer Path 1 Sensor (UN13)
Inlet Sensor (PS3) detects the paper and do the
• Buffer Path 2 Sensor (UN14). feeding
• Lower Path Sensor (UN22) Shift Unit Trailing Edge Sensor PS4 Shift Unit Sensor (PS4) doesn't detect the paper 1004
delay within the specified time (distance) after Inlet
Sensor (PS3) detects the paper and do the
PS5 UN14 UN13 feeding.
Shift Unit Trailing Edge Sensor PS4 The paper doesn't come out from Shift Unit 1105
stationary Sensor (PS4) within the specified time (distance)
after Inlet Sensor (PS3) detects the paper and do
PS4 the feeding.
Buffer Path 1 Sensor delay UN13 Buffer Path 1 Sensor (UN13) doesn't detect the 1006
UN22 paper within the specified time (distance) after
Shift Unit Sensor (PS4) detects the paper and do
the feeding.
PS6
Buffer Path 1 Sensor UN13 The paper doesn't come out from Buffer Path 1 1107
Stationary Sensor (UN13) within the specified time (distance)
PS3 after Shift Unit Sensor (PS4) detects the paper
and do the feeding.
Buffer Path 2 Sensor delay UN14 Buffer Path 2 Sensor (UN14) doesn't detect the 1008
paper within the specified time (distance) after
Shift Unit Sensor (PS4) detects the paper and do
the feeding.
Buffer Path 2 Sensor UN14 The paper doesn't come out from Buffer Path 2 1109
Stationary Sensor (UN14) within the specified time (distance)
after Shift Unit Sensor (PS4) detects the paper
and do the feeding.
Upper Delivery Sensor Delay PS5 Upper Delivery Sensor (PS5) doesn't detect the 100A
Buffer Path Sensor (UN14) detects the paper and
do the feeding.
Upper Delivery Sensor PS5 The paper doesn't come out from Upper Delivery 110B
Stationary Sensor (PS5) within the specified time (distance)
after Buffer Path 2 Sensor (UN14) detects the
paper and do the feeding
F-2-62
2-38
2
Technology > Detecting Jams > Jam inspection in Finisher
2 Technology > Detecting Jams > Jam inspection in Finisher
2-39
Jam type Sensor Jam description Code
Lower Path Sensor Delay UN22 Lower Path Sensor (UN22) doesn't detect the 100C
Buffer Path Sensor (UN14) detects the paper and
do the feeding.
Lower Path Sensor Stationary UN22 The paper doesn't come out from Lower Path 110D
Sensor (UN22) within the specified time (distance)
paper and do the feeding
Lower Delivery Sensor Delay PS6 Lower Delivery Sensor (PS6) doesn't detect the 100E
Buffer Path 2 Sensor (UN14) detects the paper
and do the feeding.
Lower Delivery Sensor PS6 The paper doesn't come out from Lower Delivery 110F
Stationary Sensor (PS6) within the specified time (distance)
paper and do the feeding.
Processing Tray Staple PS27 The Stapler HP Sensor (PS27) doesn't detect the 1524
Stationary paper within the specified time after Stapler Motor
(M25) is triggered, and if Stapler Motor (M25)
rotates counter clock wise, Staple HP Sensor
(PS27) is turned ON.
Paper ID Mismatch - There is Paper ID mismatch informed by the 1231
Upstream Unit, when the paper starts to deliver
from Upstream Unit.
Upstream Unit Stationary - After jam occurred on Upstream Unit, if a paper 1F03
which result can not be guaranteed is fed, and
arrived in Finisher.
Remain (when Power On). - When Power On, there is remain paper in the 1320
Feed Unit.
Door Open MSW1 In the middle of the movement, it is detected that 1422
front cover switch's (MSW1) cover is open.
Remain (On the initial rotation) - In the middle of initial rotation of host machine, 1721
there is remained paper in the Feed Unit.
Retry Error Jam - During possible error in the retry, if the first error 1C01
on the job is detected.
T-2-5
2-39
2
Technology > Detecting Jams > Jam inspection in Finisher
2 Technology > Detecting Jams > Stitcher area jam detection
2-40
Stitcher area jam detection Whether jam is occurred or not, determined by whether there is paper or not in the sensor
area by the time of timing check that memorized in advance by Finisher
To detect whether there is paper or not, or whether the paper can properly be fed or not, the Controller PCB.
followings are the inspection sensor for paper. When Finisher Controller PCB detected jam, it will break feeding/delivery movement. And at
• Saddle inlet sensor (PS101) the same time inform the connection machines about the jam occurrence.
• Saddle small sensor (PS103)
• Saddle vertical path sensor (PS105)
Jam type Sensor Jam description Code
• Saddle leading edge path sensor (PS106) Saddle Inlet Sensor Delay PS101 Saddle Inlet Sensor (PS101) doesn't detect the 1042
• Saddle plate home position sensor (PS110) paper within the specified time (distance) after
• Saddle press front sensor (PS111). Lower Path Sensor (UN22) detects the paper and
do the feeding.
• Saddle press positioning sensor (PS113)
Saddle Inlet Sensor Stationary PS101 The paper doesn't come out from Saddle 1143
• Saddle stitcher sensor (SU) Inlet Sensor (PS101) within the specified time
(distance) after Lower Path Sensor (UN24)
detects the paper and do the feeding.
Saddle Vertical Path Sensor PS105 The Saddle Vertical Path Sensor (PS105) doesn't 1046
Delay detect the paper within the specific time after
Saddle Push-on Plate movement starts.
Saddle Vertical Path Sensor PS105 The paper doesn't come out from Saddle Vertical 1147
Stationary Path Sensor (PS105) within the specified time
(distance) after Saddle Push-on Plate detects the
paper and do the feeding.
Saddle Press Front Sensor PS111 The Saddle Press Front Sensor (PS111) doesn't 104A
Delay detect the paper within the specific time after
Saddle Push-on Plate movement is completed.
PS101 Saddle Press Front Sensor PS111 The paper doesn't come out from Saddle Press 114B
Stationary Front Sensor (PS111) within the specified time
PS103 (distance) after Saddle Push-on Plate movement
is completed.
PS111 Stitcher staple SU Stitcher Unit doesn't detect the motor activation 1550
SU within the specified time after Stitcher Motor
PS110 (M110) activates.
Saddle Push-on Plate PS110 Saddle Push-on Plate Sensor (PS110) doesn't 1F52
detect motor activation within specified time after
Saddle Push-on Plate Motor (M106) activates.
PS105 Saddle Press Home Position PS113 Home Position can't be detected on the Saddle 1054
Sensor Delay Press Home Position Sensor (PS113) within
PS113 the specified time after Saddle Stack Delivery
movement starts.
Saddle Press Home Position PS113 When Saddle Press movement starts, but Saddle 1155
Sensor Stationary Press Home Position Sensor (PS113) still keep
F-2-63
detecting Home Position.
T-2-6
2-40
2
Technology > Detecting Jams > Stitcher area jam detection
3 Periodic Servicing
■
■User
■
Maintenance
■Maintenance and Inspection
3
Periodic Servicing
3 Periodic Servicing > User Maintenance > User Maintenance > User Maintenance Item (saddle)
3-2
User Maintenance
User Maintenance
■■User Maintenance Items (finisher)
No. Item Timing
1 staple cartridge (replacement) when prompted (in host machine control panel)
2 waste staple (disposal) when prompted (in host machine control panel)
T-3-1
■■User Maintenance Item (saddle)

No. Item Timing
1 staple cartridge (replacement) when prompted (in host machine control panel)
T-3-2
3-2
3
Periodic Servicing > User Maintenance > User Maintenance > User Maintenance Item (saddle)
3 Periodic Servicing > Maintenance and Inspection > Durables > Durables (Saddle)
3-3
Maintenance and Inspection Durables

■■Durables (Finisher)
Periodically Replaced Parts
Some parts of the machine may require replacement once or more over the period of product
■■Periodically Replaced Parts (Finisher) warranty because of deterioration or damage. Replace them as necessary.
as of July 2012
The finisher does not have a part that requires periodical replacement.
No. Parts name Parts number Piece Expected life Remarks
1 Stapler FM2-6541-020 1 500,000 times
■■Periodically Replaced Parts (Saddle) 2 Feed Belt FB5-9103 2 3,000,000 pages
3 Belt Roller(φ35) FC6-6148 2 6,000,000 pages
The saddle finisher does not have a part that requires periodical replacement.
4 Delivery Static Eliminator FC9-3038 1 1,000,000 pages
5 Stack Delivery Roller Static FE3-0006 1 3,000,000 pages
Eliminator
6 Neat Paddle FL3-7459 4 3,000,000 pages
T-3-3
■■Durables (Saddle)
Some parts of the machine may require replacement once or more over the period of product
warranty because of deterioration or damage. Replace them as necessary.
as of July 2012
No. Parts name Parts number Piece Expected life Remarks
1 Saddle Alignment Roller FC8-7495 4 5,000,000 pages
2 Saddle Disengagement FL3-2010 2 1,000,000 pages
Roller
3 Saddle Inlet Static FC9-1432 1 3,000,000 pages
Eliminator
4 Saddle Inlet Roller Static FC9-1393 2 3,000,000 pages
Eliminator
5 Saddle Intermediate Static FL3-2005 1 3,000,000 pages
Eliminator
6 Saddle Feed Guide Lower FC9-1394 3 3,000,000 pages
Static Eliminator
7 Saddle stapler FM4-0556 1 300,000 times
T-3-4
3-3
3
Periodic Servicing > Maintenance and Inspection > Durables > Durables (Saddle)
3 Periodic Servicing > Maintenance and Inspection > Periodical Servicing > Periodical Servicing (Saddle)
3-4
Periodical Servicing
■■Periodical Servicing (Finisher)
Parts name Description Remarks
Sensors Cleaning Minimum maintenance interval of the host
machine
T-3-5
■■Periodical Servicing (Saddle)

Parts name Description Remarks
Sensors Cleaning Minimum maintenance interval of the host
machine
T-3-6
3-4
3
Periodic Servicing > Maintenance and Inspection > Periodical Servicing > Periodical Servicing (Saddle)
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning
■
■List
■
of Parts
■Removing from the connection equipment
■
■External/Internal Covers
■
■Electric Control Assembly
■
■Stacking Assembly
■
■Feed Assembly
■
■Intermediate Process Tray Assembly
■
■Saddle Stitcher Assembly
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of External/Internal Covers
4-2
List of Parts
List of External/Internal Covers

●● Plain model ●● Model with Saddle Unit
[6] [3]
[3]
[6]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[4] [4]
[8]
[8]
[5]
[5]
[7] [7] [10] [9]

F-4-2
F-4-1
No. Name Remarks Reference
[1] Front Cover - -
[1] Front Cover - -
[2] Rear Upper Cover (Right) - (Refer to page 4-21)
[2] Rear Upper Cover (Right) - (Refer to page 4-21)
[3] Rear Upper Cover (Left) - (Refer to page 4-21)
[3] Rear Upper Cover (Left) - (Refer to page 4-21)
[4] Rear Cover - (Refer to page 4-20)
[4] Rear Cover - (Refer to page 4-20)
[5] Latch Base Cover - -
[5] Latch Base Cover - -
[6] Inner Cover (Upper) - (Refer to page 4-22)
[6] Inner Cover (Upper) - (Refer to page 4-22)
[7] Inner Cover (Lower) - (Refer to page 4-23)
[7] Inner Cover (Lower) - (Refer to page 4-23)
[8] DIP Switch Cover - -
[8] DIP Switch Cover - -
[9] Saddle Inner Cover (Upper) For model with Saddle Unit (Refer to page 4-89)
T-4-1
[10] Saddle Inner Cover (Lower) For model with Saddle Unit (Refer to page 4-89)
T-4-2
4-2
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of External/Internal Covers
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit > Stacking Assembly
4-3
List of Main Unit
■■Stacking Assembly
●● Plain model
●● Model with Saddle Unit
[1]
[1]
[3]
[3]
[2]
[2]
[4]
[4]
F-4-3
F-4-4
No. Name Remarks Reference Adjustment during
parts replacement
[1] Tray A Unit - (Refer to page 4-32) (Refer to page 4-37) parts replacement
[1] Tray A Unit - (Refer to page 4-32) (Refer to page 4-37)
[2] Tray B Unit - (Refer to page 4-35) (Refer to page 4-37)
[3] Stack Wall (Upper) - (Refer to page 4-27) - [2] Tray B Unit - (Refer to page 4-35) (Refer to page 4-37)
[4] Stack Wall (Lower) For plain model (Refer to page 4-29) - [3] Stack Wall (Upper) - (Refer to page 4-27) -
T-4-3
[4] Stack Wall (Lower) For model with (Refer to page 4-29) -
Saddle Unit
T-4-4
4-3
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit > Stacking Assembly
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit > Feed Assembly
4-4
■■Feed Assembly
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
F-4-5

[1] Upper Feed Unit - (Refer to page 4-40)
[2] Side Registration Sensor Unit - (Refer to page 4-47)
[3] Side Registration Shift Unit - (Refer to page 4-49)
[4] Puncher Unit - (Refer to page 4-46)
T-4-5
4-4
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit > Feed Assembly
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly
4-5
■■Intermediate Process Tray Assembly

[1]

parts replacement
[2] [1] Neat Stack Unit (Upper) - (Refer to page 4-57) (Refer to page 5-17)
[2] Neat Stack Unit (Lower) - (Refer to page 4-59) (Refer to page 5-19)
[3] Process Tray Unit - (Refer to page 4-62) -
[9] [4] Swing Guide Unit - - -
[5] Process Tray Plate Unit - (Refer to page 4-72) -
[6] [6] Process Upper Guide Unit - (Refer to page 4-78) -
[3] [7] Lower Delivery Upper Guide - - -
Unit
[8] Belt Controller Unit - (Refer to page 4-81) -
[9] Stapler - (Refer to page 4-60) (Refer to page 4-61)
T-4-6
[7]
[4]
[8]
[5]
F-4-6
4-5
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit > Saddle Stitcher Assembly
4-6
■■Saddle Stitcher Assembly

parts replacement
[1] Saddle Unit - (Refer to page -
4-101)
[2] Saddle Stapler - (Refer to page 4-91) (Refer to page 5-63)
[3] Thrust Unit - (Refer to page 4-95) -
[4] Saddle Process Tray Unit - - -
[1] [5] Positioning Plate Unit - (Refer to page 4-98) -
[6] Alignment Roller Unit - (Refer to page -
4-112)
[7] Press Unit - (Refer to page -
[2]
4-102)
[3] [8] Press Roller Unit - (Refer to page -
4-105)
[9] Saddle Delivery Tray Unit - - -
T-4-7
[9]
[6]
[5]
[8]
[4]
[7]
F-4-7
4-6
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit > Saddle Stitcher Assembly
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of consumable parts locations > Saddle Stitcher Assembly
4-7
List of consumable parts locations
■■Finisher Assembly ■■Saddle Stitcher Assembly
[4]
[4] [3]
[6]
[6] [5]
[6]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[2]
[6]
[3]
[7]
[1]
F-4-8
F-4-9
No. Name Q'ty Reference Adjustment during
No. Name Q'ty Reference Adjustment during
parts replacement
parts replacement
[1] Stapler 1 (Refer to page 4-60) (Refer to page 4-61)
[1] Saddle Alignment Roller 4 (Refer to page 4-113) -
[2] Feed Belt 2 (Refer to page 4-70) (Refer to page 5-19)
[2] Saddle Disengagement Roller 2 (Refer to page 4-93) -
[3] Belt Roller(φ35) 2 (Refer to page 4-85) -
[3] Saddle Inlet Static Eliminator 1 (Refer to page 4-100) -
[4] Delivery Static Eliminator 1 -
[4] Saddle Inlet Roller Static 2 (Refer to page 4-90) -
[5] Stack Delivery Roller 1 -
Eliminator
Static Eliminator
[5] Saddle Intermediate Static 1 (Refer to page 4-91) -
[6] Neat Paddle 4 Top delivery outlet -
Eliminator
(Refer to page 4-55) [6] Saddle Feed Guide Lower 3 (Refer to page 4-92) -
Bottom delivery outlet Static Eliminator
(Refer to page 4-56) [7] Saddle Stapler 1 (Refer to page 4-91) (Refer to page 5-63)
T-4-8 T-4-9
4-7
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of consumable parts locations > Saddle Stitcher Assembly
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > List of Parts > Sensors > Saddle Unit
4-8
Sensors
■■Saddle Unit
Notation Name
PS101 Saddle inlet sensor
PS103 Saddle vertical path sensor
PS105 Saddle lead edge stopper HP sensor
PS106 Saddle alignment plate HP sensor
PS107 Saddle roller guide HP sensor
PS108 Saddle paper push-on plate HP sensor
PS109 Saddle press front sensor
PS110 Saddle press HP sensor
PS111 Saddle delivery tray paper sensor 2
PS112 Saddle delivery sub tray paper sensor
PS113 Saddle paper push-on plate motor sensor
PS118 PS114 Saddle folder/feeder motor sensor
PS101 PS115 Saddle press motor sensor
PS116 Saddle press position sensor
PS117 Saddle delivery tray paper sensor 1
PS121 PS118 Saddle paper tapping HP sensor
PS110 PS122
PS119 PS119 Saddle trailing edge retainer move HP sensor
PS109 PS108 PS121 Saddle trailing edge retainer HP sensor
PS115 PS122 Saddle lead-in roller HP sensor
PS103
PS107 T-4-10
PS116 PS105
PS106
PS114 PS113
PS112
PS117
PS111
F-4-10
4-8
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > List of Parts > Sensors > Saddle Unit
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > List of Parts > Sensors > Finisher Unit
4-9
■■Finisher Unit Notation Name
PS12 Rear alignment HP sensor
PS13 Processing tray HP sensor
PS203 PS14 Stack delivery auxiliary tray HP sensor
PS204 PS15 Paper edge area sensor 1
PS32 PS16 Paper edge area sensor 2
PS34 PS209
PS47 PS50 PS202 PS17 Processing tray paper sensor
PS49
PS20 Paddle rotation HP sensor
PS21 Paddle lift HP sensor
PS46
PS24 Paper trailing edge drop guide HP sensor
PS33 PS35
PS48
PS53 PS25 Feed belt HP sensor
PS52
PS51 PS26 Upper guide HP sensor
PS27 Staple HP sensor
PS28 Staple position sensor 1
PS9
PS5 PS31 Staple position sensor 4
PS8 PS32 Tray A paper sensor
PS2 PS33 Tray B paper sensor
PS34 Tray A lift motor rotation sensor
PS4 PS24 PS7
PS26 PS35 Tray B lift motor rotation sensor
PS201 PS6 PS42 Needle chip full sensor
PS25
PS43
PS29
PS31
PS43 Inlet roller HP sensor
PS206
PS30 PS44 Swing guide HP sensor
PS3
PS1 PS45 Delivery angle HP sensor
PS207 PS28
PS27
PS44 PS21 PS46 Chad sensor
PS42
PS208 PS45 PS47 Upper Tray Clock Sensor
PS205 PS12
PS17 PS48 Lower Tray Clock Sensor
PS16
PS49 Upper Tray Third Position Sensor
PS20
PS11
PS13 PS50 Upper Tray Fourth Position Sensor
PS15 PS14
PS51 Lower Tray First Position Sensor
PS52 Lower Tray Third Position Sensor
PS53 Lower Tray Fourth Position Sensor
PS201 Stack Retainer HP Sensor
F-4-11 PS202 Upper Neat Stack Unit Front Alignment HP Sensor
Notation Name PS203 Upper Neat Stack Unit Rear Alignment HP Sensor
PS1 Front door sensor PS204 Upper Neat Stack Unit Alignment Plate HP Sensor
PS2 Upper cover sensor PS205 Lower Neat Stack Unit Front Alignment HP Sensor
PS3 Inlet sensor PS206 Lower Neat Stack Unit Rear Alignment HP Sensor
PS4 Shift unit trailing edge sensor PS207 Lower Neat Stack Unit Alignment Plate HP Sensor
PS5 Upper delivery sensor PS208 Lower Neat Stack Unit Return Roller HP Sensor
PS6 Lower delivery sensor PS209 Upper Neat Stack Unit Return Roller HP Sensor
PS7 Horizontal registration detection unit HP sensor T-4-11
PS8 Shift roller unit HP sensor

PS9 Feed roller HP sensor
PS11 Front alignment HP sensor
4-9
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > List of Parts > Sensors > Finisher Unit
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > List of Parts > Motors > Saddle Unit
4-10
Motors
■■Saddle Unit
Notation Name
M101 Saddle feed motor
M102 Saddle alignment guide motor
M103 Saddle lead edge stopper motor
M104 Saddle roller guide motor
M105 Saddle paper push-on plate motor
M106 Saddle folder/feeder motor
M109 M107 Saddle delivery belt motor
M108 Saddle press motor
M109 Saddle sticher motor
M110 Saddle trailing edge holding motor
M111 Saddle trailing edge moving motor
M112 Saddle alignment roller motor
M113 Saddle tapping motor
M113 M114 Saddle lead-in roller disengage motor
M101 T-4-12
M111
M110 M114
M103
M108 M104 M102
M112
M106
M105
M107
F-4-12
4-10
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > List of Parts > Motors > Saddle Unit
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > List of Parts > Motors > Finisher Unit
4-11
■■Finisher Unit
Notation Name
M1 Inlet feed motor
M204 M2 Shift feed motor
M203 M3 Buffer front feed motor
M22
M209 M4 Buffer motor
M202 M5 Delivery motor
M6 Horizontal registration detection unit move motor
M7 Horizontal registration shift motor
M8 Feed roller disengage motor
M23 M9 Front alignment motor
M10 Rear alignment motor
M11 Processing stopper move motor
M12 Assist motor
M13 Stack delivery auxiliary tray motor
M3 M14 Paddle rotation motor
M4 M15 Paddle lift motor
M8
M16 Paper trailing edge drop motor
M2 M17 Feed belt move motor
M5
M6 M18 Swing guide motor
M7
M16 M19 Stack delivery motor
M20 Upper guide motor
M1 M21 Staple move motor
M26
M18 M20 M17 M22 Tray A lift motor
M28 M23 Tray B lift motor
M27 M25 Staple motor
M12
M15 M26 Processing feed motor
M201
M25 M27 Inlet roller disengage motor
M13 M28 Delivery angle adjustment motor
M14
M21 M201 Stack Retainer Motor
M11 M202 Upper Neat Stack Unit Front Alignment Moter
M19 M203 Upper Neat Stack Unit Rear Alignment Moter
M206 M204 Upper Neat Stack Unit Alignment Plate Lifting Motor
M207 M205 Lower Neat Stack Unit Front Alignment Moter
M205 M208 M206 Lower Neat Stack Unit Rear Alignment Moter
M207 Lower Neat Stack Unit Alignment Plate Lifting Motor
M10
M208 Lower Neat Stack Unit Return Roller Lifting Motor
M9 M209 Upper Neat Stack Unit Return Roller Lifting Motor
T-4-13
F-4-13
4-11
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > List of Parts > Motors > Finisher Unit
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > List of Parts > Solenoids > Saddle Unit
4-12
Solenoids
■■Saddle Unit
Notation Name
SL103 Alignment roller disengage solenoid (upper)
SL104 Alignment roller disengage solenoid (lower)
SL105 Lead edge gripper solenoid
T-4-14
SL103
SL105
SL104
F-4-14
4-12
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > List of Parts > Solenoids > Saddle Unit
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > List of Parts > Solenoids > Finisher Unit
4-13
■■Finisher Unit
Notation Name
SL1 Buffer path switch solenoid
SL2 Upper path switch solenoid
SL3 Saddle path switch solenoid
SL11 SL10 Assist Roller Disengagement Solenoid 1
SL11 Assist Roller Disengagement Solenoid 2
T-4-15
SL2 SL10
SL1
SL3
F-4-15
4-13
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > List of Parts > Solenoids > Finisher Unit
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > List of Parts > PCBs > Saddle Unit
4-14
PCBs
■■Saddle Unit
Notation Name
UN101 Saddle sticher controller PCB
UN125 Saddle sticher jam LED PCB
T-4-16
UN101
UN125
F-4-16
4-14
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > List of Parts > PCBs > Saddle Unit
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > List of Parts > PCBs > Finisher Unit
4-15
■■Finisher Unit
Notation Name
UN1 DC power PCB (24V)
UN2 DC power PCB (38V)
UN3 Finisher controller PCB
UN10 UN5 Feed motor driver PCB
UN6 Staple driver PCB
UN7 Relay PCB
UN8 ARCNET transceiver PCB
UN9 Optional switch PCB
UN11 UN10 Upper tray motor driver PCB
UN11 Lower tray motor driver PCB
UN12 AC noise filter PCB
UN13 Buffer path 1 sensor PCB
UN14 Buffer path 2 sensor PCB
UN201
UN15 UN15 Tray A paper surface sensor PCB (emission)
UN16 Tray A paper surface sensor PCB (receiving)
UN17 Tray B paper surface sensor PCB (emission)
UN14 UN5
UN16 UN18 Tray B paper surface sensor PCB (receiving)
UN13 UN22 Lower path sensor PCB
UN24 Horizontal registration sensor PCB
UN25 UN24 UN25 Horizontal registration relay PCB
UN17
UN201 Neat Driver PCB
UN22 UN3 UN7 T-4-17
UN18
UN6
UN9 UN1
UN8
UN2
UN12
F-4-17
4-15
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > List of Parts > PCBs > Finisher Unit
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > List of Parts > Switchs
4-16
Switchs
Notation Name
MSW1 Front door switch
MSW7 Swing guide safety switch
SW1 Main switch
CB1 Circuit breaker
T-4-18
MSW7
SW1
MSW1
CB1
F-4-18
4-16
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > List of Parts > Switchs
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > List of Parts > Fans
4-17
Fans
Notation Name
FM2 FM1 Power cooling fan 1
FM2 Feeder cooling fan 1
FM5 FM3 Feeder cooling fan 2
FM4 Power cooling 2
FM5 Upper Delivery Fan
FM6 Lower Delivery Fan
T-4-19
FM3
FM6
FM1
FM4
F-4-19
4-17
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > List of Parts > Fans
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Removing from the connection equipment > Removing from the Host Machine > Procedure
4-18
Removing from the connection equipment 2) Free the ARCNET Cable [1] from the Wire Saddle [2].
3) Turn the tab [3] in the direction of the arrow and disconnect the ARCNET Cable [1] from the
terminal [4].
Removing from the Host Machine
■■Preparation
1) Open the Front Cover. [2]
■■Procedure
CAUTION:
Be sure to check that the power of the host machine and this equipment is OFF and the [1] [3]
power plug is disconnected from the outlet.
[4]
1) Disconnect the Shunt Cable [1] (finisher side only).
• 1 Screw [2] F-4-21
4) Remove the Rear Small Cover [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
• 2 Hooks [3]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-4-22
F-4-20
4-18
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Removing from the connection equipment > Removing from the Host Machine > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Removing from the connection equipment > Removing from the Host Machine > Procedure
4-19
5) Bring down the hinge [1] of the Latch Base (Rear).
• 1 Screw [2]
[1] [2]
F-4-23
6) While lifting the Latch Base (Front) [1], remove the finisher [2] from the host machine [3].
• 1 Screw [4]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
F-4-24
4-19
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Removing from the connection equipment > Removing from the Host Machine > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > External/Internal Covers > Removing the Rear Cover > Procedure
4-20
External/Internal Covers
Removing the Rear Cover

■■Procedure
1) Remove the Rear Cover [1].
• 2 Screws [2] (to loosen)
• 6 Screws [3] (to remove) CAUTION:
When installing the Rear Cover, be sure to check that the edge [1] of the cover is in
contact with the gasket [2].
x6
[1]
[3]
[3]
[2] [1]
[2]
F-4-25
F-4-26
4-20
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > External/Internal Covers > Removing the Rear Cover > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > External/Internal Covers > Removing the Rear Upper Cover (Left) > Procedure
4-21
Removing the Rear Upper Cover (Right) Removing the Rear Upper Cover (Left)
■■Procedure ■■Preparation
1) Remove the Rear Upper Cover (Right) [1]. 1) Remove the Rear Upper Cover (Right).(Refer to page 4-21)
• 2 Screws [2] ■■Procedure
• 2 Protrusions [3]
1) Remove the Rear Upper Cover (Left) [1].
• 3 Screws [2]
[3]
x2
x3
[2]
[1] [2] [1]
F-4-27
[2]
F-4-28
4-21
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > External/Internal Covers > Removing the Rear Upper Cover (Left) > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > External/Internal Covers > Removing the Inner Cover (Upper) > Procedure
4-22
Removing the Inner Cover (Upper)
■■Preparation
2) Open the Upper Cover [1], and remove the Inner Cover (Upper) [2].
1) Open the Front Cover.
• 4 Screws [3]
■■Procedure
[2] [1]
1) Push the 3 claws [1], and remove the 3 knobs [2].
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-4-29
CAUTION:
F-4-31
When the One-way Clutch [1] inside the knob is removed, be sure to install it in the
direction where the arrow marking of the One-way Clutch is visible.
[1]
F-4-30
4-22
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > External/Internal Covers > Removing the Inner Cover (Upper) > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > External/Internal Covers > Removing the Inner Cover (Lower) > Procedure
4-23
Removing the Inner Cover (Lower)
■■Preparation
■■Procedure
1) Remove the Inner Cover (Lower) [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
[1]
x2
[2]
F-4-32
4-23
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > External/Internal Covers > Removing the Inner Cover (Lower) > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Electric Control Assembly > Removing the Neat Stack Driver PCB > Procedure
4-24
Electric Control Assembly Removing the Neat Stack Driver PCB

■■Preparation
Removing the Finisher Controller PCB
1) Remove the Rear Upper Cover (Right).(Refer to page 4-21)
■■Preparation 2) Remove the Rear Upper Cover (Left).(Refer to page 4-21)
3) Remove the Rear Cover.(Refer to page 4-20)
■■Procedure
■■Procedure
1) Remove the Neat Stack Driver PCB [1].
• 6 Connectors [2]
CAUTION:
• 2 Screws [3]
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB, be sure to perform the following • 2 Spacers [4]
adjustment.
• Adjustment after Replacing the Finisher Controller PCB　(Refer to page 5-53) [2]
[4]
[1]
x6 [3]
1) Remove the Finisher Controller PCB [1].

• 33 Connectors [2] x2 [2]
• 2 Connectors [3] (when the Puncher Unit is installed) [4] [2]
• 6 Screws [4]
• 1 Spacer [5]
[3]
[4] [3] [5] [3]
[4]
x33 F-4-34
[3] [3]
[1]
x2 [4]
[4]
[3]
x6 [3]
[4] [4]
[3] [5] [3]
F-4-33
4-24
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Electric Control Assembly > Removing the Neat Stack Driver PCB > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Electric Control Assembly > Removing the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB > Procedure
4-25
Removing the Feed Motor Driver PCB Removing the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
■■Preparation ■■Preparation
1) Remove the Rear Upper Cover (Right).(Refer to page 4-21) 1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Remove the Rear Upper Cover (Left).(Refer to page 4-21) 2) Pull out the Saddle Unit.
3) Remove the Rear Cover.(Refer to page 4-20) 3) Remove the Saddle Inner Cover (Lower).(Refer to page 4-89)
4) Remove the Neat Stack Driver PCB.(Refer to page 4-24) ■■Procedure
■■Procedure 1) Remove the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB Cover [1].
1) Remove the Feed Motor Driver PCB [1]. • 6 Screws [2]
[1]
• 6 Screws [3]
[3] [2] [3]
[2]
[1]
[3] [3]
[2] [2] [2]
[3]
[3] [2]
[2]
F-4-35
F-4-36
4-25
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Electric Control Assembly > Removing the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Electric Control Assembly > Removing the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB > Procedure
4-26
2) Remove the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB [1].
• 4 Screws [3]
[3] [2] [2] [3]
[2]
[3] [2] [1] [3]
F-4-37
4-26
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Electric Control Assembly > Removing the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Stacking Assembly > Removing the Stack Wall (Upper) > Procedure
4-27
Stacking Assembly Removing the Stack Wall (Upper)

■■Procedure
Points to Note on handling the Stack Wall Rail
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Be sure to avoid scars and dents on the Stack Rail [1]. Having scars or dents on the
Be sure to avoid scars and dents on the Stack Rail [1]. Having scars or dents on the Stack Rail can affect stackability. If soiling is attached, be sure to clean it with alcohol.
Stack Rail can affect stackability. If soiling is attached, be sure to clean it with alcohol.
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1] F-4-39
F-4-38
4-27
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Stacking Assembly > Removing the Stack Wall (Upper) > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Stacking Assembly > Removing the Stack Wall (Upper) > Procedure
4-28
1) Lift the Tray A [1] to the upper limit position. 4) While supporting the Tray A [1], insert a screwdriver into the hole [A] to release the block [2]
2) While supporting the Tray B [2], insert a screwdriver into the hole [A] to release the block [3] in the direction of [B], and lower the Tray A [1] to the lower limit position.
in the direction of [B], and lower the Tray B [2] by approximately 10 cm from the lower edge
of the Neat Stack Unit (Lower) Cover [4]. CAUTION::
When lowering the Tray A [1], be careful not hit it with the Neat Stack Unit (Lower).
[1]
[4] [3]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[B]
[A] [B]
[A]
F-4-40
3) Remove the Neat Stack Unit (Lower) Cover [1].
• 3 Screws [2] F-4-42
• 2 Protrusions [3] 5) Remove the Stack Wall (Upper) [1].
• 3 Screws [2]
[2]
[2]
x3
[1] x3
[3]
[2]
[2] [1]
[3]
F-4-41
F-4-43
4-28
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Stacking Assembly > Removing the Stack Wall (Upper) > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Stacking Assembly > Removing the Stack Wall (Lower) > Procedure
4-29
Removing the Stack Wall (Lower) 1) Remove the Tray B Upper Limit Stopper [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
■■Preparation
■■Procedure
CAUTION:
Be sure to avoid scars and dents on the Stack Rail [1]. Having scars or dents on the
Stack Rail can affect stackability. If soiling is attached, be sure to clean it with alcohol.
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-4-45
2) Lift the Tray B [1] until it hits the [A] part of the Neat Stack Unit (Lower) Cover [2].
[2]
[A]
[1]
F-4-44
[1]
F-4-46
4-29
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Stacking Assembly > Removing the Stack Wall (Lower) > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Stacking Assembly > Removing the Stack Wall (Lower) > Procedure
4-30
CAUTION: NOTE:
Because of the different procedures depending on whether the Saddle Unit is attached,
The [A] part of the Neat Stack Unit (Lower) Cover [1] controls the ascent of the Tray B be sure to follow the steps for the appropriate model.
[2]. When the Neat Stack Unit (Lower) Cover [1] is removed, be sure to avoid hitting the • Model with Saddle Unit: Steps 3 and 4
following parts on the upper side by lifting the Tray B [2]. • Model without Saddle Unit: Step 5
• [4] Neat Stack Unit (Lower)

• [5] Tray A
• [6] Neat Stack Unit (Upper) 3) Lower the shutter [1], and remove the 2 screws [2].
4) Remove the Stack Wall (Lower) [3].
[6] • 5 Screws [4]
[1] [5]
[A]
[4]
x2 x5
[2]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
F-4-47
[2]
F-4-48
5) Remove the Stack Wall (Lower) [1].
• 7 Screws [2]
x7
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-4-49
4-30
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Stacking Assembly > Removing the Stack Wall (Lower) > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Stacking Assembly > Position of Tray B at power-on
4-31
Points to Note on Tray A/B Cable Position of Tray B at power-on
CAUTION: CAUTION:
When installing the Tray A/B Unit, be careful not to get the cables of the Tray A Unit and The Tray B [1] must be below the Tray B Paper Sensor [2] at power-on. Otherwise, it
Tray B Unit tangled. can cause an error at position detection of the Tray B.
[1]
[2]
F-4-50 F-4-51
4-31
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Stacking Assembly > Position of Tray B at power-on
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Stacking Assembly > Removing the Tray A Unit > Procedure
4-32
Removing the Tray A Unit 2) Remove the Tray A Upper Limit Stopper [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
■■Preparation
1) Remove the Stack Wall (Upper).(Refer to page 4-27)
2) Remove the Neat Stack Unit (Upper).(Refer to page 4-57)
4) Remove the Rear Upper Cover (Left).(Refer to page 4-21)
6) Remove the Inner Cover (Upper).(Refer to page 4-22)
■■Procedure
[1]
CAUTION:
[2]
When replacing or installing/removing the Tray A, be sure to perform the following
adjustment.
F-4-53
• Adjusting the Positions of the Tray A and B (Refer to page 4-37)
3) Free the harness [1].
• 1 Reuse Band [2]
• 1 Wire Saddle [3]
1) Remove the Support Column Cover [1]. • 2 Edge Saddles [4]
• 1 Claw [2] • 4 Connectors [5]
[1]
[4]
x4 [5]
[3]
[2]
[2]
[4] [1]
F-4-54
F-4-52
4-32
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Stacking Assembly > Removing the Tray A Unit > Procedure
4-33
4) Remove the Neat Stack Relay PCB Support Plate [1]. 6) Remove the Tray A Cover [1].
• 4 Screws [2] • 4 Screws [2]
[2]
[2]
x4 x4
[2]
[1]
[2] [1]
F-4-55 F-4-57
5) Pull out the Grounding Wire [1] and the harness [2] from the hole [A].
• 3 Screws [3]
• 1 Toothed Washer [4]
• 1 Connector [5]
[A]
[3]
x2 [6]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[3]
F-4-56
4-33
4
4-34
7) Remove the Tray A Unit [1].
CAUTION:
CAUTION: When installing the Tray A/B Unit, be careful not to get the cables of the Tray A Unit and
Be sure to avoid contact with the Upper Cover [1] when removing the unit. Tray B Unit tangled.
[1]
F-4-60
F-4-58
[1]
F-4-59
4-34
4
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Stacking Assembly > Removing the Tray B Unit > Procedure
4-35
Removing the Tray B Unit 1) Pull out the Grounding Wire [1] and the harness [2] from the hole [A].
• 3 Screws [3]
■■Preparation • 1 Toothed Washer [4]
• 1 Connector [5]
1) Remove the Stack Wall (Lower).(Refer to page 4-29)
[A]
7) Remove the Inner Cover (Upper).(Refer to page 4-22) x2 [3]
[2]
8) Remove the Tray A Unit.(Refer to page 4-32)
9) Remove the Neat Stack Unit (Lower).(Refer to page 4-59)
[5]
■■Procedure
CAUTION:
When replacing or installing/removing the Tray B, be sure to perform the following [4] [1]
adjustment.
[3]
• Adjusting the Positions of the Tray A and B (Refer to page 4-37)
F-4-61
2) Remove the Tray B Cover [1].
• 4 Screws [2]
[2]
x4
[1]
F-4-62
4-35
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Stacking Assembly > Removing the Tray B Unit > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Stacking Assembly > Removing the Tray B Unit > Procedure
4-36
3) Remove the Tray B Unit [1].
CAUTION:
CAUTION: When installing the Tray A/B Unit, be careful not to get the cables of the Tray A Unit and
Be sure to avoid contact with the Upper Cover [1] when removing the unit. Tray B Unit tangled.
[1]
F-4-65
F-4-63
CAUTION:
The Tray B [1] must be below the Tray B Paper Sensor [2] at power-on. Otherwise, it
can cause an error at position detection of the Tray B.
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-4-64
F-4-66
4-36
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Stacking Assembly > Removing the Tray B Unit > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Stacking Assembly > Removing the Tray A/B Lifting Motor
4-37
Adjusting Position of Tray A, B Removing the Tray A/B Lifting Motor
This adjustment is executed to keep the parallelism of the Tray A or B when replacing or
installing/removing the tray. NOTE:
Remove the Tray A/B Lifting Motor by following the same procedure.
1) While keeping the tray horizontal, put the tray into the rails (left and right).
Be sure to have same distance at distance A (length from the tip [3] of the rail to the tray
1) Remove the Tray A/B Cover [1].
shaft [4]) between the front side [1] and the rear side [2] of the tray when installing the tray.
• 4 Screws [2]
[2]
CAUTION:
When lowering the tray, be sure to do so while pulling the block [5]. x4
[2]
To stop the lowering, return the block [5].
[3]
[1]
[1]
F-4-68
[4] [A]
[2]
[5]
F-4-67
4-37
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Stacking Assembly > Removing the Tray A/B Lifting Motor
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Stacking Assembly > Removing the Tray A/B Lifting Motor
4-38
2) While supporting the tray from below, release the block [1] in the direction of the arrow, and 4) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the harness [4] from the Edge Saddle [2] and the
lower the tray until it hits the bottom. Wire Saddle [3].
CAUTION:
[1]
Be sure to lower the Tray Unit to the bottom beforehand because removing the Tray A/ [4]
B Lifting Motor loosens tension of the belt, causing the Tray Unit to fall.
[2]
x2 [3]
[1]
F-4-71
5) Remove the Tray A/B Lifting Motor [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
• 1 Belt [3]
F-4-69
[3]
3) Remove the screw [2], and remove the Connector Cover [1]. [1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-4-72
F-4-70
4-38
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Stacking Assembly > Removing the Tray A/B Lifting Motor
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Feed Assembly > Removing the Delivery Static Eliminator > Procedure
4-39
Feed Assembly 3) Remove the Delivery Static Eliminator [1].

• 1 Screw [2] (to loosen)
• 3 Screws [3] (to remove)
Removing the Delivery Static Eliminator
[3]
■■Procedure [1]
1) While supporting the Tray A [1], insert a screwdriver into the hole [A] to release the block
x3
[2]
[2] in the direction of [B], and lower the bottom side [C] of the Tray A [1] to the upper end
position [D] of the Neat Stack Unit (Lower) Cover [3].
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[A] [C]
[D]
F-4-75
[B]
[3]
F-4-73
2) Store the following parts of the Neat Stack Unit (Upper) [1].
• 2 Alignment Arms [2]
• 1 Paddle Unit [3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
F-4-74
4-39
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Feed Assembly > Removing the Delivery Static Eliminator > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Feed Assembly > Removing the Upper Feed Unit > Procedure
4-40
Removing the Upper Feed Unit 2) Disconnect the 2 Grounding Wires [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
■■Preparation 3) Free the harness [3].
• 1 Edge Saddle [5]
• 1 Reuse Band [6]
• 4 Wire Saddles [7]
■■Procedure [1]
x2 [6]
1) Remove the Fan Unit [1].
• 1 Connector [2] [7] [2]
[7]
• 1 Screw [3] x6
[1] [3]
[7]
[1]
[3]
[4]
x2
F-4-77
4) Remove the Shaft Retainer Plate [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
[2]
F-4-76
[2]
[1]
F-4-78
4-40
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Feed Assembly > Removing the Upper Feed Unit > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Feed Assembly > Removing the Upper Feed Unit > Procedure
4-41
5) While opening the Upper Feed Unit [1], remove the Damper Shaft [2]. 7) Slide the 2 Hinge Pins [1], and remove the Upper Feed Unit [2].
• 1 Screw [3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-4-79
6) Place the 2 Grounding Wires [1] and the harness [2] on top of the finisher by putting them [1]
through the hole [A] and the gap [B]. [1]
[A]
F-4-81
[B]
[2]
[1]
F-4-80
4-41
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Feed Assembly > Removing the Upper Feed Unit > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Feed Assembly > Removing the Inlet Feed Motor > Procedure
4-42
Removing the Inlet Feed Motor 2) Remove the Inlet Feed Motor Unit [1].
• 1 Connector [2]
■■Preparation • 2 Screws [3]
1) Remove the Rear Cover.(Refer to page 4-20) [3]
■■Procedure [1]

[2]
x3
[3]
F-4-83
3) Remove the Inlet Feed Motor [1].
[3] [2] [1] [3] • 2 Screws [2]
F-4-82
[2]
[1]
F-4-84
4-42
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Feed Assembly > Removing the Inlet Feed Motor > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Feed Assembly > Removing the Buffer Front Feed Motor > Procedure
4-43
Removing the Paper Trailing Edge Drop Motor Removing the Buffer Front Feed Motor
1) Remove the Rear Cover.(Refer to page 4-20) 1) Remove the Rear Upper Cover (Right).(Refer to page 4-21)
■■Procedure 2) Remove the Rear Upper Cover (Left).(Refer to page 4-21)
1) Remove the Paper Trailing Edge Drop Motor [1].

■■Procedure
• 1 Connector [2] 1) Remove the Buffer Front Feed Motor Unit [1] and the belt [2].
• 2 Screws [3] • 1 Connector [3]
• 2 Screws [4]
[2] [1] • 1 Hook [5]
[1] [5]
[3]
x2
x2
[2]
[4]
[3]
F-4-85
F-4-86
4-43
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Feed Assembly > Removing the Buffer Front Feed Motor > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Feed Assembly > Removing the Buffer Motor > Procedure
4-44
2) Remove the Buffer Front Feed Motor [1].
Removing the Buffer Motor
• 2 Screws [2]
[2]
■■Preparation
[2]
x2 2) Remove the Rear Upper Cover (Left).(Refer to page 4-21)
■■Procedure
1) Disconnect the Flat Cable [1].
• 1 Connector [2]
• 1 Guide [A]
[1]
F-4-87
[2]
CAUTION:
When installing the Buffer Front Feed Motor Unit, be sure to perform the following steps
to hook the belt on the pulley.
1) Hook the belt [2] of the Buffer Front Feed Motor Unit [1] on the 2 pulleys [3].
2) While keeping the condition of step 1, hook the [A] part of the belt [2] on the pulley [4] [1]
at the finisher side.
[A]
F-4-89
[1]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[A]
F-4-88
4-44
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Feed Assembly > Removing the Buffer Motor > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Feed Assembly > Removing the Buffer Motor > Procedure
4-45
2) Disconnect the 8 connectors [1]. 4) Remove the Buffer Motor Unit [1].
• 1 Reuse Band [2] • 1 Connector [2]
• 2 Screws [3]
[1] [1] [2]
[3] [2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-4-90
3) Remove the Harness Guide [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
[3] [1]
F-4-92
5) Remove the Buffer Motor [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
[2] [1] [2]
[2]
[1] [2]
F-4-91
F-4-93
4-45
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Feed Assembly > Removing the Buffer Motor > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Feed Assembly > Removing the Puncher Unit > Procedure
4-46
Removing the Puncher Unit 2) Disconnect the 2 connectors [2] connected to the Finisher Controller [1].
■■Preparation
[1]
2) Separate the finisher from the host machine.(Refer to page 4-18) x2
■■Procedure
1) Remove the Punch Dust Box Unit [1].
[2]
[2]
F-4-95
3) Free the harness [1] of the Puncher Unit.
• 1 Harness Guide [3]
• 1 Connector [4]
[1] [3]
[4]
F-4-94
[1]
[2]
F-4-96
4-46
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Feed Assembly > Removing the Puncher Unit > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Feed Assembly > Removing the Side Registration Sensor Unit > Procedure
4-47
4) Fit the Guide Plate [1] of the finisher to the groove [A] of the Puncher Unit to remove the
Removing the Side Registration Sensor Unit
Puncher Unit [2].
• 2 Screws [3] ■■Preparation
CAUTION:
2) Separate the finisher from the host machine.(Refer to page 4-18)
Do not get the Puncher Unit [2] caught by the belt [4]. 3) Remove the Rear Upper Cover (Right).(Refer to page 4-21)
6) Remove the Inner Cover (Upper) (when the Puncher Unit is installed).(Refer to page 4-22)
[2] 7) Remove the Puncher Unit (when the Puncher Unit is installed).(Refer to page 4-46)
■■Procedure
x2
1) Remove the Side Registration Sensor Unit [1].
• 1 Flat Cable [2]
• 4 Screws [3]
[2]
[3] [1] [2]
[1] [A]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[4] [3]
F-4-98
F-4-97
4-47
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Feed Assembly > Removing the Side Registration Sensor Unit > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Feed Assembly > Removing the Side Registration Sensor PCB > Procedure
4-48
Removing the Side Registration Sensor PCB 3) Remove the Shift Shaft [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
■■Preparation 4) Remove the screw [4] from the Shift Shaft [3].

6) Remove the Inner Cover (Upper) (when the Puncher Unit is installed).(Refer to page 4-22)
7) Remove the Puncher Unit (when the Puncher Unit is installed).(Refer to page 4-46) [3]
8) Remove the Side Registration Sensor Unit.(Refer to page 4-47)
■■Procedure
1) Place the Side Registration Sensor Unit in the direction as shown in the figure below. [2]
[4]
2) Remove the 2 plates [1].
F-4-100
• 4 Screws [2]
5) Move the Guide Cover [1].
[2] • 2 Screws [2]
6) Remove the Shift Shaft [3] from the Shaft Support [4].
[1] [2] [2] [2]
x2
[1]
[4]
[3]
F-4-99
F-4-101
4-48
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Feed Assembly > Removing the Side Registration Sensor PCB > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Feed Assembly > Removing the Side Registration Shift Unit > Procedure
4-49
7) Move the Shift Shaft [1] to remove the Side Registration Sensor PCB [2].
Removing the Side Registration Shift Unit
• 2 Screws [3]
■■Preparation
x2 [2] 2) Separate the finisher from the host machine.(Refer to page 4-18)
[1] ■■Procedure
1) Remove the Latch Base Cover [1].
[3] • 3 Screws [2]
F-4-102
[1]
[2]
F-4-103
4-49
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Feed Assembly > Removing the Side Registration Shift Unit > Procedure
4-50
2) Remove the Latch Base Cover (Upper Right) [1]. 4) Remove the Rear Cover Support Base [1].
• 1 Screw [2] • 3 Screws [2]
• 2 Hooks [3]
[2]
x2
[3]
[1] [2]
[1]
[2]
F-4-106
F-4-104 5) Remove the Feed Stay (Upper Right) [1].

3) Remove the Latch Base Support Plate [1]. • 4 Screws [2]
• 2 Screws [2]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-4-105 [2]
F-4-107
4-50
4
4-51
6) Remove the Detection Drive Assembly [1]. 8) Disconnect the 7 connectors [1].
• 2 Connectors [2] • 1 Reuse Band [2]
• 4 Screws [3]
[1]
[2]
[3] x7 [1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3] [1]
F-4-110
F-4-108 9) Remove the Harness Guide [1].

7) Disconnect the Flat Cable [1]. • 1 Screw [2]
• 1 Connector [2]
• 1 Guide [A]
[2]
[2] [1]
[1]
F-4-111
[A]
F-4-109
4-51
4
4-52
10) Remove the Side Registration Shift Unit [1].
CAUTION:
• 2 Screws [2]
[1] When connecting the connector [1] (Relay Connector) that was removed in step 8, be
sure to put it through the hole [A] of the Harness Guide [2].
[1]
[A] [2]
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-4-112
CAUTION:
F-4-114
When installing the Side Registration Unit [1], align the 2 holes [2] of the Side
Registration Shift Unit with 2 the Positioning Pins [3] of the Finisher Front Plate.
[1]
[3]
[2]
F-4-113
4-52
4
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Feed Assembly > Removing the Side Registration Shift Motor > Procedure
4-53
Removing the Side Registration Shift Motor 2) Remove the Shift Motor Unit [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
■■Preparation • Flat Cable Retainer Plate [3]
• 1 Connector [4]
3) Remove the Rear Upper Cover (Right).(Refer to page 4-21) [3] [4]
4) Remove the Rear Upper Cover (Left).(Refer to page 4-21) [1]
7) Remove the Side Registration Shift Unit.(Refer to page 4-49)
■■Procedure
1) Move the Shift Motor Unit [1].
• 5 Screws [2]
[2] [2]
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-4-116
CAUTION:
When installing/removing the Shift Motor Unit, be sure to fit the screw [2] of the Belt
Retainer Assembly [1] to the dent [A] of the Mounting Plate.
F-4-115 [1] [A]
[2]
F-4-117
4-53
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Feed Assembly > Removing the Side Registration Shift Motor > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Feed Assembly > Removing the Shift Motor > Procedure
4-54
3) Remove the belt [1], and remove the Side Registration Shift Motor [2].
Removing the Shift Motor
• 2 Screws [3]
[3]
■■Preparation
[1]
7) Remove the Side Registration Shift Unit.(Refer to page 4-49)
■■Procedure
[2]
1) Remove the Shift Motor [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
F-4-118
• 1 Belt [3]
[1]
[3]
x2
[2]
F-4-119
4-54
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Feed Assembly > Removing the Shift Motor > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Neat Paddle (Upper) > Procedure
4-55
Intermediate Process Tray Assembly Removing the Neat Paddle (Upper)

■■Procedure
Removing the Stack Delivery Roller Upper Static
1) While supporting the Tray B [1], insert a screwdriver into the hole [A] to release the block [2]
Eliminator in the direction of [B], and lower the Tray B [1] by approximately 10 cm from the lower edge
of the Neat Stack Unit (Lower) Cover [3].
■■Procedure
in the direction of [B], and lower the Tray B [1] by approximately 15cm from the lower edge [3]
of the Neat Stack Unit (Lower) Cover [3]. [2]
[3]
[2] [1] [B]
[A]
[1] [B]
[A] F-4-122
2) While supporting the Tray A [1], insert a screwdriver into the hole [A] to release the block
[2] in the direction of [B], and lower the upper side [C] of the Tray A [1] to the upper end
position [D] of the Neat Stack Unit (Lower) Cover [3].
F-4-120
2) Remove the Stack Delivery Roller Upper Static Eliminator [1]. [3] [2]
[1]
• 4 Screws [2]
[2]
[B]
x4
[A]
[1]
F-4-123
F-4-121
4-55
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Neat Paddle (Upper) > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Neat Paddle (Lower) > Procedure
4-56
3) Open the Neat Paddle (Upper) Unit [1].
Removing the Neat Paddle (Lower)
4) Move the belt [2] in the direction of the arrow so that the 2 claws [3] face upward.
■■Procedure
NOTE:
If the 2 claws [3] are already facing upward, there is no need to move the belt [2]. 1) While supporting the Tray B [1], insert a screwdriver into the hole [A] to release the block [2]
[1]
[3]
[2] [2]
[1] [B]
[3]
[A]
F-4-124
5) 5) Remove the 2 Neat Paddles (Upper) [1]. F-4-126
• 2 Claws [2]
[2] [1]
x2
[2]
[1]
F-4-125
4-56
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Neat Paddle (Lower) > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Neat Stack Unit (Upper) > Procedure
4-57
2) Open the Neat Paddle (Lower) Unit [1].
Removing the Neat Stack Unit (Upper)
3) Move the belt [2] in the direction of the arrow so that the 2 claws [3] face upward.
■■Preparation
NOTE:
If the 2 claws [3] are already facing upward, there is no need to move the belt [2]. 1) Remove the Stack Wall (Upper).(Refer to page 4-27)
■■Procedure
CAUTION:
[1]
When replacing or installing/removing the component parts of the Neat Stack Unit
[2]
(Upper), be sure to perform the following adjustment.
• Adjusting the Alignment Position of the Upper Neat Alignment Plate(Refer to page
5-17)
[3]
1) Remove the Neat Stack Unit (Upper) Cover (Left) [1].
• 4 Screws [2]
[2]
F-4-127 [1]
4) Remove the 2 Neat Paddles (Lower) [1].
• 2 Claws [2]
x4
[1]
x2 [2]
[2]
[2] F-4-129
[1]
F-4-128
4-57
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Neat Stack Unit (Upper) > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Neat Stack Unit (Upper) > Procedure
4-58
2) Set the Belt Retainer Shaft [1] released. 4) Remove the Timing Belt [2] from the pulley [1].
[1] [1]
[2]
F-4-130 F-4-132
3) Turn the pulley [1] in the direction of the arrow to set the positions of the 2 ribs [A] as shown 5) Remove the Neat Stack Unit (Upper) [1].
in the figure below. • 2 Connectors [2]
• 2 Screws [3]
• 2 Pins [4]
CAUTION:
[A]
When installing/removing the Neat Stack Unit (Upper) [1], be sure to install/remove the
screw [3] while supporting the Neat Stack Unit with your hand to prevent a fall.
[1]
[1]
[A]
x2
F-4-131
x2
[4] [3]
[2]
[4]
[3]
F-4-133
4-58
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Neat Stack Unit (Upper) > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Neat Stack Unit (Lower) > Procedure
4-59
CAUTION: Removing the Neat Stack Unit (Lower)

When putting down the Neat Stack Unit (Upper), be sure to place the unit with the 2 ■■Preparation
Alignment Plates [1] facing up.
■■Procedure
CAUTION:
When replacing or installing/removing the component parts of the Neat Stack Unit
(Lower), be sure to perform the following adjustment.
• Adjusting the Alignment Position of the Lower Neat Alignment Plate(Refer to page
5-19)
[1]
[1] 1) Lift the Tray A [1] to the upper limit position.

2) Open the Edge Saddle [2] and the 5 Wire Saddles [3], and disconnect the 3 connectors [4].
F-4-134
[1]
[4]
[2]
x2
x4
x2
[3]
[3]
[4]
F-4-135
4-59
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Neat Stack Unit (Lower) > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Stapler > Procedure
4-60
3) Remove the 4 screws [1], and remove the Neat Stack Unit (Lower) [2].
Removing the Stapler
• 2 Pins [3]
[3]
■■Preparation
x4 2) Remove the Inner Cover (Upper).(Refer to page 4-22)
3) Remove the Inner Cover (Lower).(Refer to page 4-23)
[3] ■■Procedure
CAUTION:
[2]
When replacing or installing/removing the Stapler, be sure to perform the following
[1] adjustment.
• Adjusting the Stapler Position (Refer to page 4-61)
F-4-136
1) Remove the Switch PCB Unit [1].
CAUTION: • 2 Screws [2]
When putting down the Neat Stack Unit (Lower), be sure to place the unit with the 2
• 1 Connector [4]
Alignment Plates [1] facing up.
[5]
[1]
x2
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[1]
F-4-138
F-4-137
4-60
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Stapler > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Adjusting Position of Stapler
4-61
2) Push in the Stapler [1] until it faces the direction as shown in the figure below.
Adjusting Position of Stapler
This adjustment is executed when replacing or installing/removing the Stapler in the
[1]
Intermediate Process Tray Assembly.
Adjusting method is as follows:
1) Put a marking [1] on the position of the stapler installed before replacing it.
2) Install the new stapler [2] with the marking position [1] aligned, and then secures the stapler
[2] with the 2 screws [3].
F-4-139
3) Remove the Stapler [1].
• 2 Connectors [2] [1]
• 2 Screws [3]
CAUTION:
Be sure to check the positioning index [4] before removing the Stapler.
[3] [2]
F-4-141
[1]
[4]
[3] [2]
F-4-140
4-61
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Adjusting Position of Stapler
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Process Tray Unit > Procedure
4-62
Removing the Process Tray Unit CAUTION:
■■Preparation • When removing the Process Tray Unit, hold the 2 grips [1] of the frame, and release
the 2 hooks [2] from the 2 holes of the frame on the host machine side.
2) Remove the Stack Wall (Upper).(Refer to page 4-27) [2] [2]
■■Procedure
1) While supporting the Tray B [1], insert a screwdriver into the hole [A] on the tray's
undersurface to release the block [2] in the direction of [B], and lower the Tray B [1] to the
position as shown in the figure below.
[2] [A]
[1]
[B]
F-4-143
[1]
F-4-142
4-62
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Process Tray Unit > Procedure
4-63
2) Remove the Process Tray Unit [1].
CAUTION:
• After removing it, be sure to place the unit with the 4 protrusions [1] of the frame • 4 Screws [3]
facing down.
• Be careful not to trap the harness [2] when putting it down.
[1] x9
[1]
x4
[2]
[1]
F-4-146
CAUTION: Points to Note at Installation

F-4-144
1.Hold the 2 grips [1] of the frame, and hook the 2 hooks [2] on the 2 holes of the frame
on the host machine side.
[2] [2]
[2]
F-4-145
[1]
F-4-147
4-63
4
4-64
2. Remove the Inner Cover (Lower) [1]. 4.Visually check that the 2 Process Bin Levers [1] have not gotten under the 2 Trailing
• 2 Screws [2] Edge Guide Levers [2] on the finisher side. When the Process Bin Levers are under
the Guide Levers, be sure to install the Process Tray Unit again.
[1]
x2
[2]
F-4-148
3.Turn the dial [1] to move the Stapler [2] until it hits the rear side.
[2] [2]
[2]
[1]
[1] [1]
F-4-150
F-4-149
4-64
4
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the paddle > Procedure
4-65
Removing the Paddle Unit Removing the paddle
1) Remove the Stack Wall (Lower).(Refer to page 4-29) 1) Remove the Stack Wall (Lower).(Refer to page 4-29)
2) Remove the Stack Wall (Upper).(Refer to page 4-27) 2) Remove the Stack Wall (Upper).(Refer to page 4-27)
3) Remove the Neat Stack Unit (Lower).(Refer to page 4-59) 3) Remove the Neat Stack Unit (Lower).(Refer to page 4-59)
4) Remove the Process Tray Unit.(Refer to page 4-62) 4) Remove the Process Tray Unit.(Refer to page 4-62)
■■Procedure 5) Remove the Paddle Unit.(Refer to page 4-65)
1) Turn the Paddle Shaft [1] until it can be accessed to the screw, and remove the 2 Paddle
■■Procedure
Units [2]. 1) Release the 2 claws [1] to remove the Paddle Retainer Block [2], and remove the paddle [3].
• 3 Screws [3]
[2]
[2]
[1]
x2
[1]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[1]
F-4-152
F-4-151
4-65
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the paddle > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Stack Delivery Upper Roller > Procedure
4-66
Removing the Stack Delivery Upper Roller 3) Remove the Swing Guide [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
■■Preparation
1) Remove the Stack Wall (Lower).(Refer to page 4-29) [1]
x2
4) Remove the Process Tray Unit.(Refer to page 4-62) [2]
■■Procedure
1) Remove the 2 Tension Springs [1].
[1]
[1] F-4-155
4) Remove one side of the belt [1] from the pulley [2].
• 1 E-ring [3]
• 1 Belt Retainer [4]
[3]
[4]
F-4-153
2) Turn the Process Tray Unit [2] upright with the Front Plate [1] side down.
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1] F-4-156
F-4-154
4-66
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Stack Delivery Upper Roller > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Stack Delivery Upper Roller > Procedure
4-67
5) Remove the E-ring [1], and slide the bearing [2] downward. 8) Remove the Stack Delivery Roller Shaft Unit [1] from the Shaft Support [B].
6) Release the arm [3] to the left, and remove the belt [4]. • 1 Parallel Pin [2]
• 1 Pulley [3]
• 1 Belt Retainer [4]
• 2 Bearings [5]
• 1 Washer [6]
[3]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[2] [4]
[3]
[1]
[4] [1] [5]
[5]
[4] [6]
[6]
F-4-157
[5] [5]
[B]
7) Slide the bearing [1] and the washer [2] upward, and move the Stack Delivery Roller Shaft
Unit [3] from the Shaft Support [A]. [1]
• 1 E-ring [4]
F-4-159
9) Remove the E-ring [2] and the bearing [3] from the Stack Delivery Roller [1].
[3]
[4] [1]
[2]
[A]
[1]
[3]
F-4-158 [2]
F-4-160
4-67
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Stack Delivery Upper Roller > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Process Tray (Front) > Procedure
4-68
Removing the Process Tray (Front) 2) Remove the Process Tray (Front) [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
■■Preparation • 1 Protrusion [3]

3) Remove the Neat Stack Unit (Lower).(Refer to page 4-59) x2
4) Remove the Process Tray Unit.(Refer to page 4-62)
■■Procedure
1) Remove the Process Tray Alignment Plate (Front) [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
• 1 Claw [3]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1] F-4-162
[3]
[2]
F-4-161
4-68
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Process Tray (Front) > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Process Tray (Rear) > Procedure
4-69
Removing the Process Tray (Rear) 2) Remove the Process Tray (Rear) [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
■■Preparation • 1 Protrusion [3]

■■Procedure
1) Remove the Process Tray Alignment Plate (Rear) [1].
• 1 Screw [2] [2]
• 1 Claw [3]
[1]
[1] [3] [2]

[3] F-4-164
[2]
F-4-163
4-69
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Process Tray (Rear) > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Feed Belt > Procedure
4-70
Removing the Feed Belt 2) Loosen the screw [1] to move the Coupling (Rear) [2] to the left.
■■Preparation
■■Procedure
1) Remove the guide [1].
• 1 Screw [2] [1]
[2]
F-4-166
3) Turn the Coupling (Front) [1] so that the screw comes in front, and then loosen the screw [2]
to move the Coupling (Front) [1] to the right.
[1]
[2]
F-4-165
[1] [2]
F-4-167
4-70
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Feed Belt > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Feed Belt > Procedure
4-71
4) Move the Feed Belt Release Unit [1] to the rear. 6) While releasing the Belt Roller Unit [1], remove the Feed Belt [2] by putting it between the
couplings [3].
[1]
[1]
[3]
F-4-168 [2] [3] [2]
5) Release the 2 Roller Guides [1], and remove the 2 rollers [2] and the 2 belts [3].
F-4-170
• 2 Shafts [4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
F-4-169
4-71
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Feed Belt > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Process Tray Plate Unit > Procedure
4-72
Removing the Stack Delivery Motor Removing the Process Tray Plate Unit
1) Remove the Stack Wall (Lower).(Refer to page 4-29) 1) Remove the Stack Wall (Lower).(Refer to page 4-29)
2) Remove the Stack Wall (Upper).(Refer to page 4-27) 2) Remove the Stack Wall (Upper).(Refer to page 4-27)
3) Remove the Neat Stack Unit (Lower).(Refer to page 4-59) 3) Remove the Neat Stack Unit (Lower).(Refer to page 4-59)
4) Remove the Process Tray Unit.(Refer to page 4-62) 4) Remove the Process Tray Unit.(Refer to page 4-62)
■■Procedure ■■Procedure
1) Loosen the screw [1] to remove the Stack Delivery Motor [2]. 1) Free the harness from the 3 Wire Saddles [1], and disconnect the connector [3].
• 1 Connector [3]
• 2 Screws [4]
• 1 Belt [5]
x3
[2] [1] [1]

[5]
[3]
[1]
x2 [2]
[3]
[4]
F-4-172
[4]
F-4-171
4-72
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Process Tray Plate Unit > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Front Alignment Motor > Procedure
4-73
2) Free the cable [2] from the 2 Wire Saddles, and disconnect the connector [3].
Removing the Front Alignment Motor
■■Preparation
x2
[2] 5) Remove the Process Tray (Front).(Refer to page 4-68)
6) Remove the Stack Delivery Motor.(Refer to page 4-72)
[1] 7) Remove the Process Tray Plate Unit.(Refer to page 4-72)
■■Procedure
[3] [1]
CAUTION:
F-4-173
3) Remove the Process Tray Plate Unit [1]. When replacing or installing/removing the Front Alignment Motor, be sure to perform the
• 6 Screws [2] following adjustment.
• 2 Positioning Plates [3] • Adjusting Right Angle of the Alignment Plate (Refer to page 4-77)
• Adjusting the Alignment Plate Width (Refer to page 5-27)
[1]
x3
[2]
[3]
[2]
x3
[3]
[2]
[2]
F-4-174
4-73
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Front Alignment Motor > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Front Alignment Motor > Procedure
4-74
1) Remove the belt [1].
CAUTION: When placing the Process Upper Tray [1] on a paper stack [2], be sure to
note the following points. • 1 Pulley [3]
• Place the Process Upper Tray [1] and a paper stack [2] horizontal to the floor.
• Be sure to keep the clearance [A] between the 2 Process Bins [3] and surface of the
• 1 Pulley [6]
floor when placing it.
3) Put a stack of paper [7] to place the Process Upper Tray [8].
[3]
[8]
[4] [6]
[3] [5]
[7]
[2]
[A]
[2] [3]
[2]
[1] [1]
F-4-175
F-4-176
4) Remove the motor [1].
• 1 Connector [3]
• 2 Screws [4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
x2
[4]
F-4-177
4-74
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Front Alignment Motor > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Rear Alignment Motor > Procedure
4-75
5) Remove the Front Alignment Motor [1].
Removing the Rear Alignment Motor
• 1 Connector [3] ■■Preparation
• 2 Screws [4]
[3] [4] 3) Remove the Neat Stack Unit (Lower).(Refer to page 4-59)
5) Remove the Process Tray (Front).(Refer to page 4-68)
6) Remove the Stack Delivery Motor.(Refer to page 4-72)
[2] 7) Remove the Process Tray Plate Unit.(Refer to page 4-72)
[1]
■■Procedure
x2 CAUTION:
When replacing or installing/removing the Rear Alignment Motor, be sure to perform the
following adjustment.
F-4-178 • Adjusting Right Angle of the Alignment Plate (Refer to page 4-77)
• Adjusting the Alignment Plate Width (Refer to page 5-27)
4-75
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Rear Alignment Motor > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Rear Alignment Motor > Procedure
4-76
3) Remove the Rear Alignment Motor [1].
CAUTION: When placing the Process Upper Tray [1] on a paper stack [2], be sure to
note the following points. • 1 Connector [3]
• 2 Screws [4]
• Place the Process Upper Tray [1] and a paper stack [2] horizontal to the floor.
• Be sure to keep the clearance [A] between the 2 Process Bins [3] and surface of the [2]
floor when placing it. [4]
[3]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[3] [1]
x2
[A]
[2] F-4-181
[2]
F-4-179

• 1 Pulley [3]
2) Put a stack of paper [4] to place the Process Upper Tray [5].
[3]
[1]
[2]
[5]
[4]
F-4-180
4-76
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Rear Alignment Motor > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Right Angle Adjustment of Alignment Plate
4-77
Right Angle Adjustment of Alignment Plate 3) After setting A4 paper [1] in the arrow direction of the intermediate tray assembly, make
adjustment so that there is no gap between the paper edge
This adjustment is executed when replacing or installing/removing the Alignment Motor in the
[1] and the alignment plate [2], and then secure the alignment plate with
Intermediate Process Tray Assembly or when replacing the Finisher Controller PCB.
the screw [3].
[3]
1) After installing the intermediate process tray assembly, loosen the 2 screws [2] on the
alignment plate [1] in the intermediate process tray assembly.
[1]
[2] [1] [2]

F-4-182
2) Secure the 2 paper edge stoppers [1] with the 2 screws [2].
[2] [2]
[C] [1] [1]
F-4-184
[2]
[1]
F-4-183
4-77
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Right Angle Adjustment of Alignment Plate
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Process Upper Guide Unit > Procedure
4-78
Removing the Process Upper Guide Unit 2) Remove the 2 screws [1] of the Front Plate.
3) Remove the 2 screws [1] of the Rear Plate.
■■Preparation
■■Procedure
1) Free the 2 harnesses [1].
[2]
x2
[4]
[1]
[1]
[1] [4]
[4]
x2 F-4-186
x4
[3] [2]
F-4-185
4-78
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Process Upper Guide Unit > Procedure
4-79
4) Free the 2 belts [2] from the 2 pulleys [1], and hold the handle [3] to remove the Process
CAUTION:
Upper Guide Unit [4].
• Avoid deformation of the 2 Process Upper Guides [1] and the 4 Paper Guides [2]. • 2 Support Pins [5]
• Put the removed Process Upper Guide Units [3] with the Belt Controller Unit [4] side
[1]
up. Place a stack of paper (approx. 2 cm thick) or cardboards [6] under the handle [5] [2]
to make it stabilized.
[1] [2]
[3]
[3]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[5]
[6] [4] [5]
[2] [5]
F-4-187
F-4-188
4-79
4
4-80
CAUTION: 2) Put the shaft [1] of the Process Upper Guide Unit into the hole [A] of the Finisher
Front Plate.
When installing the Process Upper Guide Unit [1], be sure to align the positions as
shown below. 3) Move the pulley [2] of the Process Upper Guide Unit to the opening [B] of the
Finisher Rear Plate. Be careful not to hit the pulley [2] with peripheral parts.
1) Hold the handle [2] and the Support Pin Base [B] so that the surface of the guide [A]
of the Process Upper Guide Unit [1] is at right angle.
[A]
[A]
[1]
[1]
[B]
[2]
[2]
[B]
F-4-189
F-4-190
4-80
4
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Belt Controller Unit > Procedure
4-81
4) Fit the 2 Support Pins [1] of the Process Upper Guide Unit to the 2 grooves [A] of Removing the Belt Controller Unit
the finisher.
■■Preparation
[1]
[1] 4) Remove the Process Tray Unit.(Refer to page 4-62)
8) Remove the Process Upper Guide Unit.(Refer to page 4-78)
[A]
■■Procedure
[A]
CAUTION:
F-4-191 • Avoid deformation of the 2 Process Upper Guides [1] and the 4 Paper Guides [2].
up. Place a stack of paper (approx. 2 cm thick) or cardboards [6] under the handle [5]
to make it stabilized.
[1]
[3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[6] [4]
[2] [5]
F-4-192
4-81
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Belt Controller Unit > Procedure
4-82
1) Slide the Belt Variable Lever [1] in the release direction until it stops. 3) Return the Belt Variable Lever [1] in the direction to be engaged, and remove the following
parts.
[1] • 2 E-rings [2]
• 1 Shaft [3]
• 1 Pulley [4]
4) Remove the following parts.
• 2 E-rings [5]
• 2 Bushings [6]
F-4-193
2) Release the 2 Roller Guides [1], and remove the 2 Rollers [2] and the 2 belts [3]. [4] [2]
[6] [5]
• 2 Shafts [4]
[3] [1]
[1]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[5] [6] [3]
[2] F-4-195
[4]
F-4-194
4-82
4
4-83
5) Remove the Belt Controller Unit [1].
1) Hook the belt [2] of the Process Upper Guide Unit on the pulley [1] of the Belt
Controller Unit, and then temporarily tighten the 2 screws [3].
• 2 Screws [3]
• 1 Belt [4] At this time, the position should be such that the belt [4] can be correctly hooked on
the pulley [5].
[3]
x2 [2]
[4]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2] [2]
F-4-196
CAUTION: x2
When installing the Belt Controller Unit, be sure to align the slope angles [A] of the
guide surface of the Guide Lever (Front) [1] and the guide surface of the Guide Lever
(Rear) [2].The following shows the checking procedure.
[1]
[A]
[2]
[3]
F-4-198
F-4-197
4-83
4
4-84
2) Turn the gear [1] in the direction of the arrow until it stops, and push in the Guide 6) Check that the slope angles [A] of the guide surface of the Guide Lever (Front) [1]
(Front) [2] to the front until it stops. and the guide surface of the Guide Lever (Rear) [2] are the same.
• [A] is at the same angle: Fully tighten the 2 Fixation Screws of the Belt Controller Unit,
[2] and install the removed parts in reverse order.
• [A] is at a different angle: Remove the Belt Controller Unit, and align the slope angles
of the guide surfaces again.
[1]
[A]
[2]
[1]
F-4-199
3) Slide the Belt Variable Lever [1] in the direction to be engaged.

4) While pushing in the Guide Lever (Rear) [2] to the front, fit the belt-attached [3] pulley
[4] to the hole [A] of the shaft.
5) Fit the cut surface [B] of the shaft with the cut surface [C] of the shaft hole to install F-4-201
the shaft [5].
[C]
[2] [B]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[A]
[1]
F-4-200
4-84
4
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Belt Roller > Procedure
4-85
Removing the Belt Roller 1) Remove the 2 Delivery Guides (Lower) [1] and the 2 Lower Delivery Guides [2].
• 8 Claws [3]
■■Preparation [3]
[3]
8) Remove the Process Upper Guide Unit.(Refer to page 4-78)
■■Procedure [1]
[2]
CAUTION:
• Avoid deformation of the 2 Process Upper Guides [1] and the 4 Paper Guides [2]. [2]
up. Place a stack of paper (approx. 2 cm thick) or cardboards [6] under the handle [5] [1]
to make it stabilized. F-4-203
2) Remove the 2 Belt Rollers [1] and the 2 Delivery Roller Shafts [2].
[1]
[3]
[3]
CAUTION:
[1]
Be careful when installing/removing the 2 Delivery Roller Shafts [2] because they can
fall.
[2]
[6] [4]
[2] [5]
[1]
F-4-202
[2]
F-4-204
4-85
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Intermediate Process Tray Assembly > Removing the Belt Roller > Procedure
4-86
3) Remove the following parts.
CAUTION:
• 1 E-ring [1]
When installing the Delivery Roller Shaft [1], fit the 2 cut surfaces [A] in the groove of • 1 Washer [2]
the Mounting Plate with the 2 cut surfaces [B] of the Delivery Roller Shaft. • 1 Bearing [3]
[1]
[1] [B]
[B]
[A]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[A]
F-4-206
4) Slide the 2 couplings [1].
• 2 Screws [2] (to loosen)
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-4-205
F-4-207
4-86
4
4-87
Removing the Belt Roller on the front side 8) Move the gear [1], and remove the Parallel Pin [2].
5) While releasing the Belt Roller Unit [1], slide the bearing [2] from the Support Plate [3].
[2]
6) Remove the Belt Roller [5] from the Delivery Roller Shaft [4].
[1]
[2] [4]
[3] [5]
[4]
F-4-210
[1]
9) Remove the E-ring [1] and slide the bearing [2].
F-4-208 [1]
Removing the Belt Roller on the rear side
7) Remove the E-ring [1].
[2]
F-4-211
[1]
F-4-209
4-87
4
4-88
10) While releasing the Belt Roller Unit [1], slide the bearing [2] from the Support Plate [3].
11) Remove the Belt Roller [5] from the Delivery Roller Shaft [4].
[2] [3] [5]

[4] [4]
[1]
F-4-212
4-88
4
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Saddle Stitcher Assembly > Removing the Saddle Inner Cover (Lower) > Procedure
4-89
Saddle Stitcher Assembly Removing the Saddle Inner Cover (Lower)

■■Preparation
Removing the Saddle Inner Cover (Upper)
■■Preparation ■■Procedure
1) Open the Front Cover. 1) Remove the Saddle Inner Cover (Lower) [1].
■■Procedure • 1 Knob [2]
• 4 Screws [3]
1) Remove the Saddle Inner Cover (Upper) [1].
• 1 Knob [2]
• 2 Screws [3]
x4
[1]
[2]
x2 [2]
[3]
[3]
[1] [3]
[3]
F-4-214
F-4-213
4-89
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Saddle Stitcher Assembly > Removing the Saddle Inner Cover (Lower) > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Saddle Stitcher Assembly > Removing the Saddle Inlet Roller Static Eliminator > Procedure
4-90
Removing the Saddle Inlet Roller Static Eliminator 2) Remove the Saddle Inlet Guide [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
2) Pull out the Saddle Unit.
■■Procedure
1) Move the grip [1] in the direction of the arrow to open the Saddle Stack Guide Assembly [2].
[2]
[2]
F-4-216
3) Remove the 2 Saddle Inlet Roller Static Eliminators [1].
[1]
[1]
F-4-215
F-4-217
4-90
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Saddle Stitcher Assembly > Removing the Saddle Inlet Roller Static Eliminator > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Saddle Stitcher Assembly > Removing the Saddle Stapler > Procedure
4-91
Removing the Saddle Intermediate Static Eliminator Removing the Saddle Stapler
1) Open the Front Cover. 1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Pull out the Saddle Unit. 2) Pull out the Saddle Unit.
CAUTION:
[2]
When replacing or installing/removing the Saddle Stapler, be sure to perform the
following adjustment.
• Adjusting the Saddle Staple Alignment (Refer to page 5-63)
[2]
[1]
F-4-218
2) Remove the Saddle Intermediate Static Eliminator [1].
[1]
[1]
F-4-220
F-4-219
4-91
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Saddle Stitcher Assembly > Removing the Saddle Stapler > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Saddle Stitcher Assembly > Removing the Feed Guide Lower Static Eliminator > Procedure
4-92
2) Remove the Harness Cover [1].
Removing the Feed Guide Lower Static Eliminator
• 2 Screws [2]
[2]
■■Preparation
x2 2) Pull out the Saddle Unit.
[1] 3) Remove the Saddle Stapler.(Refer to page 4-91)
■■Procedure
1) Remove the 3 Feed Guide Lower Static Eliminators [1].
[1]
[2]
F-4-221
3) Remove the Saddle Stapler[1].
• 1 Connector [2]
• 2 Screws [3]
[2] [1]
F-4-223
[3]
F-4-222
4-92
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Saddle Stitcher Assembly > Removing the Feed Guide Lower Static Eliminator > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Saddle Stitcher Assembly > Removing the Disengagement Roller > Procedure
4-93
Removing the Disengagement Roller 2) Remove the Resin Ring [1] and the Belt Retainer [2] on the rear side of the Saddle
Assembly.
■■Preparation
3) Remove the Saddle Stapler.(Refer to page 4-91)
4) Remove the Saddle Inner Cover (Lower).(Refer to page 4-89)
■■Procedure
1) Remove the Resin Ring [1] and the bearing [2].
[2]
[1]
F-4-225
3) Remove the belt [1] from the pulley [2].
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-4-224
F-4-226
4-93
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Saddle Stitcher Assembly > Removing the Disengagement Roller > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Saddle Stitcher Assembly > Removing the Disengagement Roller > Procedure
4-94
4) Move the Disengagement Roller Shaft [1] to remove the front side of the shaft [2].
[1]
[2]
F-4-227
5) Remove the Disengagement Roller (Front) [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
[2] [1]
F-4-228
6) Follow the same steps as the Disengagement Roller (Front) to remove the Disengagement
Roller (Rear).
4-94
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Saddle Stitcher Assembly > Removing the Disengagement Roller > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Saddle Stitcher Assembly > Removing the Thrust Unit > Procedure
4-95
Removing the Thrust Unit 2) Free the harness [1] from the Harness Guide [2].
■■Preparation [1] [3] [2] [3]
■■Procedure
1) Remove the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB Cover [1].
• 6 Screws [2] [3]
[1]
[3] [3]
F-4-230
[2]
[2]
F-4-229
4-95
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Saddle Stitcher Assembly > Removing the Thrust Unit > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Saddle Stitcher Assembly > Removing the Thrust Unit > Procedure
4-96
3) Free the 2 harnesses. 5) Remove the Thrust Unit [1].
• 2 Connectors [1] • 4 Screws [2]
• 3 Wire Saddles [2] • 2 Hooks [3]
• 3 Edge Saddles [3]
[1]
[3]
[3] [2] [2]
[1]
[2] [2]
[3]
[2]
[3]
F-4-233
F-4-231
4) Free the harness.
• 1 Connector [2]
[2]
[1]
F-4-232
4-96
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Saddle Stitcher Assembly > Removing the Thrust Unit > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Saddle Stitcher Assembly > Removing the Push-on Plate > Procedure
4-97
Removing the Push-on Plate 2) Be sure to mark the current 2 positions [1] of the Thrust Plate (where the engraved marking
and the outer line of the Thrust Plate are overlapped).
■■Preparation
4) Remove the Thrust Unit.(Refer to page 4-95)
[1] [1]
■■Procedure
1) Turn the gear [1] in the direction of the arrow so that the Thrust Plate [2] is at the most-
protruded position [A].
[A]
F-4-235
3) Remove the Thrust Plate [1].
[2]
• 3 Screws [2]
• 1 Thrust Plate Fixation Plate [3]
[1] [3]
[1]
F-4-234
[2]
F-4-236
4) When installing a new Thrust Plate, secure it by fitting with the marked positions in step 2.
4-97
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Saddle Stitcher Assembly > Removing the Push-on Plate > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Saddle Stitcher Assembly > Removing the Positioning Plate Unit > Procedure
4-98
Removing the Positioning Plate Unit 2) Remove the Positioning Plate Unit [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
■■Preparation
4) Remove the Thrust Unit.(Refer to page 4-95)
■■Procedure
1) Free the harness [1]
• 1 Reuse Band [4] [2] [1] [2]
F-4-238
[3] [2] [3] [2]
x4
[3]
x8
[4] [2] [5] [1]
F-4-237
4-98
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Saddle Stitcher Assembly > Removing the Positioning Plate Unit > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Saddle Stitcher Assembly > Pulling out the Saddle Unit (service position) > Procedure
4-99
Pulling out the Saddle Unit (service position) 3) Release the Rail Stopper [1], and pull out the Saddle Unit by approx. 5 cm.
■■Preparation
■■Procedure
1) Pull out the Saddle Unit [1] by approx. 20 cm.
[1]
F-4-241
4) Remove the Harness Guide [1], and pull out the Saddle Unit until it stops.
• 1 Screw [3]
[1]
F-4-239
2) Pull out the Auxiliary Caster [1] in the direction of the arrow [A], and pull out the Saddle Unit
in the direction of the arrow [B]. [1]
[2]
[3]
F-4-242
[B] [A] [1]
F-4-240
4-99
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Saddle Stitcher Assembly > Pulling out the Saddle Unit (service position) > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Saddle Stitcher Assembly > Removing the Saddle Inlet Static Eliminator > Procedure
4-100
Removing the Saddle Inlet Static Eliminator 2) Remove the Saddle Inlet Static Eliminator [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
2) Pull out the Saddle Unit. (service position)(Refer to page 4-99) [2]
■■Procedure
1) Remove the Static Eliminator Cover [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
[1]
[2]
F-4-244
F-4-243
4-100
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Saddle Stitcher Assembly > Removing the Saddle Inlet Static Eliminator > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Saddle Stitcher Assembly > Removing the Saddle Unit > Procedure
4-101
Removing the Saddle Unit 3) Remove the 3 screws [1].
■■Preparation
2) Pull out the Saddle Unit. (service position)(Refer to page 4-99)
■■Procedure
1) Store the Saddle Unit to the position where the screw [1] can be seen from the hole [2], and
remove the screw [1] and the screw [3].
[2] [1] [1]

[1]
[3] F-4-247
4) Hold the Saddle Unit [1] as shown in the figure, remove it in the direction of the arrow, and
then carry it after checking that it is removed from the rail.
[1]
F-4-245
2) Store the rail [1].
[1]
[1]
F-4-248
F-4-246
4-101
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Saddle Stitcher Assembly > Removing the Saddle Unit > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Saddle Stitcher Assembly > Removing the Press Unit > Procedure
4-102
CAUTION: Removing the Press Unit

When installing the Saddle Unit, adjust the positions by the following steps so that the ■■Preparation
Rail Pins are fitted into the grooves of the Saddle Unit.
1) At the rear side of the Saddle Unit, fit the side surface [A] of the Connector Base of 2) Pull out the Saddle Unit. (service position)(Refer to page 4-99)
the Saddle Unit with the side surface [B] of the rail on the right.
2) At the front side of the Saddle Unit, fit the back side [C] of the Saddle Inner Cover
■■Procedure
(Lower) with the surface [D] of the Rail Unit.
1) Remove the Roller Fixation Plate (Front) [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
[C]
[A]
[D]
[1]
[B]
F-4-249
3) Fit the 4 Rail Pins [1] into the 4 grooves [A] of the Saddle Unit.
[2]
F-4-251
[A]
[1]
F-4-250
4-102
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Saddle Stitcher Assembly > Removing the Press Unit > Procedure
4-103
2) Free the harness. 3) Remove the 2 Positioning Pins [1].
[1]
[2] [1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-4-252
[2]
F-4-253
[1]
F-4-254
4-103
4
4-104
5) Remove the Roller Fixation Plate (Rear) [1]. 7) Remove the 2 Positioning Pins [1].
• 2 Screws [2] • 2 Screws [2]
[1]
[1]
x2
[2]
F-4-255 [2]
[1]
[2]
F-4-257
8) Remove the Press Unit [1].
[3]
[4] • 2 Hooks [2]
[2]
[2] [1]
F-4-256
[1]
F-4-258
4-104
4
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Saddle Stitcher Assembly > Removing the Press Roller Unit > Procedure
4-105
Removing the Press Roller Unit 2) Remove the Delivery Guide (Upper) [1].
• 4 Screws [2]
4) Remove the Press Unit.(Refer to page 4-102)
[1]
■■Procedure
1) Turn the knob [1] in the direction of the arrow to move the Press Roller Unit [2] to the
center. [2]
F-4-260
3) Remove the Handle Cover [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
[1] [2]
F-4-259
[2]
[1]
F-4-261
4-105
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Saddle Stitcher Assembly > Removing the Press Roller Unit > Procedure
4-106
4) Remove the Handle Unit [1]. 6) Remove the Belt Support Plate [1].
• 4 Screws [2] • 1 Screw [2]
[2]
[1]
[1] [2]
F-4-264
7) Remove the Slide Shaft (Lower) [1].
[2]
• 1 E-ring [2]
F-4-262
5) Remove the Delivery Guide (Lower) [1].
[1]
• 4 Screws [2]
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-4-265
[2]
F-4-263
4-106
4
4-107
9) Remove the Slide Shaft (Upper) [2] from the Press Roller Unit [1].
CAUTION:
When installing the Slide Shaft (Lower), make sure that the hole [1] of the Press Roller
Unit Cover and the hole [2] of the knob are overlapped while the Press Roller Unit is at
[2]
the rear end.
[1] [2]
[1]
F-4-268
F-4-266
8) Move the Slide Shaft (Upper) [1], and remove the Press Roller Unit [2].
[1]
[2]
F-4-267
4-107
4
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Saddle Stitcher Assembly > Removing the Fold Roller > Procedure
4-108
Removing the Fold Roller 2) Remove the Unit Fixation Base (Front) [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
■■Procedure
1) Hold the grip [1], and open the Feed Roller Guide [2] to remove it.
• 1 Screw [3]
[3]
[2]
[2] F-4-270
[1]
F-4-269
4-108
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Saddle Stitcher Assembly > Removing the Fold Roller > Procedure
4-109
3) Remove the Tension Arm Plate [1]. 5) Remove the Belt Retainer [1], the belt [2] and the pulley [3].
• 1 Spring [2]
[3] [1]
[1] [2]
[2]
F-4-273
F-4-271
6) Remove the C-ring [1], the gear [2], the bearing [3] and the plate [4].
4) Remove the Roller Arm Plate [1]. [4]
• 1 E-ring [2]
• 2 Screws [3]
• 1 Spring [4]
[3]
[1] [2]
[1]
[3]
F-4-274
[4]
[2]
F-4-272
4-109
4
4-110
7) Remove the Unit Fixation Base (Rear) [1] at the rear side of the Saddle Unit. 9) Slide the Fold Roller (Upper) [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-4-275
F-4-277
8) Remove the C-ring [1] and the Ball Bearing [2].
10) Remove the Fold Roller (Upper) [1].
[1] [2]
F-4-276 [1]
F-4-278
4-110
4
4-111
11) Remove the C-ring [1] and the gear [2]. 13) Insert the shaft [1] on the front side of the Fold Roller (Lower) into the upper hole.
[1]
F-4-281
14) Remove the Fold Roller (Lower) [1].
[2]
[1]
F-4-279
12) Remove the C-ring [1] and the bearing [2] at the rear side of the Saddle Unit.
[1]
[1]
F-4-282
[2]
F-4-280
4-111
4
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Saddle Stitcher Assembly > Removing the Alignment Roller Unit > Procedure
4-112
Removing the Alignment Roller Unit 2) Remove the Alignment Roller Unit [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
■■Preparation • 2 Hooks [3]
1) Open the Front Cover. [2] [1]

■■Procedure
1) Disconnect the connector [1].
[3]
F-4-284
[1]
F-4-283
4-112
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Saddle Stitcher Assembly > Removing the Alignment Roller Unit > Procedure
4 Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Saddle Stitcher Assembly > Removing the Saddle Alignment Motor > Procedure
4-113
Removing the Alignment Roller Removing the Saddle Alignment Motor
1) Open the Front Cover 1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Pull out the Saddle Unit. (service position)(Refer to page 4-99) 2) Pull out the Saddle Unit. (service position)(Refer to page 4-99)
3) Remove the Saddle Inner Cover (Lower).(Refer to page 4-89) 3) Remove the Saddle Inner Cover (Lower).(Refer to page 4-89)
4) Remove the Press Unit.(Refer to page 4-102) 4) Remove the Press Unit.(Refer to page 4-102)
5) Remove the Alignment Roller Unit.(Refer to page 4-112) 5) Remove the Alignment Roller Unit.(Refer to page 4-112)
1) Remove the 4 Alignment Rollers [1]. 1) Remove the Saddle Alignment Motor [1].
• 4 Plastic Rings [2] • 2 Screws [2]
[2] [1]
• 1 Connector [4]
• 1 Belt [5]
[2] [2]
[1] [2] [1] [2]
[2] [4]
[5] [3]
F-4-285
F-4-286
4-113
4
Parts Replacing and Cleaning > Saddle Stitcher Assembly > Removing the Saddle Alignment Motor > Procedure
5 Adjustment
■
■Basic
■
Adjustment
■Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement
■
■Auxiliary Adjustment
5
Adjustment
5 Adjustment > Basic Adjustment > Outline
5-2
Basic Adjustment At the occurrence of the following symptoms or at adjustment timing, perform the appropriate
adjustment.
Outline Adjustment Type Symptom, adjustment timing Reference

Height Adjustment Jam with this equipment p. 5-3
Side Registration/Skew Shaky vibration on this equipment (due to large p. 5-6
CAUTION: Setting the Dip Switch
Adjustment operating level of the side registration unit) or large
If setting the Dip Switch, the Delivery Tray setting on the host machine side returns to skew
the default. Adjusting Sensor Light When installing the Finisher or replacing a sensor p. 5-10
Intensity
After setting the Dip Switch, it is necessary to execute the Delivery Tray setting on the
T-5-2
host machine side again.
Except for some items, the adjustment and setting can input from the both devices of the host
machine (service mode) and the finisher (Dip switch).
The input value is memorized in the EEPROM of finisher controller. Regardless of the input
device (host machine or finisher), the setting range and unit are same, and the final input
value is effective.
Bit setting of DSW1

Item in the finisher Service mode Range Default Reference
controller PCB
Bufferless Mode ON:1, 3, 8 SORTER> OPTION 0 to 4 0 p. 5-54
>BUFFSW
Adjustment in the Case ON:1, 3, 6, 7 SORTER>OPTION 0 to 2 0 p. 5-55
of Failure in Stacking >CURLSW
Performance of Tray
(upper curl)
Adjustment in the Case ON:1, 3, 6, 7 SORTER>OPTION 0 to 2 0 p. 5-57
of Failure in Stacking >CURLSW
Performance of Tray
(lower curl)
Adjustment in the Case ON:1, 3, 7 SORTER>OPTION 0 to 1 0 p. 5-59
of Failure in Stacking >TRYEJCT
Performance of Tray
(runon of paper when
using thin paper)
of Canceling Limit for >TRYOVER
Tray Stack
Setting of Pressless ON:1, 3, 4 SORTER>OPTION 0 to 3 0 p. 5-120
Mode >SDLPRS
T-5-1
5-2
5
Adjustment > Basic Adjustment > Outline
5 Adjustment > Basic Adjustment > Height Adjustment > Height adjustment
5-3
Height Adjustment 2) If the height difference is +/- 2mm or more, execute height adjustment.
In the case of jam with this equipment, follow the steps below to execute height adjustment. NOTE:
Use 4 casters [1] shown in the figure for height adjustment.
■■Checking the height

1) Check height between the finisher and the host machine. Check whether the height
difference between the upper right surface [1] of the finisher and the upper left surface [2]
of the host machine is within +/- 2mm. [1]
[1] [2]
[1]
F-5-2
■■Height adjustment
1) Separate the finisher from the host machine.
F-5-1
2) Remove the spanner [1] from the front cover.
• 1 screw [2]
[1]
[2]
F-5-3
5-3
5
Adjustment > Basic Adjustment > Height Adjustment > Height adjustment
5-4
3) In the case of saddle finisher, remove the saddle inner cover (lower) [1]. 4) Remove the 2 caster covers [1] at the left side. (the illustration shows in the case of the
• 1 screw [2] saddle finisher)
• 1 knob [3] • 2 screws [2]
• 3 screws [4]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[2] [3] [4] [1]

[2]
F-5-4
F-5-5
5) Measure height [A] from the floor (where the caster is landing) to the upper surface of the
bottom plate using a scale, and check that the height is within 86.3 +/- 0.3mm.
[A]
86.3 0.3mm
F-5-6
5-4
5
5-5
6) Loosen the caster's fixing nut [1] with the spanner (large) [2] in [A] direction. 7) Rotate the adjustment bolt [1] with the spanner (small) [2]. Adjust the height (that is
measured in step 6)) to be within 83.6 +/- 0.3mm.
[1]
• To raise the height: rotate in [A] direction
• To lower the height: rotate in [B] direction
(Amount of height change per rotation: approx. 1.75mm)
[1]
[A] [A]
[2]
F-5-7
[B]
CAUTION:
[2]
Insert the spanner [3] thru the opening under the saddle bottom plate [2], when
loosening the caster fixing nut [1] at the front side of the saddle finisher. F-5-9
8) Tighten the fixing nut [1] in [B] direction.

[1]
[1]
[B]
[3]
[2]
F-5-8
F-5-10
9) Adjust the other 3 casters as well (by repeating the steps above).
10) Connect the finisher with the host machine again and check the height.
Install the covers and other parts removed in the previous steps if the height difference is
within +/- 2mm. If not, repeat the steps above to readjust the height.
5-5
5
5 Adjustment > Basic Adjustment > Side Registration/Skew Adjustment > Checking adjustment value
5-6
Side Registration/Skew Adjustment 4) Remove the switch cover [1] of the inner cover (lower).
• 1 screw [2]
In the case of shaky vibration on this equipment (due to large operating level of the side
registration unit) or large skew, follow the steps below to execute adjustment for side
registration/skew.
[1]
■■Checking adjustment value
●● Preparations
1) Turn ON the power of the finisher.
2) Turn ON the power of the host machine to be on to be on standby.
[2]
3) Open the front cover and put the door switch tool into the door switch [1].
F-5-12
[1]
●● Procedure
1) Set DIP switch SW382 [1] on the switch PCB as shown in the figure (1, 4, 6, 8: ON), and
press ENTER (SW385) button [2], resulting in "0" blinks on the LED [3].
[1] [3]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
F-5-11
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[2]
F-5-13
2) Place a sheet of A4 or LTR paper and set in ADF or the copyboard mode.
And set "3" for copy count to execute printing.
5-6
5
Adjustment > Basic Adjustment > Side Registration/Skew Adjustment > Checking adjustment value
5 Adjustment > Basic Adjustment > Side Registration/Skew Adjustment > Side registration adjustment
5-7
3) The LED [1] displays the adjustment value for side registration/skew. ■■Side registration adjustment
Check each value. The display shows values in the order of "A" -> "side registration
adjustment value" -> "B" -> "skew adjustment value". 1) Separate the finisher from the host machine.
• Side registration adjustment range (estimated value); -3 to +3 mm (1 scale is 2) Loosen the 2 screws [2] on the positioning plate [1] at the right side.
equivalent to 1mm). 3) If the value obtained at "checking adjustment value" is "+ (positive)", move it in [A] direction
• Skew adjustment range (estimated value); -2 to +2 mm (1 scale is equivalent to 1mm). and tighten the screws [2].
[1] If the value obtained at "checking adjustment value" is "- (negative)", move it in [B] direction
and tighten the screws [2].
SW382 [2]
DSP381
[1]
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-14 [B] [A]

4) Press ENTER button to complete the adjustment mode.
If the adjustment value (estimated value) is within the range, set the DIP switch back and F-5-15
complete the adjustment. If the adjustment value (estimated value) is out of the range,
execute "2. Side registration adjustment" or "3. Skew adjustment".
5) Turn OFF the power switch of the host machine then the finisher.
5-7
5
Adjustment > Basic Adjustment > Side Registration/Skew Adjustment > Side registration adjustment
5 Adjustment > Basic Adjustment > Side Registration/Skew Adjustment > Skew adjustment
5-8
■■Skew adjustment 1) Lift the upper cover [1] in the arrow direction to remove the inner cover (upper) [2].
• 4 screws [3]
If the skew adjustment value is within the range, start from step 7).
[2] [1]
1) Push the 3 claws [1], and remove the 3 knobs [2].
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-5-16
CAUTION:
F-5-18
When the One-way Clutch [1] inside the knob is removed, be sure to install it in the 2) Remove the Latch Base Cover [1].
direction where the arrow marking of the One-way Clutch is visible. • 3 Screws [2]
[1]
[1]
F-5-17
[2]
F-5-19
5-8
5
Adjustment > Basic Adjustment > Side Registration/Skew Adjustment > Skew adjustment
5 Adjustment > Basic Adjustment > Side Registration/Skew Adjustment > Skew adjustment
5-9
3) Loosen the 2 screws [2] on the latch base (front) [1]. 6) If the value obtained at "checking adjustment value" is "+ (positive)", move it in [A] direction
4) If the value obtained at "checking adjustment value" is "+ (positive)", move it in [A] direction and tighten the screws [2].
and tighten the screws [2]. If the value obtained at "checking adjustment value" is "- (negative)", move it in [B] direction
If the value obtained at "checking adjustment value" is "- (negative)", move it in [B] direction and tighten the screws [2].
and tighten the screws [2].
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Perform adjustment so that the total of the shifting amount (scale) of the latch base (front/
Perform adjustment so that the total of the shifting amount (scale) of the latch base (front/ rear) is within -2 to +2 mm.
rear) is within -2 to +2 mm.
[1]
[2]
[A] [B]
[A] [B]
[2]
F-5-21
[1] 7) Connect the finisher with the host machine.

F-5-20 8) Turn ON the power switch of the host machine then the finisher.
5) Loosen the 2 screws [2] on the latch base (rear) [1]. 9) Check the adjustment value again.
If the adjustment value indicated on the LED is within the range, press
ENTER button to complete the adjustment mode.
If the adjustment value indicated on the LED is out of the range, execute adjustment for the
second time. Adjustment can be considered OK to complete if the value gets closer to the
adjustment range (estimated value).
10) Put the DIP switch setting back and install the removed covers/parts.
5-9
5
Adjustment > Basic Adjustment > Side Registration/Skew Adjustment > Skew adjustment
5 Adjustment > Basic Adjustment > Adjusting Sensor Light Intensity > Preparations
5-10
Adjusting Sensor Light Intensity CAUTION:
Execute this adjustment in the case of the following: • The Tray A/B [2] should be at least 100 mm below the lowermost hole ofthe Tray
• When installing the finisher Sensor (Front/Rear) [1].
• When replacing a sensor
• Do not place paper, etc. on the tray.
• When replacing the finisher controller PCB
Following shows the operating procedure: [1] [1]
■■Preparations
[2]
2) Turn ON the power of the host machine to be on to be on standby. [2]
3) Open the front cover and put the door switch tool into the door switch.
4) Put the screwdriver [2] into the hole [1] on the lower surface of the tray and slide it toward [A]
direction to release, and then move down tray A/B in [B] direction.
[1]
F-5-23
[A]
[B]
5) Remove the switch cover.
NOTE:
Refer to "Preparations" for details of step 1) to 3) and step 5).
[2]
F-5-22
5-10
5
Adjustment > Basic Adjustment > Adjusting Sensor Light Intensity > Preparations
5 Adjustment > Basic Adjustment > Adjusting Sensor Light Intensity > Procedure
5-11
■■Procedure 3) If the sensor is faulty (The LED indicates with blinking "0"), press + (SW384) [1]/ - (SW383)
[2] button to find the code number on the blinking LED [3], and then replace the faulty
1) Set DIP switch SW382 [1] on the switch PCB as shown in the figure (1: ON), and then sensor correspondingly.
press ENTER (SW385) button [2] to start adjustment for sensor light intensity.
[1] Code Number Sensor Name

1 Buffer path 1 sensor PCB (UN13)
SW382
DSP381
3 Lower path sensor PCB (UN22)
4 Side registration sensor PCB (UN12)
5 Punch waste full level sensor PCB (UN21)
SW381 6 to 8 Tray A paper surface sensor (UN16)
9, A, b Tray B paper surface sensor (UN18)
T-5-3
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[2]
F-5-24
2) Check that the LED [1] indicates with lighted "0". Press ENTER (SW385) button [2] to
complete adjustment for sensor light intensity.
[1]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[2]
F-5-25
5-11
5
Adjustment > Basic Adjustment > Adjusting Sensor Light Intensity > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Outline
5-12
Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement When replacing the parts shown below, perform the appropriate adjustment.
Adjustment Type Symptom, adjustment timing Reference

Outline Adjusting Sensor Light When replacing a sensor p. 5-14
Intensity
Adjusting Position of When replacing the Tray A/B Unit p. 5-16
CAUTION: Setting the Dip Switch Tray A, B
If setting the Dip Switch, the Delivery Tray setting on the host machine side returns to Adjusting the Alignment When replacing or installing/removing the Neat Stack p. 5-17
the default. Position of the Upper Unit (Upper) and the component parts of the unit
Neat Alignment Plate When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB
After setting the Dip Switch, it is necessary to execute the Delivery Tray setting on the Adjusting the Alignment When replacing or installing/removing the Neat Stack p. 5-19
host machine side again. Position of the Lower Unit (Lower) and the component parts of the unit
Neat Alignment Plate When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB
Adjusting the Height of When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB p. 5-22
Corrugation Roller for
Except for some items, the adjustment and setting can input from the both devices of the host Stack Delivery
machine (service mode) and the finisher (Dip switch). Right Angle Adjustment • When replacing the Front Alignment Motor p. 5-26
The input value is memorized in the EEPROM of finisher controller. Regardless of the input of Alignment Plate • When replacing the Rear Alignment Motor
Adjusting Alignment • When replacing the Front Alignment Motor p. 5-27
device (host machine or finisher), the setting range and unit are same, and the final input
Plate Position • When replacing the Rear Alignment Motor
value is effective. • When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB
Adjusting Position of When replacing the Stapler p. 5-29
Stapler
Bit setting of DSW1
Adjusting Staple When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB p. 5-30
Item in the finisher Service mode Range Default Reference Position (1-stapling at
controller PCB the rear)
Bufferless Mode ON:1, 3, 8 SORTER> OPTION 0 to 4 0 p. 5-54 Adjusting Staple p. 5-33
>BUFFSW Position (1-stapling at
Adjustment in the Case ON:1, 3, 6, 7 SORTER>OPTION 0 to 2 0 p. 5-55 the front)
of Failure in Stacking >CURLSW Adjusting Staple p. 5-36
Performance of Tray Position (2-stapling
(upper curl) positions)
Adjustment in the Case ON:1, 3, 6, 7 SORTER>OPTION 0 to 2 0 p. 5-57 Adjusting Delivery of p. 5-38
of Failure in Stacking >CURLSW Staple Stack (lower
Performance of Tray delivery)
(lower curl) Adjusting Delivery of p. 5-41
Adjustment in the Case ON:1, 3, 7 SORTER>OPTION 0 to 1 0 p. 5-59 Staple Stack (saddle
of Failure in Stacking >TRYEJCT delivery)
Performance of Tray Saddle Stitch/Fold p. 5-44
(runon of paper when Placement Adjustment
using thin paper)
of Canceling Limit for >TRYOVER
Tray Stack
Setting of Pressless ON:1, 3, 4 SORTER>OPTION 0 to 3 0 p. 5-120
Mode >SDLPRS
T-5-4
5-12
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Outline
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Outline
5-13
Adjustment Type Symptom, adjustment timing Reference
Adjusting Saddle When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB p. 5-48
Stitching Position
Adjusting Saddle p. 5-50
Folding Position
Adjusting Position of p. 5-51
Saddle Lead Edge
Stopper
Adjustment After p. 5-53
Replacing Finisher
Controller PCB
Bufferless Mode p. 5-54
Adjustment in the Case p. 5-55
of Failure in Stacking
Performance of Tray
(upper curl)
Performance of Tray
(lower curl)
Performance of Tray
(run-on of paper when
using thin paper)
of Canceling Limit for
Tray Stack
Adjusting Alignment for When replacing the Saddle Stapler p. 5-63
Saddle Stapling
T-5-5
5-13
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Outline
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting Sensor Light Intensity > Preparations
5-14
Adjusting Sensor Light Intensity CAUTION:
Execute this adjustment in the case of the following: • The Tray A/B [2] should be at least 100 mm below the lowermost hole ofthe Tray
• When installing the finisher Sensor (Front/Rear) [1].
• When replacing a sensor
• Do not place paper, etc. on the tray.
• When replacing the finisher controller PCB
Following shows the operating procedure: [1] [1]
■■Preparations
[2]
2) Turn ON the power of the host machine to be on to be on standby. [2]
4) Put the screwdriver [2] into the hole [1] on the lower surface of the tray and slide it toward [A]
direction to release, and then move down tray A/B in [B] direction.
[1]
F-5-27
[A]
[B]
NOTE:
Refer to "Preparations" for details of step 1) to 3) and step 5).
[2]
F-5-26
5-14
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting Sensor Light Intensity > Preparations
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting Sensor Light Intensity > Procedure
5-15
■■Procedure 3) If the sensor is faulty (The LED indicates with blinking "0"), press + (SW384) [1]/ - (SW383)
[2] button to find the code number on the blinking LED [3], and then replace the faulty
1) Set DIP switch SW382 [1] on the switch PCB as shown in the figure (1: ON), and then sensor correspondingly.
press ENTER (SW385) button [2] to start adjustment for sensor light intensity.
[1] Code Number Sensor Name

SW382
DSP381
3 Lower path sensor PCB (UN22)
4 Side registration sensor PCB (UN12)
5 Punch waste full level sensor PCB (UN21)
SW381 6 to 8 Tray A paper surface sensor (UN16)
9, A, b Tray B paper surface sensor (UN18)
T-5-6
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[2]
F-5-28
2) Check that the LED [1] indicates with lighted "0". Press ENTER (SW385) button [2] to
complete adjustment for sensor light intensity.
[1]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[2]
F-5-29
5-15
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting Sensor Light Intensity > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting Position of Tray A, B
5-16
Adjusting Position of Tray A, B
installing/removing the tray.
CAUTION:
When lowering the tray, be sure to do so while pulling the block [5].
[3]
[1]
[4] [A]
[2]
[5]
F-5-30
5-16
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting Position of Tray A, B
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting the Alignment Position of the Upper Neat Alignment Plate > Procedure
5-17
Adjusting the Alignment Position of the Upper Neat 2) Press the Push Switch SW385 [1] to complete preparation for the adjustment.
Alignment Plate SW382
DSP381
Execute the adjustment in the following cases.
• When replacing or installing/removing the Neat Stack Unit (Upper) and the component
parts of the unit SW381
• When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB
■■Preparations SW383 SW384 SW385

(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-32
3) Place A4 or LTR size paper in the ADF.
NOTE: 4) Press the Start key on the Control Panel to start copy.
Refer to "Preparations 5-6" for details of step 1) to 4). 5) By pressing the Push Switch SW383 [1] or SW384 [2], the adjustment amount is
determined, and the adjustment value is displayed on LED [3].
By pressing the SW383 [1], the Front Neat Alignment Plate [4] moves toward the front by
■■Procedure
approx. 0.2 mm. On the other hand, by pressing the SW384 [2], the Front Neat Alignment
1) Set DIP SW382 [1] on the Switch PCB as shown in the figure below. Plate [4] moves toward the rear by approx. 0.2 mm. Adjust the distance between the paper
[1] edge (front side) [A] stopped at the Top Delivery Outlet and the Front Neat Alignment Plate
[4].
• Adjustment range: +15 to -15 (shift amount per unit: 0.2 mm)
SW382
DSP381
[3]
SW382
DSP381
SW381 [4]
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER

SW383 SW384 SW385 [A]
F-5-31
(-) (+) ENTER
[1] [2]
F-5-33
5-17
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting the Alignment Position of the Upper Neat Alignment Plate > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting the Alignment Position of the Upper Neat Alignment Plate > Procedure
5-18
6) By pressing the SW385 [1], the shift amount of the Front Neat Alignment Plate is 8) After executing the adjustment, check that the distance (1) and (2) shown below become
determined, and adjustment of the distance between the paper edge (rear side) [B] and the appropriate so that there is no gap and paper is not leaned on the Alignment Plate.
Rear Neat Alignment Plate [2] starts. (1) Distance between the paper edge (front side) [A] and the Front Neat Alignment Plate [1]
7) By pressing the Push Switch SW383 [3] or SW384 [4], the adjustment amount is (2) Distance between the paper edge (rear side) [B] and the Rear Neat Alignment Plate [2]
determined, and the adjustment value is displayed on LED [5]. If the distance is not appropriate, measure and write down the shift amount which will be
By pressing the SW383 [3], the Front Neat Alignment Plate [2] moves toward the rear by needed for readjustment.
approx. 0.2 mm. On the other hand, by pressing the SW384 [4], the Rear Neat Alignment
Plate [2] moves toward the front by approx. 0.2 mm. [2] [1]
[5]
SW382
DSP381
[2] [B] [A]
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385 [B] F-5-35

9) Press the Push Switch SW385 [1] to finish the adjustment of Upper Neat Alignment Plate
(-) (+) ENTER

position, and remove the paper stopped at the Top Delivery Outlet.
[3] [4] [1] SW382
DSP381
F-5-34
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-36
10) If distance of the Upper Neat Alignment Plate is appropriate, adjustment is
completed.
11) If distance of the Upper Neat Alignment Plate is not appropriate, execute the
adjustment again from step 2.
5-18
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting the Alignment Position of the Upper Neat Alignment Plate > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting the Alignment Position of the Lower Neat Alignment Plate > Procedure
5-19
Adjusting the Alignment Position of the Lower Neat
Alignment Plate
• When replacing or installing/removing the Neat Stack Unit (Lower) and the component
parts of the unit.
• When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB.
■■Preparations
NOTE:
Refer to "Preparations 5-6" for details of step 1) to 4).
■■Procedure
1) Set DIP SW382 [1] on the Switch PCB as shown in the figure below.
[1]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-37
5-19
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting the Alignment Position of the Lower Neat Alignment Plate > Procedure
5-20
2) Press the Push Switch SW385 [1] to complete preparation for the adjustment. 6) By pressing the SW385 [1], the shift amount of the Front Neat Alignment Plate is
determined, and adjustment of the distance between the paper edge (rear side) [B] and the
SW382 Rear Neat Alignment Plate [2] starts.
DSP381
7) By pressing the Push Switch SW383 [3] or SW384 [4], the adjustment amount is
SW381 By pressing the SW383 [3], the Front Neat Alignment Plate [2] moves toward the rear by
approx. 0.2 mm. On the other hand, by pressing the SW384 [4], the Rear Neat Alignment
Plate [2] moves toward the front by approx. 0.2 mm.
SW383 SW384 SW385 • Adjustment range: +15 to -15 (shift amount per unit: 0.2 mm)
[5]
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
SW382
DSP381
F-5-38
[2]
3) Place A4 or LTR size paper in the ADF.
4) Press the Start key on the Control Panel to start copy.
5) By pressing the Push Switch SW383 [1] or SW384 [2], the adjustment amount is SW381

By pressing the SW383 [1], the Front Neat Alignment Plate [4] moves toward the front by
approx. 0.2 mm. On the other hand, by pressing the SW384 [2], the Front Neat Alignment SW383 SW384 SW385 [B]
Plate [4] moves toward the rear by approx. 0.2 mm. Adjust the distance between the paper
edge (front side) [A] stopped at the Bottom Delivery Outlet and the Front Neat Alignment (-) (+) ENTER
Plate [4].
[3] [4] [1]
F-5-40
[3]
SW382
DSP381
[4]
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385 [A]
(-) (+) ENTER
[1] [2]
F-5-39
5-20
5
5-21
8) After executing the adjustment, check that the distance (1) and (2) shown below become
appropriate so that there is no gap and paper is not leaned on the Alignment Plate.
• (1) Distance between the paper edge (front side) [A] and the Front Neat Alignment Plate [1]
• (2) Distance between the paper edge (rear side) [B] and the Rear Neat Alignment Plate [2]
If the distance is not appropriate, measure and write down the shift amount which will be
needed for readjustment.
[2] [1]
[B] [A]
F-5-41
9) Press the Push Switch SW385 [1] to finish the adjustment of Lower Neat Alignment Plate
position, and remove the paper stopped at the Bottom Delivery Outlet.
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-42
10) If distance of the Lower Neat Alignment Plate is appropriate, adjustment is

completed.
11) If distance of the Lower Neat Alignment Plate is not appropriate, execute the
adjustment again from step 2.
5-21
5
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting the Height of Corrugation Roller for Stack Delivery > Procedure
5-22
Adjusting the Height of Corrugation Roller for Stack 2) Remove the Stack Delivery Roller Upper Static Eliminator [1].
• 4 Screws [2]
Delivery
Execute the adjustment in the following cases. [2]
• When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB
x4
■■Preparations [1]

NOTE:
Refer to "Preparations 5-6" for details of step 1) to 4). F-5-44
■■Procedure
[3]
[2]
[1] [B]
[A]
F-5-43
5-22
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting the Height of Corrugation Roller for Stack Delivery > Procedure
5-23
3) Set DIP SW382 [1] on the Switch PCB as shown in the figure below. 5) By pressing the Push Switch SW383 [1] or SW384 [2], mode can be selected.
Every time SW384 [2] is pressed, "A / B / C / D / E" is displayed, in that order.
[1]
Display "A" on LED [3] (select the operation check mode).
6) Every time SW385 [4] is pressed, position of the 2 Corrugation Rollers [5] are changed.
SW382 Press SW385 [4] seven times to move the 2 Corrugation Rollers [5] to "corrugation position".
DSP381
[3]
SW381
SW382
DSP381
SW383 SW384 SW385
SW381
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-45
4) Press the Push Switch SW385 [1] to complete preparation for the adjustment. SW383 SW384 SW385
SW382 (-) (+) ENTER

DSP381
[1] [2] [4]
F-5-47
SW381
[5]
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-46
F-5-48
5-23
5
5-24
7) Open the Swing Guide [1], fold A4/LTR size heavy paper [2] in half length-wide (e.g., card 8) Measure the distance [C] between the bottom side [A] of the heavy paper and the upper
board) and place it by pushing it against the stopper [4] so that it becomes parallel to the side [B] of the Corrugation Roller [2]. Then, check that the distance [C] is within the range of
Intermediate Process Tray [3]. Then, close the Swing Guide [1]. standard value (2.7 +/- 1 mm in orthogonal direction against the surface of the Intermediate
Process Tray [3]). If the distance [C] is out of the range, take a note to write down the
[2] excess of the measured value over the range.
[1] [1]
NOTE:
Since the heavy paper [1] placed in step 7 is parallel to the surface of the Intermediate
Process Tray [3], it becomes possible to measure the distance [C] in orthogonal direction
against the surface of the Intermediate Process Tray.
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[C]
F-5-49
[B]
[A] [2]
[B]
[2]
[C]
[A]
[1]
[3]
F-5-50
5-24
5
5-25
9) Press the Push Switch SW385 [1] to complete the height adjustment of the Corrugation 12) By pressing the Push Switch SW385 [1], the current adjustment value is displayed
Roller. on LED [3]. Then, press SW383 [4] or SW384 [2] to change the adjustment value in
increments of 1 pulse.
SW382 • Adjustment range: +12 to -6 (shift amount per unit: 0.8 mm)
DSP381
13) Press the Push Switch SW385 [1] to complete the height adjustment of the
Corrugation Roller.
SW381
[3]
SW383 SW384 SW385

SW382
DSP381
(-) (+) ENTER
SW381
[1]
F-5-51
10) If the height of the Corrugation Roller is in the range, remove the heavy paper used
SW383 SW384 SW385
in step 7, install the Static Eliminator removed in step 2, and complete the adjustment.
(-) (+) ENTER

11) If the height of the Corrugation Roller is out of the range, press the Push Switch
SW385 [1], and complete the preparation for the adjustment again. Press SW384 [2] five [4] [2] [1]
times to display "E: Corrugation position adjustment" on LED [3]. F-5-52
14) Enter in "A: Operation Check" mode by performing step 5 again, and measure
the height of the Corrugation Roller. Repeat steps 5 and later until the height becomes
appropriate, and then, finish this adjustment in step 10.
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-53
5-25
5
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Right Angle Adjustment of Alignment Plate
5-26
Right Angle Adjustment of Alignment Plate 3) After setting A4 paper [1] in the arrow direction of the intermediate tray assembly, make
adjustment so that there is no gap between the paper edge
This adjustment is executed when replacing or installing/removing the Alignment Motor in the
[1] and the alignment plate [2], and then secure the alignment plate with
Intermediate Process Tray Assembly or when replacing the Finisher Controller PCB.
the screw [3].
[3]
1) After installing the intermediate process tray assembly, loosen the 2 screws [2] on the
alignment plate [1] in the intermediate process tray assembly.
[1]
[2] [1] [2]

F-5-54
2) Secure the 2 paper edge stoppers [1] with the 2 screws [2].
[2] [2]
[C] [1] [1]
F-5-56
[2]
[1]
F-5-55
5-26
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Right Angle Adjustment of Alignment Plate
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting Alignment Plate Position > Procedure
5-27
Adjusting Alignment Plate Position In the case of L-configuration size:
[1]
This adjustment is executed when replacing or installing/removing the Front Alignment Motor
or Rear Alignment Motor or when replacing the Finisher Controller PCB.
Adjusting method is as follows: SW382
DSP381
■■Preparations
SW381
3) Open the front cover and put the door switch tool into the door switch. SW383 SW384 SW385

(-) (+) ENTER
NOTE: F-5-58
2) Press switch SW385 [1] to start width adjustment of the front alignment plate.
SW382
■■Procedure
DSP381
1) Set DIP SW382 [1] on the switch PCB as shown in the figure below.
In the case of A-configuration size: SW381
[1]
SW383 SW384 SW385

SW382
DSP381
(-) (+) ENTER
SW381 [1]
F-5-59
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-57
5-27
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting Alignment Plate Position > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting Alignment Plate Position > Procedure
5-28
3) Place A4 paper [1] on the intermediate process tray. (Be sure to push in the paper to the 5) Pressing push switch SW385 [1] determines shifting amount of the front alignment plate.
rear side of the process tray)
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
[1] (-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-62
F-5-60
6) Check that there is no gap between the paper's edge and the alignment plate after the
adjustment. If there is a gap, go through the procedure again from step 4).
4) Pressing switch SW383 [1] or SW384 [2] determines adjustment level.
By pressing SW383 once, the LED [3] indicates "-1" and the front alignment plate [4] shifts [1]
to the front by approx. 0.2mm. In the same way, by pressing SW384 once, the LED [3] [2]
indicates "+1" and the front alignment plate [4] shifts to the rear by approx. 0.2mm.
• Adjustment range: +10 to -10 (shifting amount per unit: 0.2mm)
[3]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
F-5-63
SW383 SW384 SW385
[4]
(-) (+) ENTER
[1] [2]
F-5-61
5-28
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting Alignment Plate Position > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting Position of Stapler
5-29
Adjusting Position of Stapler
This adjustment is executed when replacing or installing/removing the Stapler in the
Intermediate Process Tray Assembly.
1) Put a marking [1] on the position of the stapler installed before replacing it.
2) Install the new stapler [2] with the marking position [1] aligned, and then secures the stapler
[2] with the 2 screws [3].
[1]
[3] [2]
F-5-64
5-29
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting Position of Stapler
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting Staple Position (1-stapling at the rear) > Procedure
5-30
Adjusting Staple Position (1-stapling at the rear) In the case of L-configuration size:
[1]
Execute this adjustment in the case of displacement of stapling position (1-stapling at the
rear) or replacing the finisher controller PCB.
DSP381
■■Preparations
SW381

(-) (+) ENTER
NOTE: F-5-66
2) Press switch SW385 [1] to start adjustment of the 1 stapling position at the rear.
SW382
■■Procedure
DSP381
In the case of A-configuration size:
SW381
[1]
SW382 SW383 SW384 SW385

DSP381
(-) (+) ENTER
SW381 [1]
F-5-67
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-65
5-30
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting Staple Position (1-stapling at the rear) > Procedure
5-31
3) Pressing switch SW383 [1] or SW384 [2] determines adjustment level. 5) Place A4 paper [1] on the intermediate process tray. (Be sure to push in the paper to the
By pressing SW383 once, the LED [3] indicates "-1" and the stapling position at the rear rear side of the process tray)
shifts to the rear . In the same way, by pressing SW384 once, the LED [3] indicates "+1" Then, press switch SW383 to execute stapling.
and the stapling position at the rear shifts to the front.
[3]
SW382
DSP381
SW381 [1]
SW383 SW384 SW385
F-5-70
(-) (+) ENTER
[1] [2]
F-5-68
4) Press switch SW385 [1] to move the stapler to the rear.
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-69
5-31
5
5-32
6) Check that the stapling position is within the specified range [1] of 5 +/- 2mm using this
result. If the stapling position is out of the specification, go through the procedure again
from step 2).
[1]
F-5-71
CAUTION:
If the LED indicates anything other than "0" meaning the adjustment failure, execute the
adjustment again.
5-32
5
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting Staple Position (1-stapling at the front) > Procedure
5-33
Adjusting Staple Position (1-stapling at the front) In the case of L-configuration size:
[1]
front) or replacing the finisher controller PCB.
SW382
DSP381
■■Preparations
SW381

(-) (+) ENTER
NOTE: F-5-73
Refer to "Preparations 5-6" for details of step 1) to 4). 2) Press switch SW385 [1] to start adjustment of the stapling position at the front.
SW382
■■Procedure
DSP381
[1]
SW383 SW384 SW385

SW382
DSP381
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
SW381
F-5-74
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-72
5-33
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting Staple Position (1-stapling at the front) > Procedure
5-34
3) Pressing switch SW383 [1] or SW384 [2] determines adjustment level. 5) Place A4 paper [1] on the intermediate process tray (Be sure to push in the paper to the
By pressing SW383 once, the LED [3] indicates "-1" and the stapling position at the front rear side of the process tray).
shifts to the rear. In the same way, by pressing SW384 once, the LED [3] indicates "+1" and Then, press switch SW383 [1] to execute stapling.
the stapling position at the front shifts to the front.
[3]
SW382
DSP381
SW381 [1]
SW383 SW384 SW385
F-5-77
(-) (+) ENTER
[1] [2]
F-5-75
4) Press push switch SW385 [1] to move the stapler to the front.
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-76
5-34
5
5-35
from step 2).
[1]
F-5-78
CAUTION:
adjustment again.
5-35
5
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting Staple Position (2-stapling positions) > Procedure
5-36
Adjusting Staple Position (2-stapling positions) In the case of L-configuration size:
[1]
Execute this adjustment in the case of displacement of stapling position (2-stapling positions)
or replacing the finisher controller PCB.
DSP381
■■Preparations
SW381

(-) (+) ENTER
NOTE: F-5-80
2) Press switch SW385 [1] to start adjustment of the 2 stapling positions.
SW382
■■Procedure
DSP381
[1]
SW383 SW384 SW385

SW382
DSP381
(-) (+) ENTER
SW381 [1]
F-5-81
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-79
5-36
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting Staple Position (2-stapling positions) > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting Staple Position (2-stapling positions) > Procedure
5-37
By pressing SW383 once, the LED [3] indicates "-1" and the 2 stapling positions shift to the rear side of the process tray).
upper side. In the same way, by pressing SW384 once, the LED [3] indicates "+1" and the
2 stapling positions shift to the lower side.
[3]
SW382
DSP381 [1]
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385

F-5-84
6) Check that the stapling position is within the specified range [1] (81.7 +/- 4mm for
(-) (+) ENTER
A-configuration, 72.7 +/- 4mm for L-configuration). If the stapling position is out of the
[1] [2] specification, go through the procedure again from step 2).
F-5-82
[1]
4) Press switch SW385 [1] to move the stapler to the 2-stapling position.
SW382
DSP381
SW381
F-5-85
SW383 SW384 SW385 7) Once the adjustment is complete, press SW385 to complete the adjustment mode.
(-) (+) ENTER

CAUTION:
[1]
F-5-83
adjustment again.
5-37
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting Staple Position (2-stapling positions) > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting Delivery of Staple Stack (lower delivery) > Procedure
5-38
Adjusting Delivery of Staple Stack (lower delivery) 2) Pressing switch SW385 [1] activates the LED [2] with "0" blinking. The Adjustment is ready
now.
Execute this adjustment in the case of paper displacement (the 1st up to the 3rd cover sheet)
[2]
in staple stack delivery mode or replacing the finisher controller PCB.
SW382
DSP381
■■Preparations
SW381
4) Remove the switch cover. SW383 SW384 SW385
NOTE: (-) (+) ENTER

[1]
F-5-87
■■Procedure 3) Set 3 sheets of A4-size originals on the ADF. Specify 1 set of A4 size (staple-sort) on the
control panel.
4) Execute copy with the start key on the control panel.
[1]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-86
5-38
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting Delivery of Staple Stack (lower delivery) > Procedure
5-39
5) Open the upper cover and measure displacement amount of the paper stack that is 6) If A (displacement amount between the 1st sheet and the 2nd sheet) or B (displacement
stopped at the buffer assembly (displacement amount between the 1st sheet and the 2nd amount between the 1nd sheet and the 3rd sheet) is out of the specified value, execute the
sheet: A, displacement amount between the 1nd sheet and the 3rd sheet: B). following work:
Repeat this work 5 times and check that the average of A and B is within the specified value Take out the paper and close the upper cover.
(A: 2.0mm +/- 0.5, B: 4.0mm +/- 0.5). If the result is out of the specified value, execute the Press push switch SW385 [1] once to get into the adjustment mode for A (displacement
work as follows. amount between the 1st sheet and the 2nd sheet). Pressing push switch SW383 [2]
reduces the displacement amount while pressing SW384 [3] increases the displacement
[A] amount.
[3] (Correction amount is displayed on the LED [4])
[2]
[B] • Adjustment range: +48 to -48 (correction amount by 2 units: 0.4mm)
[1]
(Adjustment level: amount per 2 units)
[4]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
F-5-88
SW383 SW384 SW385

[3]
[2] (-) (+) ENTER
[1] [2] [3] [1]

F-5-90
[A]
[B]
F-5-89
[1] 1st sheet
[2] 2nd sheet
[3] 3rd sheet
5-39
5
5-40
7) If B (displacement amount between the 1nd sheet and the 3rd sheet) is out of the specified
value, execute the following work:
Press push switch SW385 [1] once to get into the adjustment mode for B (displacement
amount between the 1nd sheet and the 3rd sheet). Pressing push switch SW383 [2]
amount. (Correction amount is displayed on the LED [4])
• Adjustment range: +48 to -48 (correcting amount per 2units: 0.4mm)
Press SW385 again to confirm correction amount for A and B.
[4]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[2] [3] [1]

F-5-91
CAUTION:
Every time you press push switch SW385 while the LED indicates "0", the correction
amount for A and B is alternately displayed on the LED.
During the work, be sure to remember which correction value you are working.
5-40
5
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting Delivery of Staple Stack (saddle delivery) > Procedure
5-41
Adjusting Delivery of Staple Stack (saddle delivery) 2) Pressing push switch SW385 [1] activates the LED [2] with "0" blinking.
The Adjustment is ready now.
[2]
SW382
DSP381
■■Preparations
SW381
NOTE: (-) (+) ENTER

[1]
F-5-93
■■Procedure 3) Set 3 sheets of A4R-size originals on the ADF. Make settings on the control panel as
1) Set DIP SW382 [1] on the switch PCB as shown in the figure below. follows: "Finish": "Staple sort", "Next": "Saddle Stitch", "2-sided method": "2-sided to
2-sided".
[1]
Then, execute 1-set of A4R-size copy.
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-92
5-41
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting Delivery of Staple Stack (saddle delivery) > Procedure
5-42
stopped at the buffer assembly (displacement amount between the 1st sheet and the 2nd amount between the 1st sheet and the 3rd sheet) is out of the specified value, execute the
Repeat this work 5 times and check that the average of A and B is within the specified Take out the paper and close the upper cover.
value (A = 2.5mm +/- 1.0, B = 5mm +/- 1.0). Press push switch SW385 [1] once to get into the adjustment mode for A (displacement
If the result is out of the specified value, execute the work as follows. amount between the 1st sheet and the 2nd sheet). Pressing push switch SW383 [2]
CAUTION: amount. (Correction amount is displayed on the LED [4])
Be sure to measure the value with the paper stack turned over as shown in the figure • Adjustment range: +48 to -48 (correction amount by 8 units: 1.6mm)
below. (Adjustment level: amount per 8 units)
[4]
SW382
DSP381
[3]
[2]
[A] [1]
SW381
[B]
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[2] [3] [1]

F-5-96
F-5-94
[1]
[2]
[3]
[A]
[B]
F-5-95
[1] 1st sheet
[2] 2nd sheet
[3] 3rd sheet
5-42
5
5-43
7) If B (displacement amount between the 1st sheet and the 3rd sheet) is out of the specified
Take out the paper and close the upper cover.
• Adjustment range: +48 to -48 (correction amount by 8 units: 1.6mm)
[4]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[2] [3] [1]

F-5-97
CAUTION:
5-43
5
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Saddle Stitch/Fold Placement Adjustment > Fold placement adjustment
5-44
Saddle Stitch/Fold Placement Adjustment ■■Fold placement adjustment
Perform this adjustment when the saddle stitch or fold placement is not correct or when the
NOTE:
Finisher Controller PCB is replaced.
In fold placement adjustment, the fold placement is adjusted to the saddle stitch
position. Even if the saddle stitch position is not at the center, adjust the fold placement
CAUTION: to the saddle stitch position. It will not cause any problem because the fold placement
and the saddle stitch position are adjusted to shift to the center of the paper in the
When adjusting the saddle stitch/fold placement, be sure to perform both fold placement following "■ Saddle stitch adjustment".
adjustment and saddle stitch adjustment, in that order. When fold placement adjustment
or saddle stitch adjustment is performed alone, the adjustment cannot be performed
correctly.
●● Preparations
2) Turn ON the power switch of the host machine to be on standby.
3) Specify the booklet with 2 sheets or more (any) on the control panel and make a copy.
4) Spread the bound paper to measure the folding position [2] against the staple position [1].
Adjustment is complete if the measured value is within the specification (C = 0.5mm or
less), otherwise execute the following work.
[2]
[1]
[C]
F-5-98
●● Procedure
NOTE:
5-44
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Saddle Stitch/Fold Placement Adjustment > Fold placement adjustment
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Saddle Stitch/Fold Placement Adjustment > Saddle stitch adjustment
5-45
3) Set DIP SW382 [1] on the switch PCB as shown in the figure below. ■■Saddle stitch adjustment
Then, press SW385 once so that the adjustment is ready now.
[1] NOTE:
In saddle stitch adjustment, the saddle stitch position and the fold placement are shifted
at the same time. By adjusting the saddle stitch position, the fold placement is also
SW382 shifted to the center at the same time.
DSP381
SW381 ●● Preparation
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER 4) Remove the switch cover.
F-5-99
NOTE:
4) Work with the 2 push switches (SW383, 384) by calculating correction value from the Refer to "Preparations 5-6" for details of step 1) to 4).
measured value.
Pressing SW383 [1] moves the folding position [2] upward while pressing SW384 [2] moves
the folding position [2] downward. ●● Procedure
• Adjustment range: +16 to -16 (correction amount per unit: 0.125mm)
• In the case of A-configuration [2]
SW382
• In the case of L-configuration [3]
DSP381
Then, press SW385 so that the adjustment is ready now.
[1]
SW381
[2]
SW382
[2]
DSP381
SW383 SW384 SW385
[3] SW381
(-) (+) ENTER
[1] [3]
F-5-100
SW383 SW384 SW385
5) Press push switch SW385 once to complete the adjustment mode.
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-101
5-45
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Saddle Stitch/Fold Placement Adjustment > Saddle stitch adjustment
5-46
2) Hold the lever [1] to pull out the saddle unit [2], and then open the saddle right guide [3]. 4) Press push switch SW384 [1] once to execute stapling.
Note that if the push switch is pressed without the paper on the saddle unit, the machine
[3]
goes to the position adjustment mode mentioned in step 7).
SW382
DSP381
[2] SW381
[1]
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER

F-5-102
3) Follow the feed guide to set the paper (A4R or LTRR) [1]. (Be sure to push in the paper [1]
until it touches the positioning plate). F-5-104
5) Take out the paper (that you have set) and measure staple position (A, B).
[2] [1]
[A]
[B]
F-5-103
F-5-105
5-46
5
5-47
6) If the measured value (A, B) is within the specified range (|A-B| is 0.5mm or less), press
push switch SW385 [1] once to complete the adjustment mode. It the measured value is
out of the specified value, execute the following work.
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-106
7) Work with the 2 push switches (SW383, 384) according to displacement amount for the
specified value.
Pressing SW383 [1] moves the staple position upward while pressing SW384 [2] moves the
staple position downward.
After the adjustment value is specified, go through the following procedure.
• No paper→the adjustment value is overwritten and the mode terminates.
• Paper present→re-check the staple position and go back to step 4).
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1] [2]
F-5-107
5-47
5
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting Saddle Stitching Position > Procedure
5-48
Adjusting Saddle Stitching Position 2) Hold the lever [1] to pull out the saddle unit [2], and then open the saddle right guide [3].
[3]
Execute this adjustment in the case of displacement in stitching position (saddle delivery) or
replacing the finisher controller PCB.
■■Preparations
1) Turn ON the power of the finisher. [2]

[1]
NOTE: F-5-109
Refer to "Preparations 5-6" for details of step 1) to 4). 3) Follow the feed guide to set the paper (A4R or LTRR) [1].
(Be sure to push in the paper until it touches the positioning plate).
■■Procedure [2] [1]
• In the case of A-configuration [2]]
[1]
SW382
[2]
DSP381
F-5-110
[3] SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-108
5-48
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting Saddle Stitching Position > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting Saddle Stitching Position > Procedure
5-49
4) Press push switch SW384 [1] once to execute stapling. 6) If the measured value (A, B) is within the specified range (|A-B| is 0.5mm or less), press
Note that if the push switch is pressed without the paper on the saddle unit, the machine push switch SW385 [1] once to complete the adjustment mode. It the measured value is
goes to the position adjustment mode mentioned in step 7). out of the specified value, execute the following work.
SW382 SW382
DSP381
DSP381
SW381 SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385 SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER (-) (+) ENTER
[1] [1]
F-5-111 F-5-113
5) Take out the paper (that you have set) and measure staple position (A, B). 7) Work with the 2 push switches (SW383, 384) according to displacement amount for the
specified value.
[A] • Adjustment range: +10 to -10 (correction amount per unit: 0.125mm)
[B] SW382
DSP381
SW381
F-5-112
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1] [2]
F-5-114
5-49
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting Saddle Stitching Position > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting Saddle Folding Position > Procedure
5-50
Adjusting Saddle Folding Position 3) Set DIP SW382 [1] on the switch PCB as shown in the figure below.
Execute this adjustment in the case of displacement in folding position (saddle delivery) or
[1]
SW382
DSP381
■■Preparations
1) Turn ON the power of the finisher. SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-116
4) Work with the 2 push switches (SW383, 384) by calculating correction value from the
measured value.
the folding position [2] downward.
[2]
[1]
[C]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
[2]
F-5-115
■■Procedure
SW383 SW384 SW385
2) Remove the switch cover. (-) (+) ENTER
[1] [3]
NOTE:
5-50
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting Saddle Folding Position > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting Position of Saddle Lead Edge Stopper
5-51
Adjusting Position of Saddle Lead Edge Stopper 16) Free the harness [1] from the Harness Guide [2].
Execute this adjustment in the case of displacement in saddle fording position or replacing
[1] [3] [2] [3]
1) Output paper from the saddle assembly and measure displacement amount (C) for folding
position.
[3]
[C]
[3] [3]
F-5-120
F-5-118
15) Pull out the saddle assembly, and then remove the PCB cover [1].
• 6 screws [2]
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-5-119
5-51
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting Position of Saddle Lead Edge Stopper
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting Position of Saddle Lead Edge Stopper
5-52
17) Free the 2 harnesses. 18) Remove the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB and the Harness Guide [1].
x2
[3]
[3] [2] [2]
[1]
[3] [1]
[2]
[2]
F-5-122
19) Loosen the 2 fixing screws [1] of the lead edge stopper fixture by approx. quarter
turn.
[1]
F-5-121
[1]
F-5-123
5-52
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting Position of Saddle Lead Edge Stopper
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjustment After Replacing Finisher Controller PCB
5-53
20) Correct the position of the stopper fixture according to the displacement amount (C)
Adjustment After Replacing Finisher Controller PCB
for folding position that was measured in step 1).
Procedure: Turn the cross-hole screw [1] to adjust the position of the lead edge stopper Execute this adjustment when replacing the finisher controller PCB.
fixture [2] upward/downward.
(0.5mm-change per turn) 1) Execute the following adjustments:
• Adjusting Sensor Light Intensity
• Adjusting the Alignment Position of the Upper Neat Alignment Plate
• Adjusting the Alignment Position of the Lower Neat Alignment Plate
• Adjusting the Height of Corrugation Roller for Stack Delivery
• Adjusting Alignment Plate Position
• Adjusting Staple Position (1-stapling at the rear)
[2] • Adjusting Staple Position (1-stapling at the front)
• Adjusting Staple Position (2-stapling positions)
• Adjusting Delivery of Staple Stack (lower delivery)
[1]
• Adjusting Delivery of Staple Stack (saddle delivery)
• Adjusting Delivery of Staple Stack (lower delivery)
F-5-124
• Adjusting Delivery of Staple Stack (saddle delivery)
• Adjusting Position of Saddle Lead Edge Stopper
21) After the adjustment is completed, tighten the fixing screw of the lead edge stopper.
• Adjusting Saddle Stitching Position
22) Output the paper from the saddle assembly and check the result.
• Adjusting Saddle Folding Position
• Bufferless Mode
• Adjustment in the Case of Failure in Stacking Performance of Tray (upper curl)
• Adjustment in the Case of Failure in Stacking Performance of Tray (lower curl)
• Adjustment in the Case of Failure in Stacking Performance of Tray (run-on of paper
when using thin paper)
• Adjustment in the Case of Canceling Limit for Tray Stack
5-53
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjustment After Replacing Finisher Controller PCB
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Bufferless Mode > Procedure
5-54
Bufferless Mode ■■Procedure
Execute this mode if meeting the following conditions: 1) Set DIP SW382 [1] on the switch PCB as shown in the figure below.
• In the case of alignment failure with the 2nd set (the first 3 sheets) when
making multiple sets of copy.
• In the case of Jam caused by paper corner bend.
[1]
• In the case of buffer path 2 sensors stationary jam (Jam Code: 1109).
• In the case of replacing the finisher controller PCB.
Buffer operation is disabled once selecting this mode regardless of stacking

method (non-staple stack/staple stack).
Following describes the setup procedure of this mode:
■■Preparations
2) Turn ON the power of the host machine to be on to be on standby. F-5-125
3) Open the front cover and put the door switch tool into the door switch. 2) Press SW385 so that the adjustment is ready now.
4) Remove the switch cover. 3) Press SW384 so that "1" is displayed on the LED, and then press SW385 again.
To determine the bufferless mode setting.
NOTE:
5-54
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Bufferless Mode > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjustment in the Case of Failure in Stacking Performance of Tray (upper curl) > Procedure
5-55
Adjustment in the Case of Failure in Stacking ■■Procedure
Performance of Tray (upper curl) 1) Set DIP SW382 [1] on the switch PCB as shown in the figure below.
Execute this adjustment in the case of failure in tray stacking (upper curl) as shown in the [1]
figure below or replacing the finisher controller PCB or when trailing edge of paper is soiled.
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
F-5-126
(-) (+) ENTER
NOTE:
F-5-127
Executing this adjustment enables the finisher to increase feeding speed at the timing
that the paper's trail edge reaches the delivery roller. 2) Press switch SW385 [1] so that this adjustment is ready now.
As a result, the trail edge of paper does not stay around the delivery outlet and the tray
stackability will improve.
SW382
DSP381
■■Preparations
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
NOTE: [1]
F-5-128
5-55
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjustment in the Case of Failure in Stacking Performance of Tray (upper curl) > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjustment in the Case of Failure in Stacking Performance of Tray (upper curl) > Procedure
5-56
3) Pressing push switch SW384 [1] once displays "+1" on the LED [2].
[2]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-129
4) Press switch SW385 [1] again to complete this adjustment.
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-130
5-56
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjustment in the Case of Failure in Stacking Performance of Tray (upper curl) > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjustment in the Case of Failure in Stacking Performance of Tray (lower curl) > Procedure
5-57
Performance of Tray (lower curl) 1) Set DIP SW382 [1] on the switch PCB as shown in the figure below.
Execute this adjustment in the case of failure in tray stacking (lower curl) as shown in the [1]
figure below or replacing the finisher controller PCB.
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
F-5-131
(-) (+) ENTER
NOTE: F-5-132
Delivery of paper with lower-curled paper stack stacked on the tray makes the delivered 2) Press switch SW385 [1] so that this adjustment is ready now.
paper slipped along the slope of the paper stack, and this can make the delivered paper
fall from the tray.
Executing this adjustment enables to reduce feeding speed of the finisher at the timing SW382
DSP381
that the paper's trail edge reaches the delivery roller.
This operation can prevent fall of the delivered paper from the tray because of reduced
impact from kicking of delivered paper.
SW381
■■Preparations
SW383 SW384 SW385

2) Turn ON the power of the host machine to be on to be on standby. (-) (+) ENTER
3) Open the front cover and put the door switch tool into the door switch. [1]
4) Remove the switch cover. F-5-133
NOTE:
5-57
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjustment in the Case of Failure in Stacking Performance of Tray (lower curl) > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjustment in the Case of Failure in Stacking Performance of Tray (lower curl) > Procedure
5-58
3) Pressing push switch SW384 [1] twice displays "+2" on the LED [2].
[2]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-134
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-135
5-58
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjustment in the Case of Failure in Stacking Performance of Tray (lower curl) > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjustment in the Case of Failure in Stacking Performance of Tray (run-on of paper when using thin paper) > Procedure
5-59
Performance of Tray (run-on of paper when using thin 1) Set DIP SW382 [1] on the switch PCB as shown in the figure below.
paper) [1]
Execute this adjustment in the case of failure in stacking performance of the tray when using
thin paper as shown in the figure below or replacing the finisher controller PCB. SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER

F-5-136
F-5-137
NOTE: 2) Press switch SW385 [1] so that this adjustment is ready now.
Executing this adjustment makes the finisher to reduce feeding speed of the paper.
This operation improves abovementioned failure in stacking performance of the tray SW382
DSP381
because of reduced curl-level with thin paper.
SW381
■■Preparations
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
NOTE: F-5-138
5-59
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjustment in the Case of Failure in Stacking Performance of Tray (run-on of paper when using thin paper) > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjustment in the Case of Failure in Stacking Performance of Tray (run-on of paper when using thin paper) > Procedure
5-60
[2]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-139
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-140
5-60
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjustment in the Case of Failure in Stacking Performance of Tray (run-on of paper when using thin paper) > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjustment in the Case of Canceling Limit for Tray Stack > Procedure
5-61
Adjustment in the Case of Canceling Limit for Tray ■■Preparations
Stack 1) Turn ON the power of the finisher.
Execute this adjustment in the case of canceling the limit for tray stacking of coated paper or 2) Turn ON the power of the host machine to be on to be on standby.
extra-length paper or replacing the finisher controller PCB. 3) Open the front cover and put the door switch tool into the door switch.
[B]
NOTE:
[A]
■■Procedure
[1]
[A] Normal stacking F-5-141 SW382
DSP381
[B] Stacking while stacking limit is cancelled
NOTE: SW381
This adjustment is for the lower tray only. Thus, cancellation of the stacking limit for the
upper tray is not available.
Following table shows stacking capacity for the lower tray while the stacking limit is
cancelled. SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
When stacking limit is F-5-142

Paper type At normal operation
canceled
Less than 64 1,000 sheets Up to 147 mm in height
gsm
Half 80 gsm or less 4,000 sheets Up to 490 mm in height
Plain paper
Over 80 gsm 3,000 sheets Up to 147 mm in height
Stitching 200 sets or 3,000 sheets 200 sets
Extra-large Up to 147 mm in height Up to 216 mm in height
80 gsm or less 4,000 sheets Up to 490 mm in height
Coated Half Over 80 gsm 3,000 sheets Up to 490 mm in height
paper Stitching 200 sets or 3,000 sheets 200 sets
T-5-7
5-61
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjustment in the Case of Canceling Limit for Tray Stack > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjustment in the Case of Canceling Limit for Tray Stack > Procedure
5-62
2) Press switch SW385 [1] so that this adjustment is ready now. 4) Press switch SW385 [1] again to complete this adjustment.
SW382 SW382
DSP381
DSP381
SW381 SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385 SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER (-) (+) ENTER
[1] [1]
F-5-143 F-5-145
[2]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-144
5-62
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjustment in the Case of Canceling Limit for Tray Stack > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting Alignment for Saddle Stapling
5-63
Adjusting Alignment for Saddle Stapling 3) Remove the saddle inner cover (lower) [1].
• 4 screws [2]
• 1 knob [3]
CAUTION:
[3]
Do not touch the drive parts because the finisher works without the covers during
checking for this adjustment.
[2]
This adjustment is executed when replacing or installing/removing the Saddle Stapler or when [2]
[1]
staple positions (saddle delivery) are displaced at the rear side and the front side.
F-5-147
1) Open the front cover. 4) Turn ON the power of the finisher.
2) Remove the saddle inner cover (upper) [1]. 5) Turn ON the power of the host machine to be on to be on standby.
• 1 knob [2] 6) Open the front cover and put the door switch tool into the door switch.
• 2 screws [3]
[2]
NOTE:
[3]
[1] 8) Hold the lever [1] to pull out the saddle unit [2], and then open the saddle right guide [3].
[3]
[3]
F-5-146
[2]
[1]
F-5-148
5-63
5
Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting Alignment for Saddle Stapling
5-64
9) Follow the feed guide [2] to set the paper (A3 or LDR) [1]. (Be sure to push in the paper 11) Press switch SW385 [1] once so that stapling (saddle delivery) is ready now.
until it touches the positioning plate).
SW382
[2] [1]
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-151
F-5-149
10) Set DIP SW382 [1] on the switch PCB as shown in the figure below. 12) Press push switch SW384 [1] several times to execute stapling.
[1]
SW382
DSP381
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
SW383 SW384 SW385 (-) (+) ENTER
[1]
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-152
F-5-150
5-64
5
5-65
13) Press switch SW383 [1] several times to execute folding and delivery of paper. 15) Loosen the 2 screws [1] that secure the saddle stapler.
[2]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
[1]
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1] F-5-155
F-5-153 16) Adjust tilt of the saddle stapler according to the displacement amount of stapling position.
14) Using this output result, measure displacement amount [A] [B] between the stapling • If the stapling position at the rear is displaced downward as shown in step 14) (in the case
position at the front [1] and the stapling position at the rear [2]. of displacement amount [A])
In case of large displacement amount, be sure to adjust tilt of the saddle stapler by going Remedy: Move the stapler [1] in the direction of the arrow [A] to meet the specified
through the following procedure. value.
• If the stapling position at the rear is displaced upward as shown in step 14) (in the case of
[2] displacement amount [B])
[1] [1] Remedy: Move the stapler [1] in the direction of the arrow [B] to meet the specified
[B] value.
[A]
17) Reverse steps 1) to 8) and 15) so that the finisher is ready to work.
[2]
F-5-154
5-65
5
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Outline
5-66
Auxiliary Adjustment At the occurrence of the following symptoms or at adjustment timing, perform the appropriate
adjustment.
Outline Adjustment Type Symptom, adjustment timing Reference

Adjusting Position of When replacing the Tray A/B Unit p. 5-67
Tray A, B
CAUTION: Setting the Dip Switch
Adjusting Position of When displacement occurs with delivered stack p. 5-68
If setting the Dip Switch, the Delivery Tray setting on the host machine side returns to Feed Belt
the default. Adjusting Staple When staple position (rear 1-point stapling) is displaced p. 5-70
Position (1-stapling at
After setting the Dip Switch, it is necessary to execute the Delivery Tray setting on the
the rear)
host machine side again. Adjusting Staple When staple position (rear 1-point stapling) is displaced p. 5-73
Position (1-stapling at
the front)
Adjusting Staple When staple position (2-point stapling) is displaced p. 5-76
Except for some items, the adjustment and setting can input from the both devices of the host
Position (2-stapling
machine (service mode) and the finisher (Dip switch). positions)
The input value is memorized in the EEPROM of finisher controller. Regardless of the input Adjusting Delivery of When displacement of paper occurs (on the cover p. 5-78
device (host machine or finisher), the setting range and unit are same, and the final input Staple Stack (lower and the 1st to 3rd sheets) at the time of stapled stack
delivery) delivery (lower delivery)
value is effective.
Adjusting Delivery of When displacement of paper occurs (on the cover p. 5-81
Staple Stack (saddle and the 1st to 3rd sheets) at the time of stapled stack
delivery) delivery (saddle delivery)
Bit setting of DSW1
Saddle Stitch/Fold When saddle stitch or fold position is displaced p. 5-84
Item in the finisher Service mode Range Default Reference
Placement Adjustment
controller PCB Adjusting Saddle When stitch position (saddle delivery) is displaced p. 5-88
Bufferless Mode ON:1, 3, 8 SORTER> OPTION 0 to 4 0 p. 5-96 Stitching Position
>BUFFSW Adjusting Saddle When fold position (saddle delivery) is displaced p. 5-90
Adjustment in the Case ON:1, 3, 6, 7 SORTER>OPTION 0 to 2 0 p. 5-102 Folding Position
of Failure in Stacking >CURLSW Adjusting Position of When saddle fold position (saddle delivery) is displaced p. 5-91
Performance of Tray Saddle Lead Edge
(upper curl) Stopper
Adjustment in the Case ON:1, 3, 6, 7 SORTER>OPTION 0 to 2 0 p. 5-104 Adjusting Position When saddle alignment width is not correct p. 5-94
of Failure in Stacking >CURLSW for Saddle Alignment
Performance of Tray Width
(lower curl)
Bufferless Mode • When alignment failure occurs with the 2nd set (the p. 5-96
Adjustment in the Case ON:1, 3, 7 SORTER>OPTION 0 to 1 0 p. 5-106 first 3 sheets) at the time of making multiple sets of
of Failure in Stacking >TRYEJCT copy
Performance of Tray • When paper corner bend occurs
(runon of paper when • When Buffer Path 2 Sensor stationary jam (jam
using thin paper) code: 1109) occurs
Adjustment in the Case ON:1, 3, 5 SORTER>OPTION 0 to 1 0 p. 5-108 Adjusting Assist When the paper on the top of the stapled stack is p. 5-97
of Canceling Limit for >TRYOVER Stopper Position misaligned
Tray Stack
Adjusting Height of • When stacking failure occurs on the tray with thin p. 5-98
Setting of Pressless ON:1, 3, 4 SORTER>OPTION 0 to 3 0 p. 5-120 Staple Inlet Guide paper
Mode >SDLPRS • - When staple alignment failure occurs
T-5-8
5-66
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Outline
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Outline
5-67
Adjustment Type Symptom, adjustment timing Reference Adjustment Type Symptom, adjustment timing Reference
Adjusting Paddle • When stacking failure occurs on the tray with thin p. 5-100 Punch skew tolerance When displacement of hole position (within 8.5 mm) p. 5-132
Height paper adjustment mode occurs and paper is skewed on the way from when it
• When staple alignment failure occurs passes through the Delivery Outlet until it is aligned
Adjustment in the Case When stacking failure occurs on the tray (when upward p. 5-102 with the Alignment Plate at the time of delivery.
of Failure in Stacking curl occurs) Process Tray alignment When prioritizing productivity of A4R and LTRR size p. 5-134
Performance of Tray operation adjustment paper with the Lower Tray (without inner punching)
(upper curl) mode with A4R/LTRR
Adjustment in the Case When stacking failure occurs on the tray (when p. 5-104 size paper
of Failure in Stacking downward curl occurs) Side registration When paper corner is bent or caught with custom size p. 5-135
Performance of Tray position fine paper
(lower curl) adjustment mode (shift
Adjustment in the Case When stacking failure occurs on the tray with thin paper p. 5-106 amount change)
of Failure in Stacking T-5-9
Performance of Tray
(run-on of paper when
using thin paper)
Adjustment in the Case When canceling stacking limit of the tray for coated p. 5-108
of Canceling Limit for paper or extra-large paper
Tray Stack
Adjusting Alignment for When staple positions (saddle delivery) are displaced p. 5-110
Saddle Stapling at the rear side and the front side
Adjusting Engagement/ When staple position is displaced significantly p. 5-113
Disengagement
Position of Saddle
Disengagement Roller
Adjusting Feeding When staple position is displaced p. 5-115
Distance of Saddle
Disengagement Roller
Adjusting Side When jam occurs frequently at the Saddle Stack Guide p. 5-117
Registration of Saddle
Setting of Pressless When paper wrinkle occurs p. 5-120
Mode
Adjusting Delivery When paper is curled p. 5-121
Angle
Setting of Tray Speed When abnormal noise is heard at the time of lifting/ p. 5-123
lowering a tray after replacement of the Tray Motor
Changing Lower When delivering non-stapled papers to the Lower Tray p. 5-125
Delivery Mode
Setting of Stop-less When paper wrinkle occurs p. 5-127
Stacking
Adjusting Hole When adjusting the punch hole position from paper p. 5-128
Positions in Feeding edge
Direction
Upper/Lower Neat When paper displacement in feed direction occurs with p. 5-129
Paddle position the Upper Tray or the Lower Tray
adjustment
5-67
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Outline
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Position of Tray A, B
5-68
Adjusting Position of Tray A, B
installing/removing the tray.
CAUTION:
When lowering the tray, be sure to do so while pulling the block [5].
[3]
[1]
[4] [A]
[2]
[5]
F-5-156
5-68
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Position of Tray A, B
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Position of Feed Belt > Procedure
5-69
Adjusting Position of Feed Belt 2) Press switch SW385 [1] to start position adjustment of the feed belt.
Execute this adjustment when replacing the feed belt of the intermediate process tray or SW382
DSP381
EEPROM on the finisher controller PCB, or in the case of variation in delivery stack.
SW381
■■Preparations
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
NOTE: F-5-158
Refer to "Preparations 5-6" for details of step 1) to 4). 3) Pressing switch SW383 [1] or SW384 [2] determines adjustment level.
By pressing SW383 once, the LED [3] indicates "-1" and the distance between the belt [4]
and the sheet interval [5] is reduced to increase feeding force of the belt. In the same way,
■■Procedure by pressing SW384 once, the LED indicates "+1" and the distance between the belt [4] and
1) Set DIP SW382 [1] on the switch PCB as shown in the figure below. the sheet interval [5] increased to reduce feeding force of the belt. (Adjustment range: +4 to
-4).
[1]
NOTE:
SW382 1. Increase feeding force by setting adjustment value to negative value (-1 to -4) in
DSP381
the case of wear of the feed belt or using recycled paper (paper with large surface
resistance).
2. Reduce feeding force by setting adjustment value to positive value (+1 to +4) in the
SW381 case that dent on the paper edge is shown.
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-157
5-69
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Position of Feed Belt > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Position of Feed Belt > Procedure
5-70
[3]
[4]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385

[5]
(-) (+) ENTER
[1] [2]
F-5-159
4) Press switch SW385 [1] to complete adjustment of the feed belt.

"0" indication on the LED means normal completion of the adjustment.
[2]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-160
5) If the LED indication is anything other than "0" meaning the adjustment failure, execute the
adjustment again.
5-70
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Position of Feed Belt > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Staple Position (1-stapling at the rear) > Procedure
5-71
Adjusting Staple Position (1-stapling at the rear) In the case of L-configuration size:
[1]
rear) or replacing the finisher controller PCB.
DSP381
■■Preparations
SW381

(-) (+) ENTER
NOTE: F-5-162
2) Press switch SW385 [1] to start adjustment of the 1 stapling position at the rear.
SW382
■■Procedure
DSP381
In the case of A-configuration size:
SW381
[1]
SW382 SW383 SW384 SW385

DSP381
(-) (+) ENTER
SW381 [1]
F-5-163
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-161
5-71
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Staple Position (1-stapling at the rear) > Procedure
5-72
3) Pressing switch SW383 [1] or SW384 [2] determines adjustment level. 5) Place A4 paper [1] on the intermediate process tray. (Be sure to push in the paper to the
By pressing SW383 once, the LED [3] indicates "-1" and the stapling position at the rear rear side of the process tray)
shifts to the rear . In the same way, by pressing SW384 once, the LED [3] indicates "+1" Then, press switch SW383 to execute stapling.
and the stapling position at the rear shifts to the front.
[3]
SW382
DSP381
SW381 [1]
SW383 SW384 SW385
F-5-166
(-) (+) ENTER
[1] [2]
F-5-164
4) Press switch SW385 [1] to move the stapler to the rear.
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-165
5-72
5
5-73
from step 2).
[1]
F-5-167
CAUTION:
adjustment again.
5-73
5
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Staple Position (1-stapling at the front) > Procedure
5-74
Adjusting Staple Position (1-stapling at the front) In the case of L-configuration size:
[1]
front) or replacing the finisher controller PCB.
SW382
DSP381
■■Preparations
SW381

(-) (+) ENTER
NOTE: F-5-169
Refer to "Preparations 5-6" for details of step 1) to 4). 2) Press switch SW385 [1] to start adjustment of the stapling position at the front.
SW382
■■Procedure
DSP381
[1]
SW383 SW384 SW385

SW382
DSP381
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
SW381
F-5-170
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-168
5-74
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Staple Position (1-stapling at the front) > Procedure
5-75
By pressing SW383 once, the LED [3] indicates "-1" and the stapling position at the front rear side of the process tray).
shifts to the rear. In the same way, by pressing SW384 once, the LED [3] indicates "+1" and Then, press switch SW383 [1] to execute stapling.
the stapling position at the front shifts to the front.
[3]
SW382
DSP381
SW381 [1]
SW383 SW384 SW385
F-5-173
(-) (+) ENTER
[1] [2]
F-5-171
4) Press push switch SW385 [1] to move the stapler to the front.
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-172
5-75
5
5-76
from step 2).
[1]
F-5-174
CAUTION:
adjustment again.
5-76
5
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Staple Position (2-stapling positions) > Procedure
5-77
Adjusting Staple Position (2-stapling positions) In the case of L-configuration size:
[1]
Execute this adjustment in the case of displacement of stapling position (2-stapling positions)
or replacing the finisher controller PCB.
DSP381
■■Preparations
SW381

(-) (+) ENTER
NOTE: F-5-176
2) Press switch SW385 [1] to start adjustment of the 2 stapling positions.
SW382
■■Procedure
DSP381
[1]
SW383 SW384 SW385

SW382
DSP381
(-) (+) ENTER
SW381 [1]
F-5-177
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-175
5-77
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Staple Position (2-stapling positions) > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Staple Position (2-stapling positions) > Procedure
5-78
By pressing SW383 once, the LED [3] indicates "-1" and the 2 stapling positions shift to the rear side of the process tray).
upper side. In the same way, by pressing SW384 once, the LED [3] indicates "+1" and the
2 stapling positions shift to the lower side.
[3]
SW382
DSP381 [1]
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385

F-5-180
6) Check that the stapling position is within the specified range [1] (81.7 +/- 4mm for
(-) (+) ENTER
A-configuration, 72.7 +/- 4mm for L-configuration). If the stapling position is out of the
[1] [2] specification, go through the procedure again from step 2).
F-5-178
[1]
4) Press switch SW385 [1] to move the stapler to the 2-stapling position.
SW382
DSP381
SW381
F-5-181
SW383 SW384 SW385 7) Once the adjustment is complete, press SW385 to complete the adjustment mode.
(-) (+) ENTER

CAUTION:
[1]
F-5-179
adjustment again.
5-78
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Staple Position (2-stapling positions) > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Delivery of Staple Stack (lower delivery) > Procedure
5-79
Adjusting Delivery of Staple Stack (lower delivery) 2) Pressing switch SW385 [1] activates the LED [2] with "0" blinking. The Adjustment is ready
now.
[2]
SW382
DSP381
■■Preparations
SW381
NOTE: (-) (+) ENTER

[1]
F-5-183
■■Procedure 3) Set 3 sheets of A4-size originals on the ADF. Specify 1 set of A4 size (staple-sort) on the
control panel.
[1]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-182
5-79
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Delivery of Staple Stack (lower delivery) > Procedure
5-80
stopped at the buffer assembly (displacement amount between the 1st sheet and the 2nd amount between the 1nd sheet and the 3rd sheet) is out of the specified value, execute the
Repeat this work 5 times and check that the average of A and B is within the specified value Take out the paper and close the upper cover.
(A: 2.0mm +/- 0.5, B: 4.0mm +/- 0.5). If the result is out of the specified value, execute the Press push switch SW385 [1] once to get into the adjustment mode for A (displacement
work as follows. amount between the 1st sheet and the 2nd sheet). Pressing push switch SW383 [2]
[A] amount.
[3] (Correction amount is displayed on the LED [4])
[2]
[B] • Adjustment range: +48 to -48 (correction amount by 2 units: 0.4mm)
[1]
[4]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
F-5-184
SW383 SW384 SW385

[3]
[2] (-) (+) ENTER
[1] [2] [3] [1]

F-5-186
[A]
[B]
F-5-185
[1] 1st sheet
[2] 2nd sheet
[3] 3rd sheet
5-80
5
5-81
7) If B (displacement amount between the 1nd sheet and the 3rd sheet) is out of the specified
• Adjustment range: +48 to -48 (correcting amount per 2units: 0.4mm)
[4]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[2] [3] [1]

F-5-187
CAUTION:
5-81
5
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Delivery of Staple Stack (saddle delivery) > Procedure
5-82
Adjusting Delivery of Staple Stack (saddle delivery) 2) Pressing push switch SW385 [1] activates the LED [2] with "0" blinking.
The Adjustment is ready now.
[2]
SW382
DSP381
■■Preparations
SW381
NOTE: (-) (+) ENTER

[1]
F-5-189
■■Procedure 3) Set 3 sheets of A4R-size originals on the ADF. Make settings on the control panel as
1) Set DIP SW382 [1] on the switch PCB as shown in the figure below. follows: "Finish": "Staple sort", "Next": "Saddle Stitch", "2-sided method": "2-sided to
2-sided".
[1]
Then, execute 1-set of A4R-size copy.
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-188
5-82
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Delivery of Staple Stack (saddle delivery) > Procedure
5-83
stopped at the buffer assembly (displacement amount between the 1st sheet and the 2nd amount between the 1st sheet and the 3rd sheet) is out of the specified value, execute the
Repeat this work 5 times and check that the average of A and B is within the specified Take out the paper and close the upper cover.
value (A = 2.5mm +/- 1.0, B = 5mm +/- 1.0). Press push switch SW385 [1] once to get into the adjustment mode for A (displacement
If the result is out of the specified value, execute the work as follows. amount between the 1st sheet and the 2nd sheet). Pressing push switch SW383 [2]
CAUTION: amount. (Correction amount is displayed on the LED [4])
Be sure to measure the value with the paper stack turned over as shown in the figure • Adjustment range: +48 to -48 (correction amount by 8 units: 1.6mm)
below. (Adjustment level: amount per 8 units)
[4]
SW382
DSP381
[3]
[2]
[A] [1]
SW381
[B]
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[2] [3] [1]

F-5-192
F-5-190
[1]
[2]
[3]
[A]
[B]
F-5-191
[1] 1st sheet
[2] 2nd sheet
[3] 3rd sheet
5-83
5
5-84
7) If B (displacement amount between the 1st sheet and the 3rd sheet) is out of the specified
Take out the paper and close the upper cover.
• Adjustment range: +48 to -48 (correction amount by 8 units: 1.6mm)
[4]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[2] [3] [1]

F-5-193
CAUTION:
5-84
5
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Saddle Stitch/Fold Placement Adjustment > Fold placement adjustment
5-85
Saddle Stitch/Fold Placement Adjustment ■■Fold placement adjustment
Perform this adjustment when the saddle stitch or fold placement is not correct or when the
NOTE:
Finisher Controller PCB is replaced.
In fold placement adjustment, the fold placement is adjusted to the saddle stitch
position. Even if the saddle stitch position is not at the center, adjust the fold placement
CAUTION: to the saddle stitch position. It will not cause any problem because the fold placement
and the saddle stitch position are adjusted to shift to the center of the paper in the
When adjusting the saddle stitch/fold placement, be sure to perform both fold placement following "■ Saddle stitch adjustment".
adjustment and saddle stitch adjustment, in that order. When fold placement adjustment
or saddle stitch adjustment is performed alone, the adjustment cannot be performed
correctly.
●● Preparations
[2]
[1]
[C]
F-5-194
●● Procedure
NOTE:
5-85
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Saddle Stitch/Fold Placement Adjustment > Fold placement adjustment
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Saddle Stitch/Fold Placement Adjustment > Saddle stitch adjustment
5-86
3) Set DIP SW382 [1] on the switch PCB as shown in the figure below. ■■Saddle stitch adjustment
[1] NOTE:
In saddle stitch adjustment, the saddle stitch position and the fold placement are shifted
at the same time. By adjusting the saddle stitch position, the fold placement is also
SW382 shifted to the center at the same time.
DSP381
SW381 ●● Preparation
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER 4) Remove the switch cover.
F-5-195
NOTE:
4) Work with the 2 push switches (SW383, 384) by calculating correction value from the Refer to "Preparations 5-6" for details of step 1) to 4).
measured value.
the folding position [2] downward. ●● Procedure
SW382
DSP381
[1]
SW381
[2]
SW382
[2]
DSP381
SW383 SW384 SW385
[3] SW381
(-) (+) ENTER
[1] [3]
F-5-196
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-197
5-86
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Saddle Stitch/Fold Placement Adjustment > Saddle stitch adjustment
5-87
2) Hold the lever [1] to pull out the saddle unit [2], and then open the saddle right guide [3]. 4) Press push switch SW384 [1] once to execute stapling.
Note that if the push switch is pressed without the paper on the saddle unit, the machine
[3]
goes to the position adjustment mode mentioned in step 7).
SW382
DSP381
[2] SW381
[1]
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER

F-5-198
3) Follow the feed guide to set the paper (A4R or LTRR) [1]. (Be sure to push in the paper [1]
until it touches the positioning plate). F-5-200
5) Take out the paper (that you have set) and measure staple position (A, B).
[2] [1]
[A]
[B]
F-5-199
F-5-201
5-87
5
5-88
6) If the measured value (A, B) is within the specified range (|A-B| is 0.5mm or less), press
push switch SW385 [1] once to complete the adjustment mode. It the measured value is
out of the specified value, execute the following work.
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-202
7) Work with the 2 push switches (SW383, 384) according to displacement amount for the
specified value.
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1] [2]
F-5-203
5-88
5
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Saddle Stitching Position > Procedure
5-89
Adjusting Saddle Stitching Position 2) Hold the lever [1] to pull out the saddle unit [2], and then open the saddle right guide [3].
[3]
Execute this adjustment in the case of displacement in stitching position (saddle delivery) or
■■Preparations
1) Turn ON the power of the finisher. [2]

[1]
NOTE: F-5-205
Refer to "Preparations 5-6" for details of step 1) to 4). 3) Follow the feed guide to set the paper (A4R or LTRR) [1].
(Be sure to push in the paper until it touches the positioning plate).
■■Procedure [2] [1]
• In the case of A-configuration [2]]
[1]
SW382
[2]
DSP381
F-5-206
[3] SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-204
5-89
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Saddle Stitching Position > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Saddle Stitching Position > Procedure
5-90
4) Press push switch SW384 [1] once to execute stapling. 6) If the measured value (A, B) is within the specified range (|A-B| is 0.5mm or less), press
Note that if the push switch is pressed without the paper on the saddle unit, the machine push switch SW385 [1] once to complete the adjustment mode. It the measured value is
goes to the position adjustment mode mentioned in step 7). out of the specified value, execute the following work.
SW382 SW382
DSP381
DSP381
SW381 SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385 SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER (-) (+) ENTER
[1] [1]
F-5-207 F-5-209
5) Take out the paper (that you have set) and measure staple position (A, B). 7) Work with the 2 push switches (SW383, 384) according to displacement amount for the
specified value.
[A] • Adjustment range: +10 to -10 (correction amount per unit: 0.125mm)
[B] SW382
DSP381
SW381
F-5-208
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1] [2]
F-5-210
5-90
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Saddle Stitching Position > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Saddle Folding Position > Procedure
5-91
Adjusting Saddle Folding Position 3) Set DIP SW382 [1] on the switch PCB as shown in the figure below.
Execute this adjustment in the case of displacement in folding position (saddle delivery) or
[1]
SW382
DSP381
■■Preparations
1) Turn ON the power of the finisher. SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-212
4) Work with the 2 push switches (SW383, 384) by calculating correction value from the
measured value.
the folding position [2] downward.
[2]
[1]
[C]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
[2]
F-5-211
■■Procedure
SW383 SW384 SW385
[1] [3]
NOTE:
5-91
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Saddle Folding Position > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Position of Saddle Lead Edge Stopper
5-92
Adjusting Position of Saddle Lead Edge Stopper 2) Free the harness [1] from the Harness Guide [2].
Execute this adjustment in the case of displacement in saddle fording position or replacing
[1] [3] [2] [3]
1) Output paper from the saddle assembly and measure displacement amount (C) for folding
position.
[3]
[C]
[3] [3]
F-5-216
F-5-214
1) Pull out the saddle assembly, and then remove the PCB cover [1].
• 6 screws [2]
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-5-215
5-92
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Position of Saddle Lead Edge Stopper
5-93
3) Free the 2 harnesses. 4) Remove the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB and the Harness Guide [1].
x2
[3]
[3] [2] [2]
[1]
[3] [1]
[2]
[2]
F-5-218
5) Loosen the 2 fixing screws [1] of the lead edge stopper fixture by approx. quarter turn.
[1]
[1]
F-5-217
F-5-219
5-93
5
5-94
6) Correct the position of the stopper fixture according to the displacement amount (C) for
folding position that was measured in step 1).
Procedure: Turn the cross-hole screw [1] to adjust the position of the lead edge stopper
fixture [2] upward/downward.
(0.5mm-change per turn)
[2]
[1]
F-5-220
7) After the adjustment is completed, tighten the fixing screw of the lead edge stopper.
8) Output the paper from the saddle assembly and check the result.
5-94
5
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Position for Saddle Alignment Width > Procedure
5-95
Adjusting Position for Saddle Alignment Width 2) Hold the lever [1] to pull out the saddle unit [2], and then open the saddle right guide [3].
[3]
Execute this adjustment in the case of displacement in position for saddle alignment width.
■■Preparations
[2]
4) Remove the switch cover. [1]
NOTE:
F-5-222
3) Set paper [2] on the saddle assembly [1] (A4R or LTRR).

■■Procedure
[2]
[1]
SW382
[2]
DSP381
[3] SW381 [1]

F-5-223
4) Check that there is gap between the saddle guide plate and the paper edge.
SW383 SW384 SW385 If there is a gap, go through the following steps.
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-221
5-95
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Position for Saddle Alignment Width > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Position for Saddle Alignment Width > Procedure
5-96
5) Adjust 2 push switches (SW383, 384) so that there will be no gap [D] between the saddle
guide plate [1] and the paper edge [2].
Adjustment method is as follows:
Pressing SW383 [3] moves the guide plate in A direction while pressing SW384 [2] moves
the guide plate in B direction.
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[3] [4]
[D] [D]
[1]
A B
[2]
F-5-224
6) Press switch SW385 once to complete the adjustment mode.
5-96
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Position for Saddle Alignment Width > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Bufferless Mode > Procedure
5-97
Bufferless Mode ■■Procedure
Execute this mode if meeting the following conditions: 1) Set DIP SW382 [1] on the switch PCB as shown in the figure below.
• In the case of alignment failure with the 2nd set (the first 3 sheets) when
making multiple sets of copy.
• In the case of Jam caused by paper corner bend.
[1]
• In the case of buffer path 2 sensors stationary jam (Jam Code: 1109).
• In the case of replacing the finisher controller PCB.
Buffer operation is disabled once selecting this mode regardless of stacking

method (non-staple stack/staple stack).
Following describes the setup procedure of this mode:
■■Preparations
2) Turn ON the power of the host machine to be on to be on standby. F-5-225
3) Open the front cover and put the door switch tool into the door switch. 2) Press SW385 so that the adjustment is ready now.
4) Remove the switch cover. 3) Press SW384 so that "1" is displayed on the LED, and then press SW385 again.
To determine the bufferless mode setting.
NOTE:
5-97
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Bufferless Mode > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Assist Stopper Position > Procedure
5-98
Adjusting Assist Stopper Position 29) Remove the 2 screws [2], and remove the Assist Stopper [1].
Execute this adjustment in the case of variation in the top sheet of the stapled delivery stack. [1]
Adjustment method is as follows:
x2
■■Preparations
1) Remove the Process Tray Unit. (Refer to page 4-62) [2]
■■Procedure
1) Set A4 or LTR size paper [1] on the intermediate process tray in the arrow direction, and
then measure displacement amount [A] between the paper edge stopper [2] and the assist
stopper [3].
When the measurement value (+A or -A) is out of the standard value (within 0 + 0.5 mm in
F-5-227
+A direction), perform the following steps to make the value within the range. 310) Loosen the screw [1] of the assist stopper to adjust the displacement amount of the
stopper [2] to be within the specified value [3].
[2]
[1]
[1]
[3]
F-5-228
CAUTION:
If the reference value [3] measured in the previous step is -A, move the stopper [2] in
the direction of the white arrow. If the reference value [3] measured in the previous step
-A is +A, move the stopper [2] in the direction of the black arrow.
+A
[1] [2] [3] [2] [1] [2] [3] [2] 411) Install the Assist Stopper removed in step 4.
• 2 Screws
F-5-226
512) Install the removed parts in reverse order.
5-98
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Assist Stopper Position > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Height of Staple Inlet Guide > Procedure
5-99
Adjusting Height of Staple Inlet Guide ■■Procedure
Execute this adjustment if meeting the following conditions: 1) Set DIP SW382 [1] on the switch PCB as shown in the figure below.
• In the case of failure in tray stacking with thin paper as shown in the figure below.
[1]
• In the case of alignment fault in stapling.
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385

F-5-229
■■Preparations (-) (+) ENTER
1) Turn ON the power of the finisher. F-5-230
2) Turn ON the power of the host machine to be on to be on standby. 2) Press SW385 [1] so that the height adjustment for staple inlet guide is ready now.
SW382
DSP381
NOTE:
Refer to "Preparations 5-6" for details of step 1) to 4). SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-231
5-99
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Height of Staple Inlet Guide > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Height of Staple Inlet Guide > Procedure
5-100
3) Pressing switch SW383 [1] or SW384 [2] determines adjustment level. By pressing SW383 4) Press switch SW385 [1] again to complete this adjustment.
once, the LED [3] indicates "-1" and the staple inlet guide position [4] is moved down.
In the same way, by pressing SW384 once, the LED [3] indicates "+1" and the staple inlet SW382
DSP381
guide position [5] is moved up.
• Adjustment range: +4 to -4 (0.5mm-change per unit)
SW381
NOTE:
In the case of failure as referred to above, perform adjustment in negative direction to
clear the problem.
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER

[3]
[1]
F-5-234
SW382
SW381 DSP381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1] [2]
F-5-232
[4] [5]
F-5-233
5-100
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Height of Staple Inlet Guide > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Paddle Height > Procedure
5-101
Adjusting Paddle Height ■■Procedure
This adjustment is to be executed if any of followings occurs; tray stack failure due to thin 1) Set DIP SW382 [1] on the switch PCB as shown in the figure below.
paper, staple alignment failure. [1]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385

F-5-235
■■Preparations
(-) (+) ENTER
2) Turn ON the power of the host machine to be on to be on standby. 2) Press SW385 [1] so that the height adjustment for the paddle is ready now.
4) Remove the switch cover. SW382
DSP381
NOTE:
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-237
5-101
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Paddle Height > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Paddle Height > Procedure
5-102
3) Pressing switch SW383 [1] or SW384 [2] determines adjustment level. 4) Press switch SW385 [1] again to complete this adjustment.
By pressing SW383 once, the LED [3] indicates "-1" and the paddle position [4] is moved
down. In the same way, by pressing SW384 once, the LED [3] indicates "+1" and the SW382
DSP381
paddle position [5] is moved up.
In the case of using thin paper, perform adjustment in the direction to increase height of the
paddle position (+ direction). SW381
• Adjustment range: +12 to -2 (0.1mm-change per unit)
NOTE:
SW383 SW384 SW385
In the case of failure as referred to above, make the adjustment in negative direction to
clear the problem.
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
[3] F-5-240
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1] [2]
F-5-238
[5]
[4]
F-5-239
5-102
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Paddle Height > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjustment in the Case of Failure in Stacking Performance of Tray (upper curl) > Procedure
5-103
Performance of Tray (upper curl) 1) Set DIP SW382 [1] on the switch PCB as shown in the figure below.
Execute this adjustment in the case of failure in tray stacking (upper curl) as shown in the [1]
figure below or replacing the finisher controller PCB or when trailing edge of paper is soiled.
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
F-5-241
(-) (+) ENTER
NOTE:
F-5-242
Executing this adjustment enables the finisher to increase feeding speed at the timing
that the paper's trail edge reaches the delivery roller. 2) Press switch SW385 [1] so that this adjustment is ready now.
As a result, the trail edge of paper does not stay around the delivery outlet and the tray
stackability will improve.
SW382
DSP381
■■Preparations
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
NOTE: [1]
F-5-243
5-103
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjustment in the Case of Failure in Stacking Performance of Tray (upper curl) > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjustment in the Case of Failure in Stacking Performance of Tray (upper curl) > Procedure
5-104
[2]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-244
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-245
5-104
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjustment in the Case of Failure in Stacking Performance of Tray (upper curl) > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjustment in the Case of Failure in Stacking Performance of Tray (lower curl) > Procedure
5-105
Performance of Tray (lower curl) 1) Set DIP SW382 [1] on the switch PCB as shown in the figure below.
Execute this adjustment in the case of failure in tray stacking (lower curl) as shown in the [1]
figure below or replacing the finisher controller PCB.
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
F-5-246
(-) (+) ENTER
NOTE: F-5-247
Delivery of paper with lower-curled paper stack stacked on the tray makes the delivered 2) Press switch SW385 [1] so that this adjustment is ready now.
paper slipped along the slope of the paper stack, and this can make the delivered paper
fall from the tray.
Executing this adjustment enables to reduce feeding speed of the finisher at the timing SW382
DSP381
that the paper's trail edge reaches the delivery roller.
This operation can prevent fall of the delivered paper from the tray because of reduced
impact from kicking of delivered paper.
SW381
■■Preparations
SW383 SW384 SW385

3) Open the front cover and put the door switch tool into the door switch. [1]
NOTE:
5-105
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjustment in the Case of Failure in Stacking Performance of Tray (lower curl) > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjustment in the Case of Failure in Stacking Performance of Tray (lower curl) > Procedure
5-106
3) Pressing push switch SW384 [1] twice displays "+2" on the LED [2].
[2]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-249
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-250
5-106
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjustment in the Case of Failure in Stacking Performance of Tray (lower curl) > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjustment in the Case of Failure in Stacking Performance of Tray (run-on of paper when using thin paper) > Procedure
5-107
Performance of Tray (run-on of paper when using thin 1) Set DIP SW382 [1] on the switch PCB as shown in the figure below.
paper) [1]
Execute this adjustment in the case of failure in stacking performance of the tray when using
thin paper as shown in the figure below or replacing the finisher controller PCB. SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER

F-5-251
F-5-252
NOTE: 2) Press switch SW385 [1] so that this adjustment is ready now.
Executing this adjustment makes the finisher to reduce feeding speed of the paper.
This operation improves abovementioned failure in stacking performance of the tray SW382
DSP381
because of reduced curl-level with thin paper.
SW381
■■Preparations
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
NOTE: F-5-253
5-107
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjustment in the Case of Failure in Stacking Performance of Tray (run-on of paper when using thin paper) > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjustment in the Case of Failure in Stacking Performance of Tray (run-on of paper when using thin paper) > Procedure
5-108
[2]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-254
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-255
5-108
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjustment in the Case of Failure in Stacking Performance of Tray (run-on of paper when using thin paper) > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjustment in the Case of Canceling Limit for Tray Stack > Procedure
5-109
Adjustment in the Case of Canceling Limit for Tray ■■Preparations
Stack 1) Turn ON the power of the finisher.
Execute this adjustment in the case of canceling the limit for tray stacking of coated paper or 2) Turn ON the power of the host machine to be on to be on standby.
extra-length paper or replacing the finisher controller PCB. 3) Open the front cover and put the door switch tool into the door switch.
[B]
NOTE:
[A]
■■Procedure
[1]
[A] Normal stacking F-5-256 SW382
DSP381
[B] Stacking while stacking limit is cancelled
NOTE: SW381
This adjustment is for the lower tray only. Thus, cancellation of the stacking limit for the
upper tray is not available.
Following table shows stacking capacity for the lower tray while the stacking limit is
cancelled. SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
When stacking limit is F-5-257

Paper type At normal operation
canceled
Less than 64 1,000 sheets Up to 147 mm in height
gsm
Half 80 gsm or less 4,000 sheets Up to 490 mm in height
Plain paper
Over 80 gsm 3,000 sheets Up to 147 mm in height
Stitching 200 sets or 3,000 sheets 200 sets
80 gsm or less 4,000 sheets Up to 490 mm in height
Coated Half Over 80 gsm 3,000 sheets Up to 490 mm in height
paper Stitching 200 sets or 3,000 sheets 200 sets
T-5-10
5-109
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjustment in the Case of Canceling Limit for Tray Stack > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjustment in the Case of Canceling Limit for Tray Stack > Procedure
5-110
SW382 SW382
DSP381
DSP381
SW381 SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385 SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER (-) (+) ENTER
[1] [1]
F-5-258 F-5-260
[2]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-259
5-110
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjustment in the Case of Canceling Limit for Tray Stack > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Alignment for Saddle Stapling
5-111
Adjusting Alignment for Saddle Stapling 3) Remove the saddle inner cover (lower) [1].
• 4 screws [2]
• 1 knob [3]
CAUTION:
[3]
Do not touch the drive parts because the finisher works without the covers during
checking for this adjustment.
[2]
This adjustment is executed when replacing or installing/removing the Saddle Stapler or when [2]
[1]
staple positions (saddle delivery) are displaced at the rear side and the front side.
F-5-262
1) Open the front cover. 4) Turn ON the power of the finisher.
2) Remove the saddle inner cover (upper) [1]. 5) Turn ON the power of the host machine to be on to be on standby.
• 1 knob [2] 6) Open the front cover and put the door switch tool into the door switch.
• 2 screws [3]
[2]
NOTE:
[3]
[1] 8) Hold the lever [1] to pull out the saddle unit [2], and then open the saddle right guide [3].
[3]
[3]
F-5-261
[2]
[1]
F-5-263
5-111
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Alignment for Saddle Stapling
5-112
9) Follow the feed guide [2] to set the paper (A3 or LDR) [1]. (Be sure to push in the paper 11) Press switch SW385 [1] once so that stapling (saddle delivery) is ready now.
until it touches the positioning plate).
SW382
[2] [1]
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-266
F-5-264
10) Set DIP SW382 [1] on the switch PCB as shown in the figure below. 12) Press push switch SW384 [1] several times to execute stapling.
[1]
SW382
DSP381
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
SW383 SW384 SW385 (-) (+) ENTER
[1]
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-267
F-5-265
5-112
5
5-113
13) Press switch SW383 [1] several times to execute folding and delivery of paper. 15) Loosen the 2 screws [1] that secure the saddle stapler.
[2]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
[1]
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1] F-5-270
F-5-268 16) Adjust tilt of the saddle stapler according to the displacement amount of stapling position.
14) Using this output result, measure displacement amount [A] [B] between the stapling • If the stapling position at the rear is displaced downward as shown in step 14) (in the case
position at the front [1] and the stapling position at the rear [2]. of displacement amount [A])
In case of large displacement amount, be sure to adjust tilt of the saddle stapler by going Remedy: Move the stapler [1] in the direction of the arrow [A] to meet the specified
through the following procedure. value.
• If the stapling position at the rear is displaced upward as shown in step 14) (in the case of
[2] displacement amount [B])
[1] [1] Remedy: Move the stapler [1] in the direction of the arrow [B] to meet the specified
[B] value.
[A]
17) Reverse steps 1) to 8) and 15) so that the finisher is ready to work.
[2]
F-5-269
5-113
5
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Engagement/Disengagement Position of Saddle Disengagement Roller > Procedure
5-114
Adjusting Engagement/Disengagement Position of ■■Procedure
Saddle Disengagement Roller 1) Set DIP SW382 [1] on the switch PCB as shown in the figure below.
Execute this adjustment in the case of significant displacement in stapling [1]

position.
SW382
DSP381
NOTE:
Executing this adjustment enables gap adjustment between the disengagement roller [1]
and the paper, so that this operation improves feeding performance inside the saddle
assembly.
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
[1]
M102 (-) (+) ENTER
F-5-272
2) Press switch SW385 [1] so that this adjustment is ready now.
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
F-5-271 (-) (+) ENTER

NOTE:
5-114
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Engagement/Disengagement Position of Saddle Disengagement Roller > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Engagement/Disengagement Position of Saddle Disengagement Roller > Procedure
5-115
By pressing SW383 once, the LED [3] indicates "-1" and the pressure applied to the
disengagement roller [1] is reduced (the disengagement roller is moved in A direction). [1]
M102
In the same way, by pressing SW384 once, the LED [3] indicates "+1" and the pressure
applied to the disengagement roller [1] is increased (the disengagement roller is moved in
B direction).
• Adjustment range: -8 to +8 (0.3mm-change per unit)
[3]
SW382
A B
DSP381
SW381
F-5-275
<Reference>
SW383 SW384 SW385
As the plus adjustment value is specified, the feed performance improves.
(-) (+) ENTER

[1] [2]
F-5-274 SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-276
5) Execute booklet print from the saddle and check that there is no displacement in staple
position.
5-115
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Engagement/Disengagement Position of Saddle Disengagement Roller > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Feeding Distance of Saddle Disengagement Roller > Procedure
5-116
Adjusting Feeding Distance of Saddle Disengagement ■■Procedure
Roller 1) Set DIP SW382 [1] on the switch PCB as shown in the figure below.
Execute this adjustment in the case of displacement in staple position. [1]
NOTE:
SW382
Executing this adjustment enables to extend feeding time of paper that is executed
DSP381
before stapling (rotating time of M101 can be adjusted). With this adjustment, there will
be no abovementioned failure because this adjustment can prevent insufficient feeding
that is caused by slip of the disengagement roller [1].
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385

M101
(-) (+) ENTER
[1] F-5-278
2) Press switch SW385 [1] so that this adjustment is ready now.
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
F-5-277 (-) (+) ENTER

NOTE:
5-116
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Feeding Distance of Saddle Disengagement Roller > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Feeding Distance of Saddle Disengagement Roller > Procedure
5-117
By pressing SW384 once, the LED [3] indicates "+1" and feeding distance of the paper is
increased as shown in the figure below (+direction).
• Adjustment range: 0 to +59 (2mm-change per unit)
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1] [2]
F-5-280
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-281
5-117
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Feeding Distance of Saddle Disengagement Roller > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Side Registration of Saddle > Procedure
5-118
Adjusting Side Registration of Saddle ■■Procedure
Execute this adjustment in the case of frequent jam with the saddle stack guide. 1) Set DIP SW382 [1] on the switch PCB as shown in the figure below.
[1]
NOTE:
The cause of jam is because the edge of feeding paper is caught in the hole of this
guide due to displacement of the saddle stack guide.
SW382
DSP381
■■Preparations SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-282
NOTE:
Refer to "Preparations 5-6" for details of step 1) to 4). 2) Press switch SW385 [1] so that this adjustment is ready now.
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-283
5-118
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Side Registration of Saddle > Procedure
5-119
3) Go through the following steps to calculate displacement amount of the saddle stack guide. 3-3) Lift the upper cover [1] in the arrow direction to remove the inner cover (upper) [2].
3-1) Open the front cover [1]. • 4 screws [3]
3-2) Push the 3 claws [1], and remove the 3 knobs [2]. [2] [1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-5-284
CAUTION:
F-5-286
When the One-way Clutch [1] inside the knob is removed, be sure to install it in the
3-4) Remove the saddle inner cover (upper) [1].
direction where the arrow marking of the One-way Clutch is visible.
• 1 knob [2]
[1] • 2 screws [3]
[2]
[3]
[1]
F-5-285
[3]
F-5-287
5-119
5
5-120
3-5) Determine the actual measurement value (distance between the feed front side 5) Pressing switch SW383 [1] or SW384 [2] determines adjustment level.
plate and the saddle front side plate) using a scale. By pressing SW383 once, the LED [3] indicates "-1" and the shift unit [4] slides to the front
as shown in the figure below (- direction).
In the same way, by pressing SW384 once, the LED [3] indicates "+1" and the shift unit [4]
slides to the rear as shown in the figure below (+direction).
• Adjustment range: -10 to +10 (0.5mm-change per unit)
SW382
DSP381
SW381
[3]
[4]
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-288 [1] [2]

3-6) Calculate displacement amount of the saddle stack guide using the reference value F-5-289
(23.8mm) and the actual measurement value (displacement amount = actual
measurement value - reference value).
Example)
SW382
DSP381
In the case that the measurement value is 25mm
Displacement amount = 25 - 23.8 = 1.2mm
SW381
4) Calculate correction amount of the shift unit using the displacement amount of the saddle
stack guide.
Example)
SW383 SW384 SW385
In the case that the displacement amount is 1.2
The displacement amount in positive value means that the saddle stack guide is
(-) (+) ENTER
displaced to the rear.
1 increment changes by 0.5mm in service mode. [1]
In this case, the correction amount is +2. F-5-290
Slide the shift unit to the rear in service mode as shown below so that the feeding
paper will not be caught in the hole of the stack guide.
5-120
5
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Setting of Pressless Mode > Procedure
5-121
Setting of Pressless Mode 2) Press switch SW385 [1] so that this adjustment is ready now.
Execute this adjustment to eliminate paper wrinkle. SW382
DSP381

SW383 SW384 SW385
NOTE: [1]
3) Press push switch SW384 [1] to execute setting.

• 0: normal
■■Procedure • 1: no press (when using thin paper)
1) Set DIP SW382 [1] on the switch PCB as shown in the figure below. • 2: not used
• 3: no intermittent feeding
[1]
SW382
SW382
DSP381
DSP381
SW381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385

SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER

(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-291
[1]
F-5-293
5-121
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Setting of Pressless Mode > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Delivery Angle > Preparations
5-122
Adjusting Delivery Angle <When trailing edge leaning occurred>
* Trailing edge leaning: A stacking failure which occurs when trailing edge of paper to be
This adjustment is executed at poor stackability due to curled paper or take-up feed of paper delivered is caught at the delivery outlet depending on the delivery angle.
at delivery.
<In the case of lower curl>
F-5-297
■■Preparations
F-5-294 1) Turn ON the power of the finisher.
<When take-up feed of paper occurred> 2) Turn ON the power of the host machine to be on to be on standby.
* Take-up feed of paper: A stacking failure which occurs when a paper to be delivered pushes
a paper already delivered to a tray toward the feed direction depending on the delivery angle.
NOTE:
F-5-295
<In the case of upper curl>
F-5-296
5-122
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Delivery Angle > Preparations
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Delivery Angle > Procedure
5-123
■■Procedure 3) Press push switch SW384 [1] to execute setting.
1) Set DIP SW382 [1] on the switch PCB as shown in the figure below. SW382
DSP381
[1]
SW382 SW381
DSP381
SW383 SW384 SW385
SW381
(-) (+) ENTER
SW383 SW384 SW385 [1]

F-5-300
(-) (+) ENTER Setting range: -19 to +3
F-5-298 • In the case of lower curl: execute adjustment in - (negative) direction (delivery angle is
2) Press switch SW385 [1] so that this adjustment is ready now. increased)
• In the case of upper curl: execute adjustment in + (positive) direction (delivery angle is
SW382 reduced: feeding performance is improved)
DSP381
<In the case of lower curl, When take-up feed of paper occurred>
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-299
F-5-301
5-123
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Delivery Angle > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Setting of Tray Speed > Procedure
5-124
<In the case of upper curl, When trailing edge leaning occurred>
Setting of Tray Speed
Execute this adjustment in the case of abnormal sound when the tray is moved up/down.
■■Preparations
NOTE:
F-5-302 Refer to "Preparations 5-6" for details of step 1) to 4).
SW382 ■■Procedure
DSP381
SW381 [1]
SW382
DSP381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER SW381
[1]
F-5-303
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-304
5-124
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Setting of Tray Speed > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Setting of Tray Speed > Procedure
5-125
SW382 SW382
DSP381
DSP381
SW381 SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385 SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER (-) (+) ENTER
[1] [1]
F-5-305 F-5-307

• 0: lifting speed gets slower
• 1: lifting speed gets faster
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-306
5-125
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Setting of Tray Speed > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Changing Lower Delivery Mode > Procedure
5-126
Changing Lower Delivery Mode 2) Press switch SW385 [1] so that this adjustment is ready now.
Execute this adjustment in the case of abnormal sound when the tray is moved up/down. SW382
DSP381

SW383 SW384 SW385
NOTE: [1]
■■Procedure
[1]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-308
5-126
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Changing Lower Delivery Mode > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Changing Lower Delivery Mode > Procedure
5-127
3) Press push switch SW384 [1] to execute setting. 4) Press switch SW385 [1] again to complete this adjustment.
• 0: Normal mode
• 1: Forcible 1 sheet through delivery mode (all) SW382
DSP381
• 2: Forcible stack delivery (with buffer) mode (alignment is not performed)
• 3: Forcible stack delivery (without buffer) mode (alignment is performed on the process
tray) SW381
• 4: Forcible 1 sheet alignment delivery mode (alignment is performed on the process
tray with 1 sheet)
• 5: Forcible 1 sheet through delivery mode (plain paper only)
SW383 SW384 SW385
SW382
DSP381
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
SW381 F-5-311
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-310
NOTE:
Under normal circumstances, coated paper is delivered after having been aligned on
the process tray while normal paper is passed through to be delivered.
However, 1 sheet of coated paper is passed through to be delivered.
5-127
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Changing Lower Delivery Mode > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Setting of Stop-less Stacking > Procedure
5-128
Setting of Stop-less Stacking 2) Press switch SW385 [1] so that this adjustment is ready now.
Execute this adjustment to eliminate paper wrinkle. SW382
DSP381

SW383 SW384 SW385
NOTE: [1]

• 0: normal
■■Procedure • 1: not used
1) Set DIP SW382 [1] on the switch PCB as shown in the figure below. • 2: no press (when using thin paper)
• 3: no intermittent feeding
[1]
SW382 SW382
DSP381
DSP381
SW381 SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385 SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER (-) (+) ENTER
F-5-312
[1]
F-5-314
5-128
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Setting of Stop-less Stacking > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Hole Positions in Feeding Direction
5-129
Adjusting Hole Positions in Feeding Direction 4) Loosen the screw [1] to adjust position of the stopper plate [3] by following the scale of the
engraved line [2].
Execute this adjustment to adjust the punch hole position at paper edge. • Engraved line
Be sure to execute this adjustment for both the left and the right stopper units at the same [A]: adjustment position at the time of shipment
time. [B]: not used
[C]: scale for adjustment
1) Remove the punch unit. 1 increment shifts the punch position toward the paper edge by 1mm.
2) Remove the 2 punch stopper units [1].
• 2 screws [2] [A]
[B]
[2]
[C]
[2]
[1]
[1] [3]
F-5-317
F-5-315
3) Remove the spring [1] (1pc each). CAUTION: Point to note at installation after the adjustment
Perform installation while pushing the lower area of the stopper plate [1].
(Install with the stopper [2] pushed in the frame)
[1] [2]
[1]
F-5-316
F-5-318
5-129
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Adjusting Hole Positions in Feeding Direction
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Upper/Lower Neat Paddle position adjustment > Procedure
5-130
Upper/Lower Neat Paddle position adjustment ■■Procedure
This adjustment is executed when stacking failure occurs on the Upper Tray or Lower Tray as 1) Set DIP SW382 [1] on the Switch PCB as shown in the figure below.
shown in the figure below (paper displacement in the feed direction). [1]
<Stacking failure on the Upper Tray>

SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
F-5-319 (-) (+) ENTER

<Stacking failure on the Lower Tray>
F-5-321
2) Press the Push Switch SW385 [1] to complete preparation for the adjustment.
SW382
DSP381
SW381
■■Preparations F-5-320
SW383 SW384 SW385

[1]
NOTE:
5-130
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Upper/Lower Neat Paddle position adjustment > Procedure
5-131
3) By pressing the Push Switch SW383 [1] or SW384 [2], mode can be selected. <Adjusting the Upper Neat Paddle [1] Position>
Every time SW384 [2] is pressed, "0: Upper Neat Paddle/1: Lower Neat Paddle" is
displayed on the LED [3]. Determine the mode by pressing SW385 [4].
[3]
SW382
-
+
DSP381
SW381
[1]
SW383 SW384 SW385
F-5-325
(-) (+) ENTER <Adjusting the Lower Neat Paddle [1] Position>
[1] [2] [4]

F-5-323
4) By pressing the Push Switch SW385 [1], the adjustment value is displayed on LED [3].
Then, press SW383 [4] or SW384 [2] to change the adjustment value in increments of 1
pulse.
• Adjustment range: +7 to -7 (shift amount per unit: 1 mm)
-
+
[3]
SW382
DSP381
[1]
F-5-326
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[4] [2] [1]

F-5-324
5-131
5
5-132
5) Press the Push Switch SW385 [1] to complete the adjustment of Neat Paddle position.
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-327
5-132
5
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Punch skew tolerance adjustment mode > Procedure
5-133
Punch skew tolerance adjustment mode NOTE:
By executing this adjustment, hole position accuracy improves. On the other hand, to
prioritize productivity over skew correction, skew correction amount can be adjusted
• When displacement of hole position (within 8.5 mm) occurs and paper is skewed on the within the range.
way from when it passes through the Delivery Outlet until it is aligned with the Alignment
Plate at the time of delivery.
<Displacement of hole position> The operation procedure is shown below.
■■Preparations
NOTE:
F-5-328
■■Procedure
<When paper is skewed on the way from when it passes through the Delivery Outlet until it is
aligned with the Alignment Plate> 1) Set DIP SW382 [1] on the Switch PCB as shown in the figure below.
[1]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
[1]
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
F-5-330
F-5-329
5-133
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Punch skew tolerance adjustment mode > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Punch skew tolerance adjustment mode > Procedure
5-134
2) Press the Push Switch SW385 [1] to complete preparation for the adjustment. 4) Press the Push Switch SW385 [1] to determine skew correction amount, and complete the
adjustment.
SW382
DSP381
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
(-) (+) ENTER

[1]
F-5-331 [1]
3) By pressing the Push Switch SW383 [1] or SW384 [2], skew correction amount can be F-5-333
selected.
Every time SW384 [2] is pressed, "1: 2 mm/2: 4 mm/3: 6 mm" is displayed on the LED [3].
[3]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1] [2]
F-5-332
5-134
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Punch skew tolerance adjustment mode > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Process Tray alignment operation adjustment mode with A4R/LTRR size paper > Procedure
5-135
Process Tray alignment operation adjustment mode ■■Procedure
with A4R/LTRR size paper 1) Set DIP SW382 [1] on the Switch PCB as shown in the figure below.
Execute the adjustment in the following cases. [1]

• When prioritizing productivity of A4R and LTRR size paper with the Lower Tray (without
inner punching) SW382
DSP381
NOTE:
By executing this adjustment, alignment operation at the Process Tray Assembly is
omitted; therefore, productivity is prioritized over stacking accuracy. SW381
The operation procedure is shown below. SW383 SW384 SW385
■■Preparations (-) (+) ENTER
F-5-334
1) Turn ON the power of the finisher. 2) Press the Push Switch SW385 [1] to complete preparation for the adjustment.
3) Open the front cover and put the door switch tool into the door switch. SW382
DSP381
NOTE: SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-335
5-135
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Process Tray alignment operation adjustment mode with A4R/LTRR size paper > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Side registration position fine adjustment mode (shift amount change) > Preparations
5-136
3) By pressing the Push Switch SW383 [1] or SW384 [2], mode can be selected.
Side registration position fine adjustment mode (shift
Every time SW384 [2] is pressed, "0: Deliver as a stack after aligning on the Process
Tray/1: Deliver as a stack without aligning on the Process Tray" is displayed on LED [3]. amount change)
[3] Execute the adjustment in the following cases.
• When paper corner is bent or caught with custom size paper
SW382 NOTE:
DSP381
By executing this adjustment, shift amount at the time of delivery is adjusted so that
paper corner bend or paper being caught in the Finisher can be avoided.
SW381
The operation procedure is shown below.
SW383 SW384 SW385

■■Preparations
(-) (+) ENTER
[1] [2] 2) Turn ON the power of the host machine to be on to be on standby.
F-5-336 3) Open the front cover and put the door switch tool into the door switch.
4) Press the Push Switch SW385 [1] to determine the mode, and complete the adjustment.
SW382
NOTE:
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
F-5-337
5-136
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Side registration position fine adjustment mode (shift amount change) > Preparations
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Side registration position fine adjustment mode (shift amount change) > Procedure
5-137
■■Procedure 3) By pressing the Push Switch SW383 [1] or SW384 [2], mode can be selected.
Every time SW384 [2] is pressed, "A: Mode setting/B: Adjustment value setting" is displayed
1) Set DIP SW382 [1] on the Switch PCB as shown in the figure below.
on LED [3].
[1] Display [A] on LED [3] (select the mode setting mode).
4) Press the Push Switch SW385 [1] to determine the mode.
SW382 [3]
DSP381
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER

SW383 SW384 SW385
F-5-338
2) Press the Push Switch SW385 [1] to complete preparation for the adjustment.
(-) (+) ENTER
SW382 [1] [2] [4]

DSP381
F-5-340
5) By pressing the Push Switch SW383 [1] or SW384 [2], mode setting can be changed.
SW381
Every time SW384 [2] is pressed, "0: Disabled/1: Enabled stitching only/2: Enabled non-
stitching only/3: Enabled stitching/non-stitching" is displayed on LED [3].
SW383 SW384 SW385 [3]
(-) (+) ENTER

SW382
DSP381
[1]
F-5-339
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1] [2] [4]

F-5-341
5-137
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Side registration position fine adjustment mode (shift amount change) > Procedure
5 Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Side registration position fine adjustment mode (shift amount change) > Procedure
5-138
7) Press the Push Switch SW383 [1] or SW384 [2], and display "B" on LED [3] (select the <In the case of shifting to the rear side>
adjustment value setting mode).
15mm～11mm
[3]
SW382
DSP381
SW381
SW383 SW384 SW385
F-5-344
(-) (+) ENTER 10) Press the Push Switch SW385 [1] to determine the shift amount, and complete the
adjustment.
[1] [2] [4]
F-5-342
SW382
9) Press SW383 [1] or SW384 [2], and adjust the shift amount in increments of 1 pulse.
DSP381
• Adjustment range: 0 to -40 (shift amount per unit: 0.1 mm)
Example) When the adjustment value is -40, the shift amount is decreased by 4 mm.
• +/-15 to +/-11 mm (Default: +/-15 mm) SW381
[3]
SW383 SW384 SW385

SW382
DSP381
(-) (+) ENTER
[1]
SW381
F-5-345
SW383 SW384 SW385
(-) (+) ENTER
[1] [2]
F-5-343
5-138
5
Adjustment > Auxiliary Adjustment > Side registration position fine adjustment mode (shift amount change) > Procedure
6 Troubleshooting
■
■Upgrading
6
Troubleshooting
6 Troubleshooting > Upgrading > Upgrading
6-2
Upgrading
Upgrading
Perform upgrade of this machine by connecting a copy machine.
Refer to the service manual of imagePRESS C7000 Series for a detailed procedure.
6-2
6
Troubleshooting > Upgrading > Upgrading
6 Troubleshooting > Drive/Sensor check > Motor,Solenoid
6-3
Drive/Sensor check DIPSW(SW382) Name details

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- - - - On - On - M9 Front alignment After pressing ENTER to start the
Motor,Solenoid motor motor, use +/- to move 20 mm. Press
ENTER again to terminate the motor
(Home).
DIPSW(SW382) Name details
- - - - On - On On M10 Rear alignment After pressing ENTER to start the
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 motor motor, use +/- to move 20 mm. Press
- - - - - - - On M9 Inlet feed motor After pressing ENTER to start the ENTER again to terminate the motor
motor, use +/- to switch the speed. (Home).
Press ENTER again to terminate the - - - - On On - - M17 Feed belt move After pressing ENTER to start the
motor. 300 to 1500 mm/s (in units of motor motor, use + (escape position) /-
100 mm/s, default: 500 mm/s) (Home). Press ENTER again to
- - - - - - On - M2 Shift feed motor After pressing ENTER to start the terminate the motor (Home). The
motor, use +/- to switch the speed. escape position is located 36 pls from
Press ENTER again to terminate the Home.
motor. 300 to 1500 mm/s (in units of - - - - On On - On M14 Paddle rotation After pressing ENTER to start the
100 mm/s, default: 500 mm/s) motor motor, use + (2 rotations)/- (1 rotation).
- - - - - - On On M3 Buffer front feed After pressing ENTER to start the Press ENTER again to terminate the
motor motor, use +/- to switch the speed. motor (Home).
Press ENTER again to terminate the - - - - On On On On M15 Paddle lift motor After pressing ENTER to start the
motor. 300 to 1500 mm/s (in units of motor, use + (Up)/- (Down). Press
100 mm/s, default: 500 mm/s) ENTER again to terminate the motor.
- - - - - On - - M4 Buffer motor After pressing ENTER to start the It is lifted and lowered from home
motor, use +/- to switch the speed. position in units of 20 pls in the range
Press ENTER again to terminate the of 0 to 100 pls.
motor. 300 to 1500 mm/s (in units of - - - On - - - - M13 Stack delivery After pressing ENTER to start the
100 mm/s, default: 500 mm/s) auxiliary tray motor motor, the tray moves from an auxiliary
- - - - - On - On M5 Delivery motor After pressing ENTER to start the position to middle position to HP every
motor, use +/- to switch the speed. time ENTER is pressed. The motor is
Press ENTER again to terminate the then terminated.
motor. 300 to 1500 mm/s (in units of - - - On - - - On M12 Assist motor After pressing ENTER to start the
100 mm/s, default: 500 mm/s) motor, use + (to push paper stack)/- (to
- - - - - On On - M26 Processing feed After pressing ENTER to start the move to Home). Press ENTER again
motor motor, use +/- to switch the speed. to terminate the motor.
Press ENTER again to terminate the - - - On - - On - M16 Paper trailing edge After pressing ENTER to start
motor. 300 to 1500 mm/s (in units of drop motor the motor, the motor terminates
100 mm/s, default: 500 mm/s) automatically (Home).
- - - - - On On On M19 Stack delivery motor After pressing ENTER to start the - - - On - - On On M11 Processing stopper After pressing ENTER to start the
motor, use +/- to switch the speed. move motor motor, use + to move to the 1-staple
Press ENTER again to terminate position in units of 10 mm in the range
the motor. 200 1500mm/s(100mm/s of 0 to 50 mm. Use - to move to the
default: 500mm/s) 2-staple position. Press Enter again to
- - - - On - - - M18 Swing guide motor Press ENTER to enter the mode, and terminate the motor (Home).
use + (Open)/-(Close). Press ENTER - - - On - On - - M21 Staple move motor After pressing ENTER to start the
to terminate the mode (Close). motor, use +/- to move in units of 50
mm in the range of 60 to 400 mm.
Press ENTER again to terminate the
motor (Home).
6-3
6
Troubleshooting > Drive/Sensor check > Motor,Solenoid
6-4
DIPSW(SW382) Name details DIPSW(SW382) Name details
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- - - On - On - On - Staple clinch - - On - - On - - FM6
Lower Delivery Fan After pressing ENTER to start the
- - - On - On On - M7 Horizontal After pressing ENTER to start the fan, use +/- to operate it in units of
registration shift motor, use + (rear)/- (front) to move 5.8*(5*(10/255)) [V] in the range of
motor 15 mm (3 locations at rear, center and 0 to 29 [V]. Press ENTER again to
front). Press ENTER again to terminate terminate the fan.
the motor (Home). - - On - - On On On M201 Stack Retainer "After pressing ENTER to start the
- - - On - On On On M6 Horizontal After pressing ENTER to start the Motor motor, use + to select the mode (A:
registration detection motor, use + to perform detection Operation check/B: HP adjustment/C:
unit move motor (to move maximum of 14 mm in the Pressure adjustment/D: Middle position
direction of paper edge) or - to move to adjustment/E: Corrugation position
the position which is 80 mm from HP. adjustment)
Press ENTER again to terminate the Operation check: Every press of
motor (Home). ENTER changes the position as
- - - On On - - - M8 Feed roller After pressing ENTER to start follows; stack retaining position =>
disengage motor the motor, use + (to engage)/- (to HP => middle position => HP =>
disengage). Press ENTER again to corrugation position => HP. Then, the
terminate the motor (Home). operation check is terminated.
- - - On On - - On M20 Upper guide motor After pressing ENTER to start the HP adjustment: Use +/- to adjust the
motor, use + (Up)/- (Home). Press position in units of 1 pls. Press ENTER
ENTER again to terminate the motor again to terminate the adjustment. The
(Home). range of values: +/-3
- - - On On - On - M24 Punch motor After pressing ENTER to start the Pressure adjustment: Use +/- to
motor, use + (to punch)/- (to switch adjust the pressure in units of 3 pls.
between 2/3-hole or 2/4-hole). Press Press ENTER again to terminate the
ENTER again to terminate the motor. adjustment. The range of values: +/-9
Middle position adjustment: Use +/-
- - - On On - On On M28 Delivery angle After pressing ENTER to start the
to adjust the position in units of 3 pls.
adjustment motor motor, use + (through delivery angle)/-
(stack delivery angle). Press ENTER
adjustment. The range of values: +/-9
again to terminate the motor (Home).
Corrugation position adjustment: Use
- - - On On On - - M27 Inlet roller disengage After pressing ENTER to start
+/- to adjust the position in units of 1
motor the motor, use + (to engage)/- (to
pls. Press ENTER again to terminate
disengage). Press ENTER again to
the adjustment. The range of values: -6
terminate the motor (Home).
to 12
- - On - - - - - M22 Tray A lift motor After pressing ENTER to start the
"
motor, use + (Down)/- (Up) to move 20
- - On - On - - - M202 "Upper Neat Stack After pressing ENTER to start the
mm. Press ENTER again to terminate
M205 Unit Front Alignment motor, use + to select upper or lower
the motor.
Moter (0: Upper Neat/1: Lower Neat).
- - On - - - - On M23 Tray B lift motor After pressing ENTER to start the
Lower Neat Stack Every press of ENTER changes
motor, use + (Down)/- (Up) to move 20
Unit Front Alignment the operation as follows; Alignment
mm. Press ENTER again to terminate
Moter" Plate phase alignment => Alignment
the motor.
Plate positioning => Alignment Plate
- - On - - - On On FM5 Upper Delivery Fan After pressing ENTER to start the initialization Then, use +/- to move 21
fan, use +/- to operate it in units of mm. Press ENTER again to terminate
5.8*(5*(10/255)) [V] in the range of the motor.
0 to 29 [V]. Press ENTER again to
terminate the fan.
6-4
6
6-5
DIPSW(SW382) Name details DIPSW(SW382) Name details
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- - On - On - - On M203 "Upper Neat Stack After pressing ENTER to start the - - On On - - - On M105 Saddle paper push- After pressing ENTER to start the
M206 Unit Rear Alignment motor, use + to select upper or lower on plate motor motor, use + to conduct push-on
Moter (0: Upper Neat/1: Lower Neat). operation. Press ENTER again to
Lower Neat Stack Every press of ENTER changes terminate the motor. (NOTE: Push-
Unit Rear Alignment the operation as follows; Alignment on is not performed unless the Roller
Moter" Plate phase alignment => Alignment Guide is in HP.)
Plate positioning => Alignment Plate - - On On - - On - M109 Stitcher motor After pressing ENTER to start the
initialization Then, use +/- to move 21 motor, use + to move to the standby
mm. Press ENTER again to terminate position of A3 (250 mm/s) or - to
the motor. perform press operation (100 mm/s).
- - On - On - On On M204 "Upper Neat Stack After pressing ENTER to start the Press ENTER again to terminate the
M207 Unit Alignment Plate motor, use + to select upper or lower motor.
Lifting Motor (0: Upper Neat/1: Lower Neat). - - On On - - On On M101 Saddle transport After pressing ENTER to start the
Lower Neat Stack Every press of ENTER changes the motor motor (665 mm/s), use +/- to switch
Unit Alignment Plate operation as follows; Alignment Plate the speed (between 665 mm/s and
Lifting Motor" phase alignment => Alignment Plate 250 mm/s). Press ENTER again to
positioning Then, use + to move to the terminate the motor.
alignment position or - to move to the - - On On - On - - M104 Saddle guide motor Press ENTER to enter the mode, and
shift position. Press ENTER again to use + (Open)/-(Close). Press ENTER
terminate the motor. again to terminate the mode (Open).
- - On - On On - - M208 "Lower Neat Stack After pressing ENTER to start the - - On On - On - On M103 Saddle lead edge After pressing ENTER to start the
M209 Unit Return Roller motor, use + to move to the return stopper motor motor, use +/- to move in units of 20
Lifting Motor position or - to move to the standby mm in the range of 0 to 200 mm. Press
Upper Neat Stack position. Press ENTER again to ENTER again to terminate the motor
Unit Return Roller terminate the motor. (Home).
Lifting Motor" - - On On - On On - M102 Saddle alignment After pressing ENTER to start the
- - On - On On On - SL1 "Buffer path switch "After pressing ENTER, the solenoid guide motor motor, use +/- to move in units of 10
SL2 solenoid turns ON/OFF in the following order, mm in the range of 0 to 100 mm. Press
SL10 Upper path switch and then automatically terminates. ENTER again to terminate the motor
SL11 solenoid (1) Upper Path/Lower Path Switch (Home).
Assist Roller Flapper (2) Buffer Path Flapper (3) - - On On - On On On M114 Saddle lead-in roller After pressing ENTER to start the
Disengagement Assist Roller Solenoid" disengage motor motor, use + to engage (in 2 stages,
Solenoid 1 switched alternately) or - to disengage.
Assist Roller Press ENTER again to terminate the
Disengagement motor (Home).
Solenoid 2 - - On On On - - - M107 Saddle delivery belt After pressing ENTER to start the
" motor motor, use + to rotate clockwise or - to
- - On On - - - - M106 Saddle folder/feeder After pressing ENTER to start the rotate counterclockwise. Press ENTER
motor motor, use + to accelerate clockwise again to stop the rotation and terminate
in units of 30 mm/s in the range of 175 the motor.
to 295 mm/s, or - to switch the rotation - - On On On - - On M109 Saddle sticher motor Press ENTER to start clinch operation,
direction. Press ENTER to terminate which then terminates automatically.
the motor.
- - On On On - On - M113 Saddle tapping After pressing ENTER to start the
motor motor, use + to tap or - to escape.
motor.
6-5
6
6 Troubleshooting > Drive/Sensor check > Sensor
6-6
DIPSW(SW382) Name details Sensor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- - On On On - On On M111 Saddle trailing edge After pressing ENTER to start the
moving motor motor, use +/- to move in units of 20
DIPSW(SW382)
mm in the range of 0 to 80 mm. Press
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ENTER again to terminate the motor
(Home). - On - On - - - -
T-6-2
- - On On On On - - M112 Saddle alignment After pressing ENTER to start the display Name Lit Blinking
roller motor motor (665 mm/s), use +/- to switch
1 PS1 Front door sensor Closed Open
the speed (180 mm/s, 250 mm/s and
2 PS2 Upper cover sensor Closed Open
665 mm/s). Press ENTER again to
3 PS3 Inlet sensor Paper present Paper absent
terminate the motor.
4 PS4 Shift unit trailing edge sensor Paper present Paper absent
- - On On On On - On M110 Saddle trailing edge After pressing ENTER to start
holding motor the motor, use + (to engage)/- (to 5 PS5 Upper delivery sensor Paper present Paper absent
disengage). Press ENTER again to 6 PS6 Lower delivery sensor Paper present Paper absent
terminate the motor. 7 PS7 Horizontal registration detection unit HP HP Other than HP
- - On On On On On - - After pressing ENTER, initialization is sensor
performed. 8 PS8 Shift roller unit HP sensor HP Other than HP
- - On On On On On On SL3 "Saddle path switch "After pressing ENTER, the solenoid 9 PS9 Feed roller HP sensor HP Other than HP
SL103 solenoid turns ON/OFF in the following order, A UN22 Lower path sensor PCB Paper present Paper absent
SL104 Alignment roller and then automatically terminates. b PS43 Inlet roller HP sensor HP Other than HP
SL105 disengage solenoid (1) Lower Path/Saddle Path Switch T-6-3
(upper) Flapper (2) Alignment Roller Solenoid
Alignment roller (Upper) (3) Alignment Roller Solenoid DIPSW(SW382)
disengage solenoid (Lower) (4) Leading Edge Gripper 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(lower) Solenoid" - On - On - - - On
Lead edge gripper
T-6-4
solenoid display Name Lit Blinking
" 1 PS11 Front alignment HP sensor HP Other than HP
- On - - On On On On - folding opration After pressing ENTER to start fold 2 PS12 Rear alignment HP sensor HP Other than HP
operation , press + or -. Then, place 3 PS13 Processing tray HP sensor HP Other than HP
paper on the Saddle Unit. When 4 PS14 Stack delivery auxiliary tray HP sensor HP Other than HP
pressing -, stack processing starts. 5 PS15 Paper edge area sensor 1 Detected Not detected
Press ENTER to terminate the
6 PS16 Paper edge area sensor 2 Detected Not detected
operation (the size is A3).
7 PS17 Processing tray paper sensor Paper present Paper absent
T-6-1
8 PS45 Delivery angle HP sensor HP Other than HP
9 - - - -
A PS20 Paddle rotation HP sensor HP Other than HP
T-6-5
6-6
6
Troubleshooting > Drive/Sensor check > Sensor
6-7
DIPSW(SW382) DIPSW(SW382)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- On - On - - On - - On - On - On - On
T-6-6 T-6-10
display Name Lit Blinking display Name Lit Blinking
1 PS21 Paddle lift HP sensor HP Other than HP 1 PS101 Saddle inlet sensor Paper present Paper absent
2 PS44 Swing guide HP sensor HP Other than HP 2 - - -
3 - - - - 3 PS112 Saddle delivery sub tray paper sensor HP Other than HP
4 PS24 Paper trailing edge drop guide HP HP Other than HP 4 PS103 Saddle vertical path sensor Paper present Paper absent
sensor 5 - - -
5 PS9 Feed roller HP sensor HP Other than HP 6 PS105 Saddle lead edge stopper HP sensor HP Other than HP
6 PS26 Upper guide HP sensor HP Other than HP 7 PS106 Saddle alignment plate HP sensor HP Other than HP
7 PS27 Staple HP sensor HP Other than HP 8 PS107 Saddle roller guide HP sensor HP Other than HP
T-6-7 9 PS108 Saddle paper push-on plate HP sensor HP Other than HP
A PS111 Saddle delivery tray paper sensor 2 Paper present Paper absent
DIPSW(SW382) T-6-11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- On - On - - On On DIPSW(SW382)
T-6-8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
display Name Lit Blinking
- On - On - On On -
1 PS32 Tray A paper sensor Paper present Paper absent
T-6-12
2 PS33 Tray B paper sensor Paper present Paper absent display Name Lit Blinking
3 - - - - 1 - - -
4 - - - - 2 PS110 Saddle press HP sensor HP Other than HP
5 - - - - 3 PS109 Saddle press front sensor Detected Not detected
6 - - - - 4 PS117 Saddle delivery tray paper sensor 1 Paper present Paper absent
7 PS50 Upper Tray Fourth Position Sensor Detected Not detected 5 PS111 Saddle delivery tray paper sensor 2 Paper present Paper absent
8 PS49 Upper Tray Third Position Sensor Detected Not detected 6 - - - -
9 PS51 Lower Tray First Position Sensor Detected Not detected 7 - - -
A - - - - 8 - - - -
b PS52 Lower Tray Third Position Sensor Detected Not detected T-6-13
c PS53 Lower Tray Fourth Position Sensor Detected Not detected
T-6-9
6-7
6
6-8
DIPSW(SW382)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- On - On - On On On
T-6-14
1 - -
2 - -
3 - -
4 - -
5 - -
6 - -
7 - -
8 - -
9 - Connected Not connected
T-6-15
DIPSW(SW382)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
On - - - - - - -
T-6-16
1 UN13 Buffer path 1 sensor PCB OK NG
2 UN14 Buffer path 2 sensor PCB OK NG
3 UN22 Lower path sensor PCB OK NG
4 UN24 Horizontal registration sensor PCB OK NG
7 UN15 UN16 Light-receiving section (Middle): OK NG
UN16 Paper surface detection
8 UN15 UN16 Light-receiving section (Upper): OK NG
UN16 Paper leaning detection
9 UN15 UN16 Light-receiving section (Lower): OK NG
UN16 Paper stop position detection
A UN17 UN18 Light-receiving section (Middle): OK NG
UN18 Paper surface detection
b UN17 UN18 Light-receiving section (Upper): OK NG
UN18 Paper leaning detection
c UN17 UN18 Light-receiving section (Lower): OK NG
UN18 Paper stop position detection
T-6-17
6-8
6
7 Installation
■
■How to check this
Installation Procedure
■
■Checking Before
Installation
■
■Unpacking and Checking
the Contents
■
■Installation Procedure
■
■Making Adjustments
■
■Operation Check F-7-1
■
■Machine Relocation Work
7
Installation
7 Installation > Product Name
7-2
How to check this Installation Procedure Product Name

Safety regulations require the product's name to be registered. In some regions where this
product is sold, the following names may be registered instead.
When Using the Parts included in the package • F710300
A symbol is described on the illustration in the case of using the parts included in the package
of this product.
Packaged Item
F-7-2
Symbols in the Illustration

The frequently-performed operations are described with symbols in this procedure.
Screw Connector Harness
Tighten Remove Connect Disconnect Secure Free
Claw
Insert Remove Push Plug in Turn on
Checking instruction
Check Visual Check Sound Check

F-7-3
7-2
7
Installation > Product Name
7 Installation > Checking Before Installation > Checking the Unpacking Space
7-3
Checking Before Installation 2) The following space is needed in the case of using slope board.
• Palette
• Slope
Checking the Unpacking Space • Equipment
Dimension deseribed in the figure below indicates minimum space needed for installation Palette Slope Equipment
area. Thus, a space for installation work is desirable to be larger than what is described
below.
1) In the case of unpacking in the room, the following space is needed to unpack.
1316mm
1021mm 914mm 840mm
2775mm
2776mm
F-7-5
1460mm
1021mm 907mm
F-7-4
7-3
7
Installation > Checking Before Installation > Checking the Unpacking Space
7 Installation > Checking the Contents
7-4
Checking the Contents [1]*1 Finisher 1pc [2] Latch Plate (Front) 1pc
[3] Latch Plate (Rear) 1pc [4] Postioning Pin 1pc
2 [13] [5] Card Spacer 2pc [6] Delivery Guide Up 1pc
[9] [10] [11]
[7] Delivery Guide Down 1pc [8] Screw (P tightening;M4x12) 2pc
[9] ARCNET Cable 1pc [10] Coaxial Connector 1pc
[11] Shant Cable 1pc [12] Wire Saddle 1pc
[13]*2 Screw (RS tightening;M4x10) 10pc [14]*3 Guide Map Label 1pc
[15]*4 Guide Map Label 1pc [16] Staple Label 1pc
[17]*4 LED Lamp Label (EUR only) 1pc [18]*4 Saddle Return Attention Label 1pc
[19]*5 Power Cord 3pc [20] Power Cord (USA only) 1pc
[12]
[5] [21] Staple Cartridge 1pc [22]*4 Saddle Staple Cartridge 1pc
[8] [6]
[3]
*1: The figure shows Booklet Finisher-Q1 PRO.
1 [1]
*2: Use 7 Screws when connecting the Host Machine.
[4]
: Use8 Screws whenConnecting the Profesional Puncher Integration Unit or the Paper
Folding Unit or the Document Insertion Unit.
[2] [7] *3: Includeed with Staple Finisher-Q1 PRO only.
*4: Included with Booklet Finisher -Q1 PRO only
*5: Used for Eur destination only. Use the appropriate Power Cord according to the country/
region to install. Be sure to bring back the unused Power Cordes
< CD/Guide :Booklet Finisher-Q1 PRO>

• FCC/IC Sheet (USA only)
• Perchlorate Notice
3 [14] 4 [15] 4 [17] 4 [18] • Note when unpacking Finisher
[16]
• Notice of Battery disposal Information (Taiwan) (Other then USA and CAN.)
< CD/Guide :Booklet Staple Finisher-Q1 PRO>

• Note when unpacking Finisher
5 [19]
[21] 4 [22] • Notice of Battery disposal Information (Taiwan) (Other then USA and CAN.)
[20]
F-7-6
7-4
7
Installation > Checking the Contents
7 Installation > Unpacking Procedure
7-5
Unpacking Procedure 3) Remove the packing material on the top of this equipment and bring down the plastic to the
bottorn.
1) Remove the packaging box. Packing Material
2) Take the included package out.
CAUTION:
To unpack the Host Mashine, depends on the holding position, can cause the
transformation of the Host Machine, or even breakage. Don't hold it by the
transportation guide.
Transportation Guide
Plastic Material
F-7-8
4) Lift up one side to remove the packaging material at the bottom, move the plastic material
to one side and slowly bring the equipment down..
F-7-7
Packing Material
Packing Material
F-7-9
7-5
7
Installation > Unpacking Procedure
7 Installation > Unpacking Procedure
7-6
5) Lift the other side as well and remove the packaging and plastic materials. 7) Remove the 2 pin attached to the backside of the slope plates with tape.
Pins
F-7-12
Packing Material Plastic Material

8) Turn the slope plates over. Fit the plalettes to the pin hples on the slope plates and insert
F-7-10
yhe 2 pins.
6) Move the equipment in the direction of the arrow [A] and take out the 2 slope stored at the Pins
center of the palette in the direction of the arow [B].
[A]
Slope Plates
[B]
F-7-13
F-7-11
7-6
7
Installation > Unpacking Procedure
7 Installation > Turning OFF the Power Switch
7-7
9) Along the slope, slide the equip carefull from the palette.
Turning OFF the Power Switch
CAUTION: Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

Check that the main power is OFF.
1) Turning off the Main Power Supply Switch of the Host Machine.
2) Check that the display on the Control Panel and the Main Power Supply Lamp are
turned off before disconnecting the outlet.
CAUTION: Proper order to turn ON the power when pickup/delivery accessories are
connected.
Be sure to follow the correct order to turn ON the power otherwise it may cause an error
because the host machine fails to recognize the accessories including the equipment.
< Power ON procedure >
1) Accessories (the equipment and other accessories))
2) Host Machine
F-7-14
NOTE:
There is no power ON order among accessories.
7-7
7
Installation > Turning OFF the Power Switch
7 Installation > Installation Procedure > Before Installing the Finisher
7-8
Installation Procedure NOTE:

Step 3) and 4) are needed to be performed only for the Saddle Stitch Finisher.
Before Installing the Finisher

3) Pull out the Saddle Unit and remove the packing tapes.
1) Remove all the tapes and cardboards attached to the equipment. Packing Tapes
F-7-15
2) Open the Finisher Front Cover. F-7-17
4) Put the Saddle Unit back.
F-7-16
7-8
7
Installation > Installation Procedure > Before Installing the Finisher
7 Installation > Installation Procedure > Before Installing the Finisher
7-9
5) Remove the Screw on the Latch Plate (Front). (The removed Screw will be used when 7) Remove the screw on the Latch Plate (Rear) and bring the hinge down toward the front. (The
connecting the upstream equipment.) removed Screw will be used when connecting the upstream equipment.)
Latch Plate (Rear) Screw
Latch Plate(Front)
F-7-20
F-7-18
6) Remove the Rear Small Cover.

• 1 Screw
Screw
Rear Small Cover
F-7-19
7-9
7
Installation > Installation Procedure > Before Installing the Finisher
7 Installation > Installation Procedure > Connecting with the Host Machine
7-10
NOTE: Connecting with the Host Machine

The following procedure is required only when options other than the Host machine are
connected.
CAUTION:
Be sure the power of the Host Machine is turned OFF and the Power Plug is
disconnected from the outlet.
8) Be sure to affix the Cover Spacer by beginning at the center of range A.
CAUTION: 1) Remove the Left Rear Cover.

• 1 Claw
Be careful not to make a gap for B.
• 1 Protrusion
Claw
Protrusion
F-7-22
F-7-21
7-10
7
Installation > Installation Procedure > Connecting with the Host Machine
7-11
2) Remove 3 Face Plates. 3) On the Host machine's upper left side cover, install the Latch Plate (Front) Latch Plate
(Rear).
• 4 Screws (RS tightening; M4x10)
CAUTION:
Confirm the engraved mark on each Latch Plate when attaching.
Latch Plate (Front) : F
Latch Plate (Rear) : R
Face Plate Face Plate x4

Latch Plate (Rear) Latch Plate (Front)
F-7-23
Latch Plate (Rear)
Screw
Latch Plate (Front)

Screw
F-7-24
7-11
7
7-12
4) Fit the positioning pin. 7) Lock the Latch Plate (Front). Then, fit the positioning pin on the machine side to the
• 2 Screws (RS tightening; M4x10) Finisher's positioning hole.Connect the Finisher with the machine.
<Front side>
Latch Plate(Front)
Positioning
Pin
x2
F-7-27
Positioning Pin
<Rear side>
Screw
F-7-25
5) Install the Delivery Guide Up to the Host Machine.
• 3 Hooks
• 1 Screw (P tightening; M4x12)
6) Install the Delivery Guide Down to the Host Machine.

• 2 Hooks
• 1 Screw (P tightening; M4x12)
Hook
Positioning Pin Hole
x2 Hook
F-7-28
Delivery Guide Up
Hook
Hook
Delivery Guide Down
F-7-26
7-12
7
7-13
8) Fix the front Latch Plate (Front). 10) Lift up the rear Latch Base (Rear) to fit the pin and fix it.
• 1 Screw (Use the Screw removed in the step 5) of "Before Installing Finisher" ) • 1 Screw (Use the Screw removed in the step 7) of "Before Installing Finisher" )
Latch Plate(Rear)
Latch Plate(Front)
Screw
Screw
F-7-30
F-7-29
9) Shut the Front Cover of the Finisher.
7-13
7
7-14
11) Check the height between Finisher and the Host Machine.
CAUTION:
Height difference should be within +/-2 mm. Execute "Height Adjustment" if the
difference is +/-2 mm or more.
Host Machine
Finisher
F-7-32
14) Install the Shunt Cable.
F-7-31
• 1 Screw (The Screw remove in step 13).)
• 1 Screw (RS tighting; M4x10)
12) Attach the Rear Small Cover.
• 1 Screw
x2
13) Remove the Screw on the rear lower of the Host Machine. (Removed Screw will be
Shunt Cable
used in step 14).)
F-7-33
7-14
7
7 Installation > Installation Procedure > Connecting with the Professional Puncher Integration Unit
7-15
Connecting with the Professional Puncher Integration
Unit
CAUTION:
x4
Latch Plate (Rear) Latch Plate (Front)
1) Attach the Latch Plate (Front) and Latch Plate (Rear) to the left side of the Integration unit
upper left stay.
• 4 Screws (RS tighting; M4x10)
CAUTION:
F-7-34
7-15
7
Installation > Installation Procedure > Connecting with the Professional Puncher Integration Unit
7-16
<Rear side>
2) Install positioning Screw.
Positioning
Pin
x2
F-7-37
4) Fix the Latch Base (Front).

• 1 Screw (Use the Screw removed in the step 5) of "Before Installing Finisher" )
F-7-35
3) Lock the Latch Plate (Front) to the cover. Then, fit the positioning pin of the Integration Unit
to the positioning plate hole on the Finisher to connect.
<Front side>
Screw Latch Plate(Front)
F-7-38
Latch Plate(Front)
F-7-36
7-16
7
7-17
5) Close the Front Cover of the Finisher. 8) Install the Rear Small Cover.
6) Move the Latch Plate (Rear) on the direction of the arrow and insert it to the pin to fix it. • 1 Screw
Latch Plate(Rear) Screw

x2
F-7-39
Shunt Cable
7) Check the height between Finisher and the Integration Unit.
F-7-41
CAUTION:
Integration Unit
Finisher
F-7-40
7-17
7
7 Installation > Installation Procedure > Connecting with the Paper Folding Unit
7-18
Connecting with the Paper Folding Unit
2) Fit the positioning pin.
• 2 Screws (RS tightening; M4x10)
CAUTION:
1) On the Paper Folding Unit's upper left side, install the Latch Plate (Front) Latch Plate (Rear).
x2
CAUTION:
Positoning Pin
F-7-43
3) Remove the Rear Cover.

• 2 Screws (Loosen)
• 6 Screws
x4
Latch Plate(Rear) Latch Plate(Front)
x6
F-7-42
F-7-44
7-18
7
Installation > Installation Procedure > Connecting with the Paper Folding Unit
7-19
CAUTION:
4) Lock the Latch Plate (Front) to the cover. Then, fit the positioning pin of the Paper Folding
Unit to the positioning plate hole on the Finisher to connect. When connecting the inner side, take caution not to get the cable pinched.
<Front side>
Latch Plate(Front)
F-7-47
F-7-45
<Rear side>
5) Secure the Latch Base (Front).

• 1 Screw (Use the Screw removed in the step 5) "Before Installing Finisher" )
F-7-46
F-7-48
6) Close the Front Cover of the Finisher.
7-19
7
7-20
7) Move the Latch Mount (Rear) in the direction of the arrow and insert it to the pin to fix it. 9) Insert the connector to the Finisher Controller PCB, and fix the cable.
• 1 Screw (Use the Screw removed in the step 7)) "Before Installing the Finisher" ) • 2 Wire Saddles
Wire Saddles
Latch Plate(rear)
Screw
x2
Connector
F-7-49
F-7-51
8) Fix the cable.

10) Check the height between Finisher and the Paper Folding Unit.
• 2 Reuse Band
• 2 spots Edge Saddle CAUTION:
Reuse Band difference is +/-2 mm or more.
x2
Paper Folding Unit
Finisher
Edge Saddle
F-7-50
F-7-52
7-20
7
7 Installation > Installation Procedure > Connecting with the Document Insertion Unit
7-21
Connecting with the Document Insertion Unit
11) Install the Rear Cover.
• 8 Screws
CAUTION:
12) Install the Shunt Cable. disconnected from the outlet.
1) On the Document Insertion Unit upper left side, install the Latch Plate (Front) Latch Plate
(Rear).
CAUTION:
x2
Shunt Cable
F-7-53
x4
Latch Plate(Rear) Latch Plate(Front)
F-7-54
7-21
7
Installation > Installation Procedure > Connecting with the Document Insertion Unit
7-22
<Rear side>
2) Install positioning Screw.
x2
F-7-57
Positioning Pin 4) Secure the Latch Plate (Front).

F-7-55
3) Lock the Latch Base (Front) to the cover. Then, fit the positioning pin of the Document
Insertion Unit to the positioning plate hole on the Finisher to connect.
<Front side>
F-7-58
Latch Plate(Front)
F-7-56
7-22
7
7-23
5) Close the Front Cover of the Finisher. 8) Install the Rear Small Cover.
6) Move the Latch Mount (Rear) on the direction of the arrow and insert it to the pin to fix it. • 1 Screw
Latch Plate(Rear) Screw

x2
F-7-59
Shunt Cable
7) Check the height between Finisher and the Document Insertion Unit.
F-7-61
CAUTION:
Insertion Unit
Finisher
F-7-60
7-23
7
7 Installation > Installation Procedure > Connecting Cable
7-24
Connecting Cable
2) Connect the ARKNET Cable to the terminal at the back of the Host machine, and then
rotate the knob in the direction of the arrow to fix.
NOTE:
This item is also variably connected to other option machine, but as an example, in this
case, it is connected to the Host machine.
Terminal ARCNET Cable
1) Rotate the terminal connector at the back of the Host machine in the direction of the arrow
to remove.
Knob
F-7-63
CAUTION:
Be sure to turn the knob of the ARCNET Cable all the way to connect otherwise it can
Terminal Connector cause unstable electrical contact.
F-7-62
NOTE: 3) Connect the terminal connector and the ARKNET Cable to the coaxial connector, and turn
Trailing edge connector is not used in the Integration Unit.
their knobs in the direction of the arrows as shown in the figure to secure.
Terminal Connector
x2
Coaxial Connector
ARCNET Cable
F-7-64
7-24
7
Installation > Installation Procedure > Connecting Cable
7-25
4) Connect the ARKNET Cable to the terminal of the Finisher, and turn the knob in the 6) Bundle the ARKNET Cable with the Wire Saddle.
direction of the arrow to secure. <If connected to Host Machine>
CAUTION:
Wire Saddle
Be sure the power OFF of the Host Machine and the unpliged power plug before
connecting the ARKNET Cable.
ARCNET Cable
Knob
Terminal
F-7-67
<If connected to Professional Puncher Integration Unit>
ARCNET Cable
Wire Saddle
F-7-65
ARCNET
5) Install the Wire Saddle on the Rear Cover of the Finisher. Cable
Wire Saddle
F-7-68
F-7-66
7-25
7
7-26
<If connected to Paper Folding unit>
7) Connect the power cable to the Finisher.
Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
Make sure that the power cord is fully connected to the outlet.
x2 If the connection is not right, an accident causing the smoke or fire may occur.
ARCNET Cable
CAUTION: Note for Europe, Asia/Oceania Regions
Use the correct power cord to mach the location/area of installation.
make sure not leave unused power cord at the site.
F-7-69
<If connected to Document Insertion Unit>
Wire Saddles
x2
ARCNET Cable
Power Cable
F-7-70
F-7-71
8) Connect the Power Plug of the Finisher to the outlet.

9) Turn ON the power in the order of the Finisher, then the Host Machine.
7-26
7
7 Installation > Installation Procedure > Checking Connection
7-27
Checking Connection
1) Input connection step of Finisher.

Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > OPTION > ACCPST-D > ACC1 to 8
NOTE:
In the case of directly connecting to the Host machine, enter "1" and press "OK".
2) Exit from Service Mode

3) Turn OFF the Main Power Switch of the machine and Finisher.
4) Turn ON the power of the Finisher then the Host Machine.
CAUTION:
Be sure to power cycle after specifying the connecting order otherwise the accessories
will not be recognized.
7-27
7
Installation > Installation Procedure > Checking Connection
7 Installation > Making Adjustments > Height Adjustment > Checking the height
7-28
Making Adjustments 3) If the difference exceeds +/-2 mm range, adjust the height.
NOTE:
Height Adjustment Adjust the height with 4 casters as shown in the figure.
Depending on the floor condition of the installation site, the hight of the Finisher needs to
be adjusted. If not properly adjusted, paper can be jammed more frequently in the Finisher
Pickup Assembly. Follow the steps below to adjust the hight if necessary.
■■Checking the height
1) Turn OFF the Main Power Switch of the machine and Finisher.
Casters
2) Check the height of the Finisher and the Host Machine. The height difference between the
Right top of the Finisher and the Left top of the Host Machine should be within +/-2 mm.
Left top of the Host Machine

Right top of the
Finisher
Casters
F-7-73
F-7-72
7-28
7
Installation > Making Adjustments > Height Adjustment > Checking the height
7 Installation > Making Adjustments > Height Adjustment > Height Adjustment
7-29
■■Height Adjustment
3) In the case of the Saddle Finisher, remove the Saddle Inner Cover (lower).
• 1 Screw
1) Separate the Finisher from the Host Machine.
• 1 knob
• Disconnect the Power Plig from the outlet.
• 3 Screws
• Disconnect the Power Cable of the Finisher.
• Remove the Wire Saddle at the Rear Lower Cover of the Finisher and disconnect the
ARCNET Cable.
• Remove the Latch Plates. (the front and rear) x4
Saddle Inner Cover(lower)

2) Remove the Spanner from the Finisher Front Cover.
• 1 Screw
ビス
Knob
Spanner
F-7-75
Screw 4) Remove the 2 caster covers at the Left side. (Figure shows in the case of using the
Saddle Finisher)
• 2 Screws
F-7-74
x2
Caster
Caster F-7-76
7-29
7
Installation > Making Adjustments > Height Adjustment > Height Adjustment
7-30
5) Remove the Rear Cover. 7) Loosen the caster's fixing nut with the spanner in the direction of [A].
• 2 Screws (Loosen)
Fixing Nut
• 6 Screws
Spanner
x6
[A]
F-7-79
CAUTION:
When loosening the caster fixing nut at the front side of the Saddle Finisher, be sure to
insert the spaner into the opening just below the Saddle botom plate.
Fixing Nut
F-7-77 Spanner
6) Measure the height [A] from the floor (where caster is landing) to the upper surface of the
bootom plate using a scale, and cheeck that the height is within 86.3 +/-0.3 mm. Saddle Bottom Plate
If the height is not within the range, execute step 7) anf lettter. F-7-80
[A]
86.3 0.3mm
F-7-78
7-30
7
7-31
8) Rotate the adjusting bolt with the spaner . Adjust the height (that was measured in step 6))
to be within 86.3 +/-0.3 mm.
• To increase the height: rotate in the direction of [A]
• To lower the height: rotate in the direction of [B]
(Height increment per rotation: approx.1.75 mm)
Adjusting Bolt
[A]
Spanner
[B]
F-7-81
9) Tighten the fixing nut in the direction of [B].
Fixing Nut
[B]
F-7-82
10) Adjust the other 3 casters as well (by repeating the steps above).
11) Reconnect the Finisher with the Host Mashine and check the height.
12) Return the Rear Cover to the original possition.

• 8 Screws
7-31
7
7 Installation > Attaching the Labels etc > Affixing the Labels
7-32
Attaching the Labels etc 3) Install the Staple Label inside the Front Cover.
• 4 Claws
Affixing the Labels
Claw
1) Open the Finisher Front Cover.
Claw
Staple Label
F-7-85
4) Affix over the LED Lamp Label (EUR only).
F-7-83
2) Install the Guide Map Label inside the Finisher Front Cover.
• 7 Claws
Claw
Claw
LED Lamp Label
F-7-86
Claw
Guide Map Label
F-7-84
7-32
7
Installation > Attaching the Labels etc > Affixing the Labels
7 Installation > Attaching the Labels etc > Affixing the Labels
7-33
F-7-87
6) Affix the Saddle Return Attention Label according to the location over the existing ones.
Saddle Return
Attention Label
F-7-88
7) Put the Saddle Unit back.

8) Close the Front Cover of the Finisher.
7-33
7
Installation > Attaching the Labels etc > Affixing the Labels
7 Installation > Relocationg the Machine > A NOTE on moving the machine
7-34
Relocationg the Machine
A NOTE on moving the machine
Caution:
If the machine the moved in connected condition, it will burden the part where it is
connected, and might cause damage or form changed Hence be sure to move it in
dissemble condition.
7-34
7
Installation > Relocationg the Machine > A NOTE on moving the machine
Appendix
■
■Service Tools
■
■Solvents and Oils
■
■List of Signals
■
■General Circuit Diagram
8 Appendix > Service Tools
8-2
Service Tools
The followings are the required tools to perform the service operation.
No. Tool name Tool number Usage/remarks

1 Door switch tool FY9-8006 Front door switch ON
T-8-1
8-2
8
Appendix > Service Tools
8 Appendix > Solvents and Oils
8-3
Solvents and Oils
Name Description Composition Remarks

Vic Clean Cleaning: Hydrocarbon (fluorine • Do not bring near fire.
e.g., glass, plastic, rubber family), Alcohol, • Procure locally.
parts, external covers Surface activating • Isopropyl alcohol may be
agent, Water substituted.
Lubricant Sliding units Silicone oil MOLYKOTE EM30-L
T-8-2
8-3
8
Appendix > Solvents and Oils
8 Appendix > List of Signals > List of Signals (finisher)
8-4
List of Signals Notation

BUFF-M-Clk
Signal name
buffer motor clock signal
BUFF-M-CW buffer motor drive signal
List of Signals (finisher) BUFF-M-IA buffer motor current switch signal 1
BUFF-M-IB buffer motor current switch signal 2
BUFF-PASS-SEN* buffer path sensor detection signal
BUFF-SL-ON buffer path switch solenoid signal
Notation Signal name
BUNDLE-M-8FG* stack delivery motor rotation detection signal
ASSIST-HP-SEN assist motor home position detection signal
BUNDLE-M-CLK stack delivery motor clock signal
ASSIST-M-8FG* assist motor rotation detection signal
BUNDLE-M-CW* stack delivery motor drive signal
ASSIST-M-CLK assist motor clock signal
BUNDLE-M-IHA stack delivery motor current switch signal 1
ASSIST-M-CW* assist motor drive signal
BUNDLE-M-IHB stack delivery motor current switch signal 2
ASSIST-M-IHA assist motor current switch signal 1
DN-SORT-SEN lower delivery sensor detection signal
ASSIST-M-ILB assist motor current switch signal 2
EXP-M-CLK delivery motor clock signal
ASSIST-R-SL1 assist roller shift solenoid signal 1
EXP-M-CW delivery motor rotation direction switch signal
ATRY-M-Clk tray A lift motor clock signal
EXP-M-IHA delivery motor current switch signal 1
ATRY-M-CW tray A lift motor drive signal
EXP-M-ILB delivery motor current switch signal 2
ATRY-M-IA tray A lift motor current switch signal 1
FAN-ERR power supply fan error detection signal
ATRY-M-IB tray A lift motor current switch signal 2
FEEDROLLER-PARTM-A transport roller shift motor drive signal A
ATRY-POSS-SEN1 tray A area sensor detection signal 1
FEEDROLLER-PARTM-B transport roller shift motor drive signal B
FEEDROLLER-PARTM-IA transport roller shift motor current switch signal 1
FEEDROLLER-PARTM-IB transport roller shift motor current switch signal 2
ATRY-POSS-SEN4 tray A area motor detection signal 4
FF-M-4FG* folding/transport motor rotation detection signal
ATRY-P-SEN tray A paper sensor detection signal
FJOG-HP-SEN front alignment motor home position detection
ATRY-SHIMEN-SEN* tray A paper surface sensor detection signal signal
BIN-DETECT-SEN1 paper edge sensor detection signal 1 FJOG-M-Clk front alignment motor clock signal
BIN-DETECT-SEN2 paper edge sensor detection signal 2 FJOG-M-CW* front alignment motor drive signal
BJOG-HP-SEN rear alignment motor home position detection FJOG-M-IHA* front alignment motor current switch signal
signal
FRONT-BIN-M-A paper edge stopper shift motor drive signal A
BJOG-M-Clk rear alignment motor clock signal
FRONT-BIN-M-B paper edge stopper shift motor drive signal B
BJOG-M-CW* rear alignment motor drive signal
FRONT-BIN-M-IHA* paper edge stopper shift motor current switch
BJOG-M-IHA* rear alignment motor current switch signal signal
BTRY-ISA-SEN* tray bias sensor detection signal FRONT-SW-OPEN front door open detection signal
BTRY-KILL tray B disengagement signal HOOK-FULL-SEN staple waste case full detection signal 1
BTRY-M-Clk tray B lift motor clock signal INPASS-M-Clk inlet transport motor clock signal
BTRY-M-CW tray B lift motor drive signal INPASS-M-CW inlet transport motor drive signal
BTRY-M-IA tray B lift motor current switch signal 1 INPASS-M-IHA inlet transport motor ON signal
BTRY-M-IB tray B lift motor current switch signal 2 INPASS-M-IHB inlet transport motor current switch signal
BTRY-POSS-SEN1 tray B position sensor detection signal 1 IRIGUCHI-SEN inlet sensor detection signal
BTRY-POSS-SEN2 tray B position sensor detection signal 2 ISA-SEL paper surface sensor AD input selector signal 3
BTRY-POSS-SEN3 tray B position sensor detection signal 3 KOUTAN-HP-SEN trail edge pushing home position detection signal
BTRY-POSS-SEN4 tray B position sensor detection signal 4 KOUTAN-M-A paper trail edge pushing motor drive signal A
BTRY-P-SEN tray B paper sensor detection signal KOUTAN-M-B paper trail edge pushing motor drive signal B
BTRY-SHIMEN-SEN* tray B paper surface sensor detection signal KOUTAN-M-IHA* paper trail edge pushing motor current switch
BTRY-SL-ON* auxiliary tray solenoid signal signal
BUFF2-SEN* buffer No. 2 sensor detection signal MOTARE-SEL paper surface sensor AD input selector signal 1
8-4
8
Appendix > List of Signals > List of Signals (finisher)
8 Appendix > List of Signals > List of Signals (finisher)
8-5
Notation Signal name Notation Signal name
OTRY-HP-SEN stack delivery auxiliary tray home position SIDEREJI-M-ILB horizontal registration detection unit shift motor
detection signal current switch signal 2
OTRY-M-A stack delivery auxiliary tray motor drive signal A SIDEREJI-SEN* horizontal registration sensor detection signal
OTRY-M-B stack delivery auxiliary tray motor drive signal B SIDEREJI-SHIFT-M-CLK horizontal registration shift motor clock signal
OTRY-M-IHA* stack delivery auxiliary tray motor startup signal SIDEREJI-SHIFT-M-CW horizontal registration shift motor rotation direction
PASS-M-Clk pre-buffer transport motor clock signal switch signal
PASS-M-CW pre-buffer transport motor drive signal SIDEREJI-SHIFT-M-IA horizontal registration shift motor current switch
PASS-M-FG* pre-buffer transport rotation detection signal signal 1
PASS-M-IA pre-buffer transport motor current switch signal 1 SIDEREJI-SHIFT-M-IB horizontal registration shift motor current switch
PASS-M-IB pre-buffer transport motor current switch signal 2 signal 2
PDL-M-Clk paddle rotation motor clock signal STP-HP-SEN* stapler home position detection signal
PDL-M-CW* paddle rotation motor drive signal STP-M-CCW* stapler motor direction switch signal
PDL-M-IHA* paddle rotation motor current switch signal STP-M-CW* stapler motor drive signal
PDL-ROTATE-HP-SEN paddle rotation home position detection signal STP-SLDM-CLK stapler shift motor clock signal
PDL-UPDOWN-HP-SEN paddle lift home position detection signal STP-SLDM-CW stapler shift motor drive signal
PDL-UP-M-A paddle lift motor drive signal A STP-SLDM-IA stapler shift motor current switch signal
PDL-UP-M-B paddle lift motor drive signal B STP-SLDM-IB stapler shift motor current switch signal
PDL-UP-M-IHA* paddle lift motor current switch signal STRY-P-SEN handling tray paper detection signal
RLT-HP-SEN transport belt shift home position detection signal STRY-SL-ON handling tray solenoid drive signal
RLT-M-A transport belt shift motor drive signal A SUDDLE-SUBTRAY-SEN saddle sub tray sensor detection signal
RLT-M-B transport belt shift motor drive signal B TRY-MSW* tray approach detecting switch detection signal
RLT-M-IHA* transport belt shift motor current switch signal UP-DOOR-OPEN upper cover open detection signal
ROLLER-HP transport roller home position detection signal UPPASS-SL-ON* upper path switch solenoid signal
SDL-SL-ON saddle path switch solenoid signal UPPERGUIDE-HP-SEN upper guide home position sensor signal
SHIFT-FEED-M-CW shift transport motor drive signal UPPERGUIDE-M-A upper guide motor drive signal A
SHIFT-FEED-M-IA shift transport motor current switch signal 1 UPPERGUIDE-M-B upper guide motor drive signal B
SHIFT-FEED-M-IB shift transport motor current switch signal 2 UPPERGUIDE-M-IHA* upper guide motor current switch signal
SHIFTÅ[FEED-M-CLK shift transport motor clock signal UP-SORT-SEN upper delivery sensor detection signal
SHIFTUNIT-HP-SEN shift roller unit home position detection signal YDG-CLS-SEN* swing guide closed detection signal
SHIFTUNIT-POST-SEN shift unit trail edge sensor detection signal YDG-HP-SEN swing guide open detection signal
SHIMENN-SEL paper surface sensor AD input selector signal 2 YDM-H-SPEED swing guide motor high-speed setting signal
SHITAPASU-SEN lower path sensor detection signal YDM-L-SPEED swing guide motor low-speed setting signal
SHUTTER-HP-SEN shutter position detection signal YDM-M-SPEED swing guide motor middle-speed setting mode
SIDEREJI-HP horizontal registration detection unit home position YDM-ON* swing guide motor drive signal
detection signal T-8-3
SIDEREJI-M-A horizontal registration detection unit shift motor

drive signal A
SIDEREJI-M-A* horizontal registration detection unit shift motor
drive signal A*
SIDEREJI-M-B horizontal registration detection unit shift motor
drive signal B
SIDEREJI-M-B* horizontal registration detection unit shift motor
drive signal B*
SIDEREJI-M-IHA horizontal registration detection unit shift motor
current switch signal 1
8-5
8
Appendix > List of Signals > List of Signals (finisher)
8 Appendix > List of Signals > List Of Signals (saddle)
8-6
List Of Signals (saddle) Notation Signal name
STAPLE-HP-SEN saddle stapling home position detection signal
STAPLE-LS2 saddle staple detection signal 2
STOPPER-HP-SEN saddle lead edge stopper home position detection
Notation Signal name
signal
BUNDLE-DELIVERY-SEN saddle stack delivery sensor signal
STOPPER-M-A saddle lead edge stopper motor drive signal A
CONVEYOR-M-A saddle transport belt motor drive signal A
STOPPER-M-B saddle lead edge stopper motor drive signal B
CONVEYOR-M-B saddle transport belt motor drive signal B
STOPPER-M-IHA saddle lead edge stopper motor current switch
CONVEYOR-M-IHA* saddle transport belt motor current switch signal signal
CONVEYOR-P-SEN1 saddle transport belt paper detection signal 1 STP-M-CCW saddle staple motor CCW rotation drive signal
CONVEYOR-P-SEN2 saddle transport belt paper detection signal 2 STP-M-CW saddle stapler motor CW rotation drive signal
DRAWROLLER-HP-SEN saddle pull-in roller home position detection signal THRUST-CLK-SEN saddle butting motor clock sensor signal
DRAWROLLER-M-A saddle pull-in roller shift motor drive signal A THRUST-HP-SEN saddle butting home position detection signal
DRAWROLLER-M-B saddle pull-in roller shift motor drive signal B THRUST-M-CCW saddle butting motor CCW rotation drive signal
DRAWROLLER-M-IHA saddle pull-in roller shift motor current switch THRUST-M-CW saddle butting motor CW rotation drive signal
signal
THRUST-M-PWM saddle butting motor PWM signal
FLAP-SL1 saddle flapper solenoid signal 1
TOP-PATH-SEN saddle lead edge path detection signal
FLAP-SL2 saddle flapper solenoid signal 2
T-8-4
FOLD-M-CCW saddle fold transport motor CCW rotation drive
signal
FOLD-M-CW saddle fold transport motor CW rotation drive
signal
FOLD-M-PWM saddle fold transport motor PWM signal
JOG-HP-SEN saddle alignment home position detection signal
JOG-M-A saddle alignment motor drive signal A
JOG-M-A* saddle alignment motor drive signal A*
JOG-M-B saddle alignment motor drive signal B
JOG-M-B* saddle alignment motor drive signal B*
JOG-M-IHA saddle alignment motor current switch signal
LENGTH-PATH-SEN saddle vertical path sensor signal
PRESS-CLK-SEN saddle pressing motor clock signal
PRESS-HP-SEN saddle pressing home position detection signal
PRESS-M-CCW saddle pressing motor CCW rotation drive signal
PRESS-M-CW saddle pressing motor CW rotation drive signal
PRESS-M-PWM saddle pressing motor PWM signal
PRESS-POSITION-SEN saddle pressing position detection signal
ROLLERGUIDE-HP-SEN saddle roller guide home position detection signal
ROLLERGUIDE-M-A saddle roller guide motor drive signal A
ROLLERGUIDE-M-B saddle roller guide motor drive signal B
ROLLERGUIDE-M-IHA saddle roller guide motor current switch signal
SDL-FEED-M-CLK saddle transport motor clock signal
SDL-FEED-M-CW saddle transport motor drive signal
SDL-FEED-M-FG saddle transport motor rotation detection signal
SDL-FEED-M-IHA saddle transport motor current switch signal A
SDL-FEED-M-ILB saddle transport motor current switch signal B
SDL-INLET-SEN saddle inlet sensor signal
SMALL-SEN saddle small-size paper sensor signal
8-6
8
Appendix > List of Signals > List Of Signals (saddle)
8-7
General Circuit Diagram

●● General Circuit Diagram (Finisher 1/7)
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
200V-EU
IL1 FT1012
Inlet FT1013
J1011 1 U R
2
J1012
UN12
1
SOLD1 BK
1
F F
1
1
2
1
FT1008 FT1014 J471
AC noise filter PCB
2
2 SOLD2 FT1007 FT1017
2
2
2
1
3 3 4
3
SOLD3 W
3
3
W T
FT1016 FT1018
CB1
4
J474 J473 J472
4
1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
J1013 J1014F
Circuit breaker
MT1004 MT1005
N
GND
RMT
GN/Y J1001M FT1019 FT1021 FT1022 FT1024
N
MT1003 1 2 3 4
J1001F 1 2 3 4
FT1020 FT1023
1
2
3
1
2
3
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5
(J101)
J1002M 1 2 3 4 UN1 J1101 UN2 J1102 (J101)
J1002F
1 2 3 4 OL1 OL2 DC power PCB (24V) DC power PCB (38V)
Outlet for Outlet for
Professional Puncher Booklet Trimmer J1201 (J201) J1202 (J201)
E UN8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 E
ARCNET transceiver PCB FM1
FT1101
1 2 FM4
RMT
GND
+24V
+24V
GND
GND
J4500 FT1102
RMT
GND
+38V
+38V
+38V
GND
GND
Power cooling 2 Power cooling fan 1
3 4
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FT1103 FT1104
5 6
321 321
J1020L
SW1 J1020LH
J1003L
J1003LH
Main switch 3 2 1 3 2 1
J1020D 1 2 3 1 2 3
J1003D
J3104 2 1
1 2 3 4
1
J413 1 2 3 4 5 6
J3103L J411 J412
2
1 2
J3103D
2 1
D J3103DH D
+24U
38V-FAN-ERR
24V-FAN-ERR
1
J101 J414
38V-FAN-ON
24V-FAN-ON
PGND
2
PULSE1+
PULSE1-
REMOTE
TXEN+
TXEN-
RXIN+
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
SGND
RXIN-
+3.3R
PGND
PGND
SGND
UN7
+5V
GND
+5V
Relay PCB
+3.3V
J102
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
+3.3V J415
2
J134 J155 J103 +5V
3
SGND
4
SGND
5
UN3
J417 J416 J420 J418 J419
C J124
J119
2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 C
J132
29 1 2 3
1 2
PGND
+24V
PGND
+38V
+38V
+38V
+24V
GND
GND
GND
GND
+38V
NORMAL OPEN
CON(24V)
CON
NORMAL OPEN
PGND
GND
+5V
FRONT-SW-OPEN
+38V
1
7SEG-dot 10
7SEG-e 12
7SEG-g 13
7SEG-f 14
SGND 15
CHK-SW1 16
CHK-SW2 17
CHK-SW3 18
CHK-SW4 19
CHK-SW5 20
CHK-SW6 21
CHK-SW7 22
CHK-SW8 23
PCH-SELECT2 24
PCH-SELECT1 25
PCH-SELECT0 26
AJUST-BIT0 27
AJUST-BIT1 28
7SEG-d 11
ENTER
+
-
7SEG-a
7SEG-b
7SEG-c
NC
AJUST-BIT2
AJUST-BIT3
AJUST-BIT4
J601D J1004D
J601DH 2 1 2 1
J1004LH
3 2 1 1 2
J601L 1 2 J1004L
J1010D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J1010DH
J274
B J1010L B
SOLD14
SOLD15
UN5
1 2
1 2 3 J313
14
13
12
10
14
13
12
10
11
11
Feed motor driver PCB

1
1
9
J603D 2 1
J603DH
UN6
3
1 2
J603L NC NO
Staple driver
A14 B14
J381WH
COM
PCB
1
J381A J381B MSW1
J655
Front door switch
3 2 1 1 2 3
J1005 CON NC
UN9
3
3 2 1 NC NO
Optional switch PCB

A PS1
COM
A
1
Front door sensor MSW7
Swing guide safety switch
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.1
F-8-1
8-7
8-8
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

F F
UN3
J129
J156 J127
J161
1 2 3
23 J128
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
+5V
GND
+5V
BUFF2-AJ
BUFF2-AN
GND
+5V
GND
GND
+5V
GND
SIDEREJI-HP-SEN
+5V
SHIFTUNIT-HP-SEN
BUFF-PASS-AJ
BUFF-PASS-AN
SHITAPASU-AJ
SHITAPASU-AN
+24V
ASSIST-R2-SL
GND
UPPERGUID-HP-SEN
+5V
GND
GND
FEED-FAN
FEED-FAN-ERR
FEED-FAN
FEED-FAN-ERR2
TRY-LED-A
ATRY-IAS-AJ
E E
10
GND 12
GND 13
RLT-HP-SEN 14
+5V 15
RLT-M-A 16
RLT-M-A* 17
RLT-M-B 18
RLT-M-B* 19
UPPERGUID-M-A 20
UPPERGUID-M-A* 21
UPPERGUID-M-B 22
UPPERGUID-M-B* 23
11
+24V
+24V
BUFF-SL-ON
GND
UP-DOOR-OPEN
+5V
+24V
UPPASS-SL-ON
ATRY-SHIMEN
ATRY-ISA
ATRY-MOTARE
J522D
J2594D 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J522DH
D J2594LH
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 J522L D
J2594L
J525D
J525DH J539D J524D
J520D 5 4 3 2 1 J526D 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 1 2 3 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
J2595DH 2 1 J638 J519D J518D
J520LH J526LH J525L J524LH 2 1
J539LH
J2595D J524L J515
1 2 J520L J526L J539L
3 2 1
J2595L
1 2
UN15 J519LH J518LH
SL
Tray A paper surface
PS26
SL10 Upper guide
sensor PCB (emission)
1 2 3 1 2 3
Assist Roller HP sensor J519L J518L
Disengagement
C Solenoid 1
123 123
C
FM2
J507DH
J507D FM3
J508
J506DH Feeder cooling Feeder cooling
2 1 2 1 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
J506D J509
fan 2 fan
J507L
3 2 1 J643D
1 2 1 2
UN16
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J506L J643DH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 J643L
PS2 Tray A paper
1 2 1 2
Upper cover surface sensor PCB
SL SL
(receiving) 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
sensor J3101 J516

4 3 2 1
J513 J512
SL2 SL1 J514
Upper path Buffer path UN13 UN14 UN22 3 2 1

3 2 1
B switch solenoid switch solenoid

Buffer path 1 Buffer path 2 Lower path B
sensor PCB sensor PCB sensor PCB PS8 PS7
Shift roller unit Horizontal registration
HP sensor detection unit
HP sensor
J639 J640D J641D

3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
J640DH J641DH
3 2 1
1 2 3 4 J640L 1 2 3 4 J641L
PS25
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
A Feed belt
M M A
HP sensor M17 M20
Feed belt Upper guide
move motor motor
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.2
F-8-2
8-8
B
E
A
C
D
10
10
J530
1
1
2
2
3
GND
1
M
3
4
FEEDROLLER-PARTM-A
2
J142
M6
4
5
FEEDROLLER-PARTM-B
3
6
FEEDROLLER-PARTM-IH
4
FEEDROLLER-PARTM-IL
5
13 12 11 10 9
SIDEREJI-M-B*
1
BUFF-M-IL
6
Horizontal registration
SIDEREJI-M-B
2
BUFF-M-IH
7
J281
7
detection unit move motor

SIDEREJI-M-A
3
BUFF-M-CW
8
6
SIDEREJI-M-A*
4
BUFF-M-CLK
9
9
EXP-M-A
1
5
ROLLER-HP-SEN
2
+38V
2
6
UP-SORT-SEN
3
EXP-M-A*
3
7
NC
M
4
EXP-M-B
4
8
M5
GND
1
9 10 11 12 13
5
J271
+38V
5
9
6
EXP-M-B*
6
10
Delivery motor
GND 1
31
KOUTAN-A 2
J528
30
KOUTAN-B 3
29
KOUTAN-IH* 4
28
INPASS-M-IL 5
1
27
INPASS-M-IH 6
2
26
INPASS-M-CW 7
SIDEREJI-SHIFT-M-A
3
25
1
INPASS-M-CLK 8
+38V
4
24
2
J282
SIDEREJI-M-A 9
SIDEREJI-SHIFT-M-A*
5
23
3
SIDEREJI-M-B 10
SIDEREJI-SHIFT-M-B
6
22
M
4
SIDEREJI-M-A* 11
M7
+38V
7
21
8
8
SIDEREJI-M-B* 12
SIDEREJI-SHIFT-M-B*
8
20
shift motor
6
SIDEREJI-M-IH 13
9
19
SIDEREJI-M-IL 14
18
SIDEREJI-SHIFT-M-IL 15
J532
17
10 11
SIDEREJI-SHIFT-M-IH 16
31
J125
16
SIDEREJI-SHIFT-M-CW 17
31
J272
15
SIDEREJI-SHIFT-M-CLK 18
14
1
J533
SHIFTFEED-M-A PASS-M-IL 19
1
1
13
UN3
2
+38V PASS-M-IH 20
2
2
J284
12
3
SHIFTFEED-M-A* PASS-M-CW 21
3
3
11
M
4
SHIFTFEED-M-B PASS-M-CLK 22
4
4
M2
10
5
+38V SHIFTFEED-M-IL 23
5
5
6
SHIFTFEED-M-B* SHIFTFEED-M-IH 24
6
6
Shift feed motor

PASS-M-B* SHIFTFEED-M-CW 25
7
1
1
+38V SHIFTFEED-M-CLK 26
8
2
2
PASS-M-B EXP-M-IL 27
9
3
3
PASS-M-A EXP-M-IH 28
4
7
7
M
4
4
+38V EXP-M-CW 29
M3
3
5
5
Buffer
PASS-M-A* EXP-M-CLK 30
10 11 12
6
6
GND 31
1
front feed motor

J529
GND 1
27
SDL-SL-ON 2
J527
26
DN-SORT-SEN 3
1
1
INPASS-M-A
1
25
KOUTAN-HP-SEN 4
2
2
+38V
2
J280
24
IRIGUCHI-R-SEN 5
3
3
INPASS-M-A*
3
23
M
IRIGUCHI-SEN 6
4
4
INPASS-M-B
M1
Inlet
22
SIDEREJI-AJ3 7
5
5
+38V
5
21
feed motor
SIDEREJI-AN3 8
6
6
INPASS-M-B*
6
20
SIDEREJI-AJ2 9
7
SEXP-M-A 19
SIDEREJI-AN2 10
8
+38V
1
18
1
SIDEREJI-AJ1 11
9
SEXP-M-A*
2
17
2
SEXP-M-B SIDEREJI-AN1 12
6
6
3
16
3
+38V SHIFTUNIT-POST-SEN 13
4
15
M
4
SEXP-M-B* INPASSROLLER-M-A 14
27
27
J126
J273
M26
14
5
INPASSROLLER-M-B 15
6
10 11 12 13
13
feed motor
6
Processing
INPASSROLLER-M-IH 16
12
INPASSROLLER-M-IL 17
J541
11
SEXP-M-IL 18
10
SEXP-M-IH 19
9
1
BUFF-M-A
1
SEXP-M-CW 20
1
8
2
+38V
2 SEXP-M-CLK 21
2
J285
UN5
7
3
BUFF-M-A*
3
FEED-STANBY* 22
3
6
4
BUFF-M-B
4
M
4 ATRY-FAN-DA 23
J159
M4
5
5
+38V
5
ATRY-FAN-ERR 24
5
1 2
4
6
BUFF-M-B*
6
3.3V 25
6
Feed motor driver PCB
Buffer motor
3
7
5V 26
J531
2
GND 27
+24V
5
5
SGND
3
3
ASSIST-R3-SL
SHIFTUNIT-POST-SEN
3
S
3
2
2
J283
1
KOUTAN-M-A
2
1
5R
2
2
1
1
J461
2
KOUTAN-M-A*
P
3
2 1
2
PS4
1
UN25
3
M
KOUTAN-M-B
Shift unit
J275
3
relay PCB
Horizontal
registration
M16
KOUTAN-M-B*
4
J463
J3000D
drop motor
J534
trailing edge sensor

Paper trailing edge
+5V
8
1
SIDEREJI-AJ3
7
2
J279
1
+24V
1
SIDEREJI-AN3
1
2
6
3
2
SL
SDL-SL-ON
2
SIDEREJI-AJ2
2
1
J276
5
4
SL3
J517L
J517DH
J517D
SIDEREJI-AN2
3
4
5
4
4
SIDEREJI-AJ1
3
6
UN24
switch solenoid
SIDEREJI-AN1
2
7
sensor PCB
SGND
1
8
J451
3
3
2
2
J535L
J535DH
J535D
1
PS24
J510
FEEDROLLER-M-A
1
1
FEEDROLLER-M-A*
2
2
J546D
J546LH
J546L
J286
3
Paper trailing edge
FEEDROLLER-M-B
3
3
GND
M8
1
7
1
FEEDROLLER-M-B*
4
4
KOUTAN-HP-SEN
2
6
2
GND
Feed roller
5
J277
5R
3
5
3
UP-SORT-SEN
6
disengage motor
GND
4
4
4
5R
3
7
S
DC-SORT-SEN
5
3
5
SGND
2
J537
2
5R
6
2
S
3
6
ROLLER-HP-SEN
3
1
3
3
P
PS6
J511
Lower
NC
MT1019
MT1017
MT1007
MT1006
7
1
2
7
5R
2
10
PS5
1
1
sensor
Saddle path drop guide HP sensor delivery sensor
Upper delivery
J538
3
3
INPASSROLLER-M-A
1
2
1
1
1
2
4
INPASSROLLER-M-A*
PS9
2
1
2
2
2
1
3
J278
11 10
INPASSROLLER-M-B
HP sensor
3
Feed roller
M
3
3
9
J542D
J542DH
J542L
INPASSROLLER-M-B*
M27
4
4
4
GND
Inlet roller
5
5
IRIGUCHI-SEN
6
6
J2596DH
J3000L
J3000LH
6
disengage motor
J2596L
J2596D
+5V
7
7
MT1020
MT1018
MT1009
MT1008
1
GND
1
1
8
8
IRIGUCHI-R-SEN
SL
2
S
2
3
SL11
+5V
2
2
2
Solenoid 2
P
NC
Assist Roller
PS3
9 10 11
9 10 11
1
J3102
Disengagement
Inlet sensor
J521L
J521D
J521LH
3
1
1
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
J287
321
1
3
3
1
1
PS43
J544
FM5
Inlet roller
HP sensor
Upper Delivery Fan

J543L
J543D
J543DH
1
1
B
E
A
C
D
P.3
F-8-3
8-9
8-9

8-10
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

F F
UN3
J145 J106 J140 J152

1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
NC
+24V
PDL-M-A
PDL-M-B*
PDL-M-B
PDL-M-A*
PDL-UP-M-A
PDL-UP-M-A*
PDL-UP-M-B
PDL-UP-M-B*
ANGLE-M-A
ANGLE-M-A*
ANGLE-M-B
ANGLE-M-B*
NC
OTRY-M-A
OTRY-M-A*
OTRY-M-B
OTRY-M-B*
GND
NC
+24V
GND
GND
+5V
GND
ANGLE-CHANGE-SEN
+5V
GND
+5V
GND
YDG-HP-SEN
+5V
GND
PDL-UPDOWN-HP-SEN
+5V
NC
NC
BTRY-SHIMEN
BTRY-ISA
BTRY-IAS-AJ
TRY-LED-A
OTRY-HP-SEN
PDL-ROTATE-HP-SEN
BTRY-FAN-V
BTRY-FAN-ERR
BTRY-MOTARE
BND-PRS-M-A
BND-PRS-M-A*
BND-PRS-M-B
BND-PRS-M-B*
GND
BND-PRS-HP-SEN
+5V
E E
J615D J623D J633D J2597DH

3 2 1 J615DH 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J623DH 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J633DH J2597D
1 2 3 J623L
J615L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
J633L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
J2597L
END2
D D
J2598DH
4 3 2 1 3 2 1
J2598D J2599D
3 2 1
J2598L 1 2 3 4
PS201
1 2 3 4
Stack Retainer
M HP Sensor
J625DH
J625D
C 4 3 2 1 J624D M201 C
3 2 1
J683D
J653D 5 4 3 2 1
J683DH
Stack Retainer Motor
3 2 1 1 2 3 4
J624LH
J624L J653LH 1 2 3 4 5 J683L
J625L
J653L
5 4 3 2 1 2 1 1 2 3
1 2 3
J636 J635
UN18 UN17
Tray B paper Tray B paper
surface sensor surface sensor
PCB (receiving) PCB (emission) 4 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 J629D J628D J627D
J619 J628DH J651D
3 2 1 J545D J650 J617 J616 J613 J629DH J627DH
J651DH
B B
3 2 1 J629L J628L J627L J651L
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
J545DH 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 J545L PS20 PS45 PS14 PS44 PS21 M M M M

Paddle Delivery Stack delivery Swing guide Paddle lift
rotation angle HP auxiliary tray HP sensor HP sensor M13 M14 M15 M28
321 HP sensor sensor HP sensor Stack delivery Paddle Paddle Delivery angle
auxiliary tray motor rotation motor lift motor adjustment motor
FM6
Lower Delivery Fan
A A
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.4
F-8-4
8-10
8-11
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

F UN3 F
J122
J139 J121
J111 J141 21 J123
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
SGND
HOOK-FULL-SEN1
+5R
YDG-M-A
+24V
YDG-M-A*
YDG-M-B
+24V
YDG-M-B*
+24V
+24V
BUNDLE-M-A
BUNDLE-M-B*
BUNDLE-M-B
BUNDLE-M-A*
+24V
+24V
ASSIST-M-A
ASSIST-M-A*
ASSIST-M-B
ASSIST-M-B*
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
11
GND
+5V
GND
FJOG-HP-SEN
+5V
FJOG-M-A
FJOG-M-A*
FJOG-M-B
FJOG-M-B*
BIN-M-A
BIN-M-A*
BIN-M-B
BIN-M-B*
GND
BJOG-HP-SEN
+5V
GND
+5V
GND
+5V
GND
+5V
BJOG-M-A
BJOG-M-A*
BJOG-M-B
BJOG-M-B*
NC
BIN-DETECT-SEN1
BIN-DETECT-SEN2
ASSIST-HP-SEN
STRY-P-SEN
STP-POSITION-SEN1
GND
STP-HOOK-SEN
STP-HP-SEN
GND
READY
+5V
GND
STP-POSITION-SEN4
+5V
GND
STP-POSITION-SEN3
+5V
GND
STP-POSITION-SEN2
+5V
GND
+5V
GND
STP-SLDM-HP-SEN
+5V
+5V
GND
STP-ONESHOT
STP-LIMIT
STP-SLDM-CLK
STP-SLDM-CW
STP-SLDM-IH
STP-SLDM-IL
YDG-SW
STP-M-CCW-N
STP-M-CW-P
STP-M-CW-N
STP-M-CCW-P
STP-24V-DOWN
E E
3 2 1
J620D J680
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J620DH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 3 2 1
J620L
PS42
J652M Needle chip
D J634M 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 full sensor D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6
J634F J652F
6 5 4 3 2 1 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J314 J311
J621D J654F
J622D
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J622DH
UN6
J621DH
1 2 3 4 5 6
J621L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 J622L
1 2 3 4 5 6 Staple driver PCB
J654M
C J679D 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J317 J316 J315 C
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
J679LH 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
MT1010
J679L
SGND
LS STP-HOCK
HOME*
SGND
READY
+5R
STAPLE-24VCUT
STP-SLIDE-M-B*
+24V
STP-SLIDE-M-B
STP-SLIDE-M-A*
+24V
STP-SLIDE-M-A
J612DH
J612D
J606DH
J607DH
J608
J609
J611
J606D
J607D
J605
J610
J604
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
J607L
3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 J672 J673
J606L J612L 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
S P
1 2 3 4 J631M J632 J630 J674 J675 J676 J677 J678
B B
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
J671
PS15 PS11 PS12 PS16 PS17 PS13
1 2 3 4 5 6
J631F
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
MT1011
1 2
Paper edge area Front alignment 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
Rear Paper Processing Processing 1 2 3 4
M
M 1 2 3 4 5 6 ステイプルユニット
sensor 1 HP sensor alignment edge area tray paper tray HP PS31 PS30 PS29 PS28 PS27
M
M M M M12 M18
M
HP sensor sensor 2 sensor sensor
M9 M11 M10 1 2 3 4 5 6
Assist motor Swing guide motor Staple Staple Staple Staple Staple
M21 M25
position position position position HP sensor
Staple motor Staple motor
Front alignment Processing stopper Rear alignment M
sensor 4 sensor 3 sensor 2 sensor 1
motor move motor motor
M19
Stack delivery motor
A A
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.5
F-8-5
8-11
8-12
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

F F
J109B J109A
UN3 J108B J108A
B15 A15 J109WH B18 A18 J108WH
E E
15
14
13
12
10
15
14
13
12
10
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
10
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
10
1
11
11
11
11
+5R
SGND
+5R
SGND
+5R
SGND
+5R
SGND
+5R
SGND
+5R
SGND
PGND
PGND
PGND
+38R
+38R
+38R
MD1
+5R
BTRY-CLK2
BTRY-CLK*
BTRY-P-SEN
BTRY-POSS-SEN4
BTRY-POSS-SEN3
BTRY-POSS-SEN1
BTRY-M-CLK
BTRY-M-CW
BTRY-M-ENABLE
BTRY-M-Vref
+5R
SGND
+5R
SGND
+5R
SGND
+5R
SGND
+5R
SGND
PGND
PGND
PGND
+24R
+24R
+24R
MD1
+5R
ATRY-CLK2
ATRY-CLK*
ATRY-P-SEN
ATRY-POSS-SEN4
ATRY-POSS-SEN3
ATRY-M-CLK
ATRY-M-CW
ATRY-M-ENABLE
ATRY-M-Vref
MT1012 MT1013
D D
MT1014
MT1015
C C
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
J2535 J703 J702 J2533 J2534 J292A J2544 J704 J705 J2541 J2542 J2543
J292B
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
UN10 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
UN11
Tray A motor driver PCB
Tray B motor driver PCB
B PS47 PS34 PS32 PS50 PS49 J291A PS48 PS35 PS33 PS53 PS52 PS51 J291B
B
Tray A Tray A Tray A Tray A Tray A
1 2 3 4 5 6
Tray B Tray B Tray B Tray B Tray B Tray B 1 2 3 4 5 6
Clock Sensor lift motor paper Fourth Position Third Position Clock Sensor lift motor paper Fourth Position Third Position First Position
A*
B
B*
A
+24V
+24V
A*
B
B*
A
+38V
+38V
rotation sensor Sensor Sensor rotation sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor
sensor 1 2 3 4 5 6
sensor
1 2 3 4 5 6
M M
M22 M23
Tray A lift motor Tray B lift motor
A A
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.6
F-8-6
8-12
8-13
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

UN3
J151 J150
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
F F
NC
GND
NC
ASIC-RESET*
+3.3R
+5R
+24U
+24U
+24U
GND
GND
GND
NC
UPR-NEAT-RJOG-M-CLK
UPR-NEAT-FJOG-M-CLK
UPR-NEAT-JOG-UP-M-B
UPR-NEAT-JOG-UP-M-A
UPR-NEAT-RTN-RLR-UP-M-B
UPR-NEAT-RTN-RLR-UP-M-A
LWR-NEAT-RJOG-M-CLK
LWR-NEAT-FJOG-M-CLK
LWR-NEAT-JOG-UP-M-B
LWR-NEAT-JOG-UP-M-A
LWR-NEAT-RTN-RLR-UP-M-B
LWR-NEAT-RTN-RLR-UP-M-A
SGND
SGND
SGND
NEAT-RX-
NEAT-RX+
NEAT-TX-
NEAT-TX+
NEAT-CLK+
NEAT-CLK-
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J502 J501 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
UN201
E J505 J503 Neat Driver PCB J506 J504 E
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
GND
+5R
GND
+5R
GND
+5R
GND
+5R
GND
+5R
GND
+5R
UPR-NEAT-FJOG-M-A
UPR-NEAT-FJOG-M-A*
UPR-NEAT-FJOG-M-B
UPR-NEAT-FJOG-M-B*
UPR-NEAT-RJOG-M-A
UPR-NEAT-RJOG-M-A*
UPR-NEAT-RJOG-M-B
UPR-NEAT-RJOG-M-B*
UPR-NEAT-JOG-UP-M-A
UPR-NEAT-JOG-UP-M-A*
UPR-NEAT-JOG-UP-M-B
UPR-NEAT-JOG-UP-M-B*
UPR-NEAT-FJOG-HP-SEN
UPR-NEAT-RJOG-HP-SEN
UPR-NEAT-JOG-UP-HP-SEN
UPR-NEAT-RTN-RLR-UP-M-B*
UPR-NEAT-RTN-RLR-HP-SEN
NC
NC
NC
LWR-NEAT-FJOG-M-A
LWR-NEAT-FJOG-M-A*
LWR-NEAT-FJOG-M-B
LWR-NEAT-FJOG-M-B*
LWR-NEAT-RJOG-M-A
LWR-NEAT-RJOG-M-A*
LWR-NEAT-RJOG-M-B
LWR-NEAT-RJOG-M-B*
LWR-NEAT-JOG-UP-M-A
LWR-NEAT-JOG-UP-M-A*
LWR-NEAT-JOG-UP-M-B
LWR-NEAT-JOG-UP-M-B*
LWR-NEAT-JOG-UP-HP-SEN
LWR-NEAT-RTN-RLR-UP-M-A*
LWR-NEAT-RTN-RLR-UP-M-A*
LWR-NEAT-RTN-RLR-UP-M-B*
LWR-NEAT-RTN-RLR-HP-SEN
LWR-NEAT-RJOG-HP-SEN
LWR-NEAT-FJOG-HP-SEN
D D
GND
GND
+5R
+5R
J2507D
J2518DH 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J2519DH 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J2507DH
J2518D J2519D
J2518L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 J2519L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 J2507L
C C
J2516DH
J2506DH 3 2 1
J2506D J2516D
J3001DH
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3
3 2 1 J3001D J2516L
J3001L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1 2 3
J2506L 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J3003DH 3 2 1
J3002DH
J3002D J3003D
B J3002L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J3003L 1 2 3
J3005DH
B
J2501DH J2502DH J2503DH J2520DH 3 2 1
J3005D
J2501D J2502D J2503D J2520D
J2504 J2505 J3105 J2521
1 2 3
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 J3004D 5 4 3 2 1
J3005L
J3004L
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
J2501L J2502L J2503L J2520L J3004LH 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
J2513 J2514
PS202 PS203 PS204 PS209
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
3 2 1 3 2 1 J2515 3 2 1 3 2 1 J2517
J2508DH J2509DH J2510DH
M M M M
Upper Neat Upper Neat Upper Neat Upper Neat J2508D J2509D J2510D 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
Stack Unit Stack Unit Stack Unit Stack Unit
M202 M203 M204 M209 Front Alignment Rear Alignment Alignment Plate Return Roller
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 J2511D 4 3 2 1
Upper Neat Upper Neat Upper Neat Upper Neat J2511DH
Stack Unit Stack Unit

HP Sensor HP Sensor HP Sensor HP Sensor J2508L 1 2 3 4 J2509L 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 PS205 PS206 PS207 PS208
Stack Unit Stack Unit 1 2 3 4
J2510L 1 2 3 4
J2511L 1 2 3 4 Lower Neat Lower Neat Lower Neat Lower Neat
Front Alignment Moter Rear Alignment Moter Alignment Plate Return Roller 1 2 3 4
M Stack Unit Stack Unit Stack Unit Stack Unit

Lifting Motor Lifting Motor M M M
A Front Alignment Rear Alignment Alignment Plate Return Roller A

M205 M206 M207 M208 HP Sensor HP Sensor HP Sensor HP Sensor
Lower Neat Lower Neat Lower Neat Lower Neat
Stack Unit Stack Unit Stack Unit Stack Unit
Front Alignment Moter Rear Alignment Moter Alignment Plate Return Roller
Lifting Motor Lifting Motor
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.7
F-8-7
8-13
8-14
●● General Circuit Diagram (Saddle 1/1)
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

M104 M113 M101 M114 PS122 PS107 PS101 PS108 PS118 PS103
Saddle roller Saddle tapping Saddle feed motor Saddle lead-in roller Saddle lead-in Saddle roller Saddle Saddle paper Saddle paper Saddle
guide motor motor disengage motor M109 PS110 PS116 PS115 roller guide inlet push-on plate tapping vertical path
M
Saddle sticher motor Saddle press Saddle press Saddle press HP sensor HP sensor sensor HP sensor HP sensor sensor
F F
M M M
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6
M
HP sensor position sensor motor sensor
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 S P S P
J947
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2
J905L J910L Staple unit 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1

J1011 J944 J936 J937 J945 J924
J1012L J912 J913 J914 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 J943L 1 2 3 4
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
4 3 2 1 J910DH 1 2 3 4 5 6 J1012DH
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1 J943DH J904
J905DH
J905D J910D
J943D J1012D
J939L
1 2 3 4
J938L J938LH 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J938D J939D
J939DH
E J935L J935DH
E
KOTANSHIWAKE-HP-SEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
HIKIKOMIRIKAN-HP-SEN
ROLLERGUIDE-HP-SEN
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J935D
VERTICAL-PATH-SEN
CONNECTER-OUT
THRUST-HP-SEN
SDL-INLET-SEN
KOTANSHIWAKE-M-M-B
PRESS-POSITION-SEN
KOTANSHIWAKE-M-A*
KOTANSHIWAKE-M-B*
KOTANSHIWAKE-M-A
HIKIKOMIRIKAN-M-A*
HIKIKOMIRIKAN-M-B*
ROLLERGUIDE-M-A*
ROLLERGUIDE-M-B*
HIKIKOMIRIKAN-M-A
HIKIKOMIRIKAN-M-B
ROLLERGUIDE-M-A
ROLLERGUIDE-M-B
PRESS-CLK-SEN
STAPLE-HP-SEN
SDL-FEED-M-B*
SDL-FEED-M-A*
PRESS-HP-SEN
SDL-FEED-M-A
SDL-FEED-M-B
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5V
+5V
+5v
+5v
+5v
+5v
STAPLE-LS2
STAPLE-LS1
STP-M_FG
STP-M_+
STP-M_+
STP-M_-
STP-M_-
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
11
1
9
+24V
+24V
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1
J207
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
23 D
J204 J209
UN101
Saddle sticher controller PCB
J212 J213
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
GND
+24V
+24V
JOG-M-A
JOG-M-B
JOG-M-A*
JOG-M-B*
+24V
GND
JOG-HP-SEN
GND
GND
GND
FOLD-CLK-SEN
LED4
STOPPER-M-A
STOPPER-M-B
STOPPER-M-A*
STOPPER-M-B*
STOPPER-SL
STOPPER-HP-SEN
SENTANRIKAN-SL1
SENTANRIKAN-SL2
SENTANROLLER-M-A
SENTANROLLER-M-A*
SENTANROLLER-M-B
SENTANROLLER-M-B*
THRUST-CLK-SEN
BUNDLE-DELIVERY-SEN
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
C C
17
16
15
14
13
12
10
J1005D
11
1
9
2
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 J1005L
J1005LH 17 J1007D
J1010DH
J1007L
J1010D
17 J1120DH
J1120D
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
J1007LH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J1008D 1 2 3 4 5 J1120L
J1010L
B 3 2 1
B
1
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
11
1 2 3
J1008L
J923D 3 2 1
3 2 1
J920D J921D J922D J923DH J925D
J926D J946 J940
3 2 1
2 1 2 1 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1 J925DH 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
3 2 1 UN125
J919 J920DH J921DH 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4
2 1
J928 J929 J918
Saddle sticher
J926DH
J922L J922DH J923L J925L jam LED PCB
3 2 1 J920L
1 2
J921L
1 2
J926L
1 2
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
PS114
Saddle folder
PS109 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
1 2 PS106 PS105 PS113 /feeder motor sensor
1 2 1 2
Saddle press SL SL
M M M SL Saddle Saddle Saddle paper
front sensor alignment lead edge push-on plate
A SL103 SL104 M112 M102 M103 SL105 plate stopper motor sensor A
Alignment roller Alignment roller Saddle Saddle Saddle Lead HP sensor HP sensor
disengage disengage alignment roller alignment guide lead edge edge gripper
solenoid (upper) solenoid (lower) motor motor stopper motor solenoid
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.8
F-8-8
8-14

Service Manual Rev. 01: Staple Finisher-D1 / Booklet Finisher-D1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Service Manual Rev. 01: Staple Finisher-D1 / Booklet Finisher-D1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual Rev. 01: Staple Finisher-D1 / Booklet Finisher-D1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Staple Finisher-D1 / Booklet Finisher-D1

Service Manual Rev. 01

© CANON INC. 2012

Remove the screw.

Tighten the screw.

Notes Before Servicing

Points to Note at Cleaning

Product Specifications Item Specifications

Stacking for collate

Tray A: up to 30 sheets of Z-fold paper per job

A4, B5, A5R, LTR, EXE, STMTR

Power Supply 220-240V AC, 50/60Hz, 8A

Staple Finisher-Q1: 129 kg LDR,LTR 72.75±4.0 192.75±4.0 6.0±2.0

Stack front edge

Names of Parts [1] Tray B [5] Saddle delivery belt

[30] [29] [28] [27] [26] [25]

Electrical control block

Saddle stitcher block

Electrical Control Unit Finisher Controller PCB

Saddle stitcher Motor,

Finisher ASIC1 Solenoid

Related Error Code

Finisher controller PCB

the top of the stack at a specific level. [2]

[1] Paper [4] Non-sort delivery roller

M1 : Inlet transport motor M27 : Inlet motor separation motor

To tray B From host machine

To saddle stitcher block

Finisher controller PCB

[1] [2] [3] [4] From inserter [5] [6] [7]

To saddle stitcher unit

PS3 : Inlet sensor UN13 : Buffer path 1 sensor PCB

Detects the position of the paper.

From host machine

Finisher controller PCB

[3] [1] Shift roller unit [3] Paper

Finisher controller PCB [1]

M4 SL1 [1] [2]

Buffer path [2]

M4 : Buffer motor UN13 : Buffer path 1 sensor PCB

[1] From the host machine [5] Lower delivery flapper

Intermediate Process Tray Assembly

M12 : Assist motor M20 : Upper guide motor

The following are the particulars of the individual operations:

[1] Lower delivery sensor signal PS6 : Lower delivery sensor

[1] [3] [5]

[1] Paper [4] Sort delivery roller

Stacks Subject to Misalignment

Stacks Free of Misalignment

[1] Paper [3] Alignment plate

[1] [2] [1] [2]

[1] Swing guide [4] Stapler

[1] Swing guide [3] Stack delivery roller

Angle switch cam

Process tray unit

Process tray unit

Angle switch cam

Plate Lifting Motor.